WO2024041196A1 - Beam management method, communication apparatus, and communication system - Google Patents

Beam management method, communication apparatus, and communication system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024041196A1
WO2024041196A1 PCT/CN2023/104391 CN2023104391W WO2024041196A1 WO 2024041196 A1 WO2024041196 A1 WO 2024041196A1 CN 2023104391 W CN2023104391 W CN 2023104391W WO 2024041196 A1 WO2024041196 A1 WO 2024041196A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
information
relay device
network device
weight
beams
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/104391
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
颜矛
马传辉
刘凤威
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2024041196A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024041196A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/21Control channels or signalling for resource management in the uplink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards the network
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication technology, and more specifically, to a beam management method, a communication device and a communication system.
  • network equipment and terminal equipment can communicate directly, but when the distance between the two is relatively long, relay equipment can be used to assist communication between the network equipment and terminal equipment.
  • the relay device amplifies the received signal (including the signal from the network device or the terminal device) and then forwards it.
  • the new radio (NR) communication system only considers beam management when network equipment and terminal equipment communicate directly. It does not consider how to adjust the beam direction of the relay equipment after the relay equipment is introduced so that the relay equipment can To better assist the communication between network equipment and terminal equipment.
  • the present application provides a beam management method, communication device and communication system, which can realize the beam direction of the relay device to be aligned with the network device, so that the relay device can better assist the communication between the network device and the terminal device.
  • a beam management method including: a network device receiving first beam information sent by a relay device; and the network device determining a first beam set based on the first beam information and the second beam information.
  • the beams in the set are used by the relay device to forward the reference signal sent by the network device or the terminal device.
  • the second beam information is reported or preconfigured by the relay device; the network device sends the first configuration information to the relay device, and the third beam information is sent by the relay device.
  • Configuration information is used to configure the first beam set.
  • the network device can configure a first beam set for the relay device based on the first beam information and the second beam information of the relay device.
  • the direction of the beams in the first beam set can be aligned with the network device. In this way, The relay device can better assist communication between the network device and the terminal device according to the first beam set.
  • the first beam information is determined by the control module of the relay device, and the second beam information is information of the forwarding module of the relay device.
  • the first beam information corresponds to the first antenna of the relay device
  • the second beam information corresponds to the second antenna of the relay device.
  • the first antenna and the second antenna are different.
  • the first antenna corresponds to the control module
  • the second antenna corresponds to the forwarding module
  • the first antenna belongs to the control module, and the second antenna belongs to the forwarding module.
  • the network device can determine the first beam set according to the first beam information determined by the control module of the relay device and the second beam information of the forwarding module of the relay device, so that the first beam set can be aimed at the network device, and then, The relay device can better assist communication between the network device and the terminal device according to the first beam set.
  • the method further includes: the network device determines the measurement information of the first beam set; the network device sends second configuration information to the relay device, the second configuration information is Configuring a second beam set, the second beam set is determined by the network device based on the measurement information.
  • the first beam set includes at least one beam that does not belong to the second beam set, or the second beam set includes at least one beam that does not belong to the first beam set.
  • the network device can configure the relay device according to the measurement information of the first beam set, which is better aligned with the network device than the first beam set. In this way, the relay device can configure the second beam set according to the second beam set. Better communication between auxiliary network equipment and terminal equipment.
  • the first beam information includes beam direction information between the relay device and the network device;
  • the second beam information includes at least one of the following: number information of beams , quasi-co-location information of beams, coverage information of beams, relative relationship between beams, quantity information of beam sets, quasi-co-location information of beam sets, coverage information of beam sets, relative relationship between beam sets, Correspondence between beam index and weight, correspondence between beam index and beam, antenna array information, weight generation information, or antenna information.
  • the network device may determine the first beam set from multiple beam sets determined by the network device based on the first beam information based on the initial beam direction information reported by the relay device about the network device and the relay device, In this way, the relay device can better assist communication between the network device and the terminal device based on the first beam set.
  • the first beam set can be aimed at the network device.
  • the network device determines the measurement information of the first beam set, including: the network device sends at least one reference signal to the terminal device through the first beam set of the relay device; the network device The device receives the measurement information, which is determined by the terminal device based on at least one reference signal forwarded by the relay device; or the network device receives at least one reference signal forwarded by the first beam set of the relay device, and the at least one reference signal The signal is sent by the terminal device to the network device; the network device determines the measurement information based on at least one reference signal.
  • the network device may determine the measurement information of the first beam set through a downlink measurement method or an uplink measurement method.
  • a reference signal is used for beam measurements.
  • the measurement information is determined by the terminal device, and the relay device is responsible for forwarding the measurement information sent by the terminal device to the network device.
  • the first configuration information includes at least one first weight, each first weight includes a first component, and the first component is used to indicate the relay device backhaul link beam.
  • the weight of the reflective surface can include the component corresponding to the backhaul link beam
  • the network device can send information corresponding to the component including the backhaul link beam to the relay device; based on the network
  • the relay device can adjust the components of the backhaul link beam of the relay device and form a new weight based on the components of the original access link beam.
  • its backhaul link beam is aligned with the network device (or better matched), and the access link beam is reflected toward the target direction (better matched with the target direction).
  • the network device may indicate to the relay device all or part of the first component of the first weight in at least one first weight through the above-mentioned first configuration information.
  • each first weight further includes a second component, the second component is used to indicate the access link beam of the relay device.
  • the calculation of the weight of the reflective surface can be simplified. Design form.
  • the component corresponding to the access link beam included in the configuration information issued by the network device the relay device can also adjust the access link beam of the relay device based on this component, so that the access link beam is consistent with the terminal Device alignment.
  • the relay device realizes signal reflection (or forwarding) between the network device and the terminal device, thereby assisting communication.
  • the second configuration information includes at least one second weight, each second weight includes a third component, and the third component is used to indicate the relay device backhaul link beam.
  • each second weight includes a fourth component, the fourth component being used to indicate the access link beam of the relay device.
  • a beam management method including: a relay device sends first beam information to a network device; the relay device receives first configuration information sent by the network device, and the first configuration information is used to configure the first beam information.
  • a beam set The beams in the first beam set are used by the relay device to forward reference signals sent by the network device or the terminal device.
  • the first beam set is determined by the network device based on the first beam information and the second beam information; wherein, The second beam information is reported by the relay device or preconfigured.
  • the first beam information is determined by the control module of the relay device, and the second beam information is information of the forwarding module of the relay device.
  • the first beam information corresponds to the first antenna of the relay device
  • the second beam information corresponds to the second antenna of the relay device.
  • the first antenna and the second antenna are different.
  • the first antenna corresponds to the control module
  • the second antenna corresponds to the forwarding module
  • the first antenna belongs to the control module, and the second antenna belongs to the forwarding module.
  • the method further includes: the relay device forwards at least one reference signal sent by the network device to the terminal device through the first beam set, and the reference signal is used for measurement; relaying The device sends measurement information of the first beam set to the network device, where the measurement information is determined by the terminal device based on at least one reference signal.
  • the method further includes: the relay device forwards at least one reference signal sent by the terminal device to the network device through the first beam set.
  • the method further includes: the relay device receives second configuration information sent by the network device, the second configuration information is used to configure the second beam set, the second beam set The set is determined by the network device based on the measurement information of the first beam set.
  • the first beam set includes at least one beam that does not belong to the second beam set, or the second beam set includes at least one beam that does not belong to the first beam set.
  • the first beam information includes beam direction information between the relay device and the network device;
  • the second beam information includes at least one of the following: number information of beams , quasi-co-location information of beams, coverage information of beams, relative relationship between beams, quantity information of beam sets, quasi-co-location information of beam sets, coverage information of beam sets, relative relationship between beam sets, Correspondence between beam index and weight, correspondence between beam index and beam, antenna array information, weight generation information, or antenna information.
  • the first configuration information includes at least one first weight, each first weight includes a first component, and the first component is used to indicate the relay device backhaul link beam.
  • each first weight further includes a second component, the second component is used to indicate the access link beam of the relay device.
  • the second configuration information includes at least one second weight, each second weight includes a third component, and the third component is used to indicate the relay device backhaul link beam.
  • each of the second weights includes a fourth component, where the fourth component is used to indicate an access link beam of the relay device.
  • a communication device including: a communication interface and a processor.
  • the communication interface is used to send and receive data and/or signaling.
  • the processor is used to execute computer programs or instructions, so that the communication device executes the first aspect. and the method described in any one of the possible implementations of the first aspect; or, causing the communication device to perform the second aspect and the method described in any one of the possible implementations of the second aspect.
  • the communication device further includes a memory, and the memory is used to store the computer program or instructions.
  • the fourth aspect provides a communication device, which can be used in the communication device of the first aspect.
  • the communication device can be a network device or a device in the network device (for example, a chip, or a chip system, or circuit), or a device that can be used with network equipment.
  • the communication device may include modules or units that perform one-to-one correspondence with the methods/operations/steps/actions described in the first aspect.
  • the modules or units may be hardware circuits, software, or It can be implemented by hardware circuit combined with software.
  • the communication device includes: a transceiver unit, configured to receive the first beam information sent by the relay device; a processing unit, configured to determine the first beam set according to the first beam information and the second beam information, The beams in the first beam set are used by the relay device to forward the reference signal sent by the communication device or terminal device.
  • the second beam information is reported or preconfigured by the relay device; the transceiver unit is also used to transmit The relay device sends first configuration information, where the first configuration information is used to configure the first beam set.
  • the above-mentioned transceiving unit may include a sending unit and a receiving unit.
  • the sending unit is used to perform the sending action of the communication device
  • the receiving unit is used to perform the receiving action of the communication device.
  • the embodiment of the present application combines the sending unit and the receiving unit into one sending and receiving unit. A unified explanation is given here and will not be repeated in the following paragraphs.
  • the first beam information is determined by the control module of the relay device, and the second beam information is information of the forwarding module of the relay device.
  • the first beam information corresponds to the first antenna of the relay device
  • the second beam information corresponds to the second antenna of the relay device.
  • the first antenna and the second antenna are different.
  • the first antenna corresponds to the control module
  • the second antenna corresponds to the forwarding module
  • the first antenna belongs to the control module, and the second antenna belongs to the forwarding module.
  • the processing unit is also used to determine the measurement information of the first beam set; the transceiver unit is also used to send the second configuration information to the relay device, the The second configuration information is used to configure a second beam set, and the second beam set is determined by the communication device based on the measurement information.
  • the first beam set includes at least one beam that does not belong to the second beam set, or the second beam set includes at least one beam that does not belong to the first beam set.
  • the first beam information includes beam direction information between the relay device and the network device;
  • the second beam information includes at least one of the following: number information of beams , quasi-co-location information of beams, coverage information of beams, relative relationship between beams, quantity information of beam sets, quasi-co-location information of beam sets, coverage information of beam sets, relative relationship between beam sets, Correspondence between beam index and weight, correspondence between beam index and beam, antenna array information, weight generation information, or antenna information.
  • the transceiver unit is also used to send at least one reference signal to the terminal device through the first beam set of the relay device; the transceiver unit is also used to receive The measurement information forwarded by the relay device, the measurement information is determined by the terminal device based on at least one reference signal forwarded by the relay device; or, the transceiver unit is also used to receive at least one beam forwarded by the first beam set of the relay device.
  • Reference signals each reference signal is sent by the terminal device to the network device; the processing unit is also used to determine the measurement information based on at least one reference signal.
  • the first configuration information includes at least one first weight, each first weight includes a first component, and the first component is used to indicate the relay device backhaul link beam.
  • each first weight further includes a second component, the second component is used to indicate the access link beam of the relay device.
  • the second configuration information includes at least one second weight, each second weight includes a third component, and the third component is used to indicate the relay device backhaul link beam.
  • each second weight includes a fourth component, the fourth component being used to indicate the access link beam of the relay device.
  • the fifth aspect provides a communication device, which can be used in the communication device of the second aspect.
  • the communication device can be a relay device or a device in the relay device (for example, a chip, or a chip system , or circuit), or a device that can be used with relay equipment.
  • the communication device may include modules or units that perform one-to-one correspondence with the methods/operations/steps/actions described in the second aspect.
  • the modules or units may be hardware circuits, software, or It can be implemented by hardware circuit combined with software.
  • the communication device includes: a transceiver unit, configured to send the first beam information to the network device; the transceiver unit is also configured to receive the first configuration information sent by the network device, where the first configuration information is used to Configuring a first beam set, the beams in the first beam set are used by the communication device to forward the reference signal sent by the network device or the terminal device, the first beam set is determined by the network device based on the first beam information and the second beam information ; wherein the second beam information is reported or preconfigured by the communication device.
  • the first beam information is determined by the control module of the communication device, and the second beam information is information of the forwarding module of the communication device.
  • the first beam information corresponds to the first antenna of the communication device
  • the second beam information corresponds to the second antenna of the communication device.
  • the first antenna and the second antenna are different.
  • the first antenna corresponds to the control module
  • the second antenna corresponds to the forwarding module
  • the first antenna belongs to the control module, and the second antenna belongs to the forwarding module.
  • the above-mentioned transceiving unit may include a sending unit and a receiving unit.
  • the sending unit is used to perform the sending action of the communication device
  • the receiving unit is used to perform the receiving action of the communication device.
  • the embodiment of the present application combines the sending unit and the receiving unit into one sending and receiving unit. A unified explanation is given here and will not be repeated in the following paragraphs.
  • the transceiver unit is also configured to send signals to the terminal through the first beam set
  • the device forwards at least one reference signal sent by the network device, and the reference signal is used for measuring beams; the transceiver unit is also used to send measurement information of the first beam set to the network device, the measurement information is determined by the terminal device based on at least one reference signal of.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to forward at least one reference signal sent by the terminal device to the network device through the first beam set.
  • the transceiver unit is also configured to receive second configuration information sent by the network device, where the second configuration information is used to configure the second beam set.
  • the second beam The set is determined by the network device based on the measurement information of the first beam set.
  • the first beam set includes at least one beam that does not belong to the second beam set, or the second beam set includes at least one beam that does not belong to the first beam set.
  • the first beam information includes beam direction information between the relay device and the network device;
  • the second beam information includes at least one of the following: number information of beams , quasi-co-location information of beams, coverage information of beams, relative relationship between beams, quantity information of beam sets, quasi-co-location information of beam sets, coverage information of beam sets, relative relationship between beam sets, Correspondence between beam index and weight, correspondence between beam index and beam, antenna array information, weight generation information, or antenna information.
  • the first configuration information includes at least one first weight, each first weight includes a first component, and the first component is used to indicate the relay device backhaul link beam.
  • each first weight further includes a second component, the second component is used to indicate the access link beam of the relay device.
  • the second configuration information includes at least one second weight, each second weight includes a third component, and the third component is used to indicate the relay device backhaul link beam.
  • each second weight includes a fourth component, the fourth component being used to indicate the access link beam of the relay device.
  • a sixth aspect provides a communication system, including: a network device and a relay device; the network device is configured to perform the method described in any one of the first aspect and any possible implementation of the first aspect; the relay The device is configured to perform the method described in any one of the second aspect and any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
  • a computer-readable storage medium including a computer program or instructions.
  • the first aspect and any possible implementation of the first aspect are enabled.
  • the method described in any one of them is executed; or, the method described in any one of the second aspect and any possible implementation manner of the second aspect is executed.
  • a computer program product which includes instructions that, when the instructions are run on a computer, cause the method described in any one of the first aspect and any possible implementation of the first aspect to be executed. ; Or, causing the method described in any one of the second aspect and any possible implementation manner of the second aspect to be executed.
  • a communication device including a logic circuit and an input-output interface.
  • the input-output interface is used to output and/or input signals.
  • the logic circuit is used to perform the first aspect and any possible implementation of the first aspect. The method described in any one of them; or, perform the method described in any one of the second aspect and any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
  • the input and output interface is used to receive the first beam information sent by the relay device; the logic circuit is used to determine the first beam set according to the first beam information and the second beam information, and the first beam The beams in the set are used to forward the corresponding reference signal in at least one reference signal, and the second beam information is reported or preconfigured by the relay device; the input and output interface is also used to send the first configuration information to the relay device, The first configuration information is used to configure the first beam set.
  • the input and output interface is used to send the first beam information to the network device; the input and output interface is also used to receive the first configuration information sent by the network device, and the first configuration information is used to configure the first beam.
  • a set, the beams in the first beam set are used to forward the corresponding reference signal in at least one reference signal, the first beam set is determined by the network device based on the first beam information and the second beam information; wherein, the second The beam information is reported or preconfigured by the communication device.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of an existing communication system 100.
  • Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of an adaptive communication system 200 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of the working principle of the reflective surface according to the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 4 is an interactive flow chart of the beam management method 400 according to the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 5 is a schematic diagram of the relationship between the antenna of the control module and the antenna of the forwarding module.
  • Figure 6 is a schematic diagram of the relationship between the beams of the control module and the beams of the forwarding module.
  • Figure 7 is a schematic diagram of the two-dimensional coverage of a beam or set of beams.
  • Figure 8 is a schematic diagram of adjacent coverage areas of different beams or sets of beams.
  • Figure 9 is a schematic diagram of the correspondence between beam sets and signals.
  • Figure 10 is a schematic diagram of the coverage areas where different beams or sets of beams intersect.
  • Figure 11 is a schematic diagram of the relative relationship between beams or sets of beams.
  • Figure 12 is a schematic diagram of beam index setting.
  • Figure 13 is a schematic diagram of the normalized gains of different beams at different angles.
  • Figure 14 is a schematic diagram of beam scanning according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 15 is another schematic diagram of beam scanning according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 16 is another schematic diagram of beam scanning according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 17 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of a relay device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 18 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 19 is a schematic diagram of a communication device 1900 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 2000 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 2100 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 2200 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD time division duplex
  • UMTS universal mobile telecommunication system
  • 5G fifth generation
  • 5G fifth generation
  • 5G fifth generation
  • NR new radio
  • 6th generation, 6G sixth generation
  • Satellite communication systems include satellite base stations and terminal equipment. Satellite base stations provide communication services to terminal devices. Satellite base stations can also communicate with ground base stations. Satellites can serve as base stations and terminal equipment. Among them, satellites can refer to non-ground base stations or non-ground equipment such as UAVs, hot air balloons, low-orbit satellites, medium-orbit satellites, and high-orbit satellites.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of this application are applicable to both homogeneous and heterogeneous network scenarios. At the same time, there are no restrictions on transmission points. They can be between macro base stations and macro base stations, micro base stations and micro base stations, or macro base stations and micro base stations. Multi-point coordinated transmission is applicable to FDD/TDD systems.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of this application are not only applicable to low-frequency scenarios (sub 6G), but also to high-frequency scenarios (above 6GHz), terahertz, optical communications, etc.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of this application can be applied not only to the communication between network equipment and terminals, but also to the communication between network equipment and network equipment, the communication between terminals, the Internet of Vehicles, the Internet of Things, the Industrial Internet, etc.
  • the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application can also be applied to a scenario where a terminal is connected to a single base station, where the base station to which the terminal is connected and the core network (core network, CN) to which the base station is connected are of the same standard.
  • core network core network
  • CN core network
  • the base station corresponds to 5G base station, and 5G base station is directly connected to 5G Core; or if CN is 6G Core, the base station is 6G base station, and 6G base station is directly connected to 6G Core.
  • the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application can also be applied to a dual connectivity (DC) scenario in which a terminal is connected to at least two base stations.
  • DC dual connectivity
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of this application can also use macro and micro scenarios composed of different forms of base stations in the communication network.
  • the base stations can be satellites, aerial balloon stations, drone stations, etc.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of this application are also suitable for scenarios in which wide-coverage base stations and small-coverage base stations coexist.
  • Applicable scenarios include but are not limited to terrestrial cellular communication, NTN, satellite communication, and high altitude communication platform (high altitude platform).
  • station (HAPS) communication vehicle-to-everything (V2X), integrated access and backhaul (IAB), and reconfigurable intelligent surface (RIS) communication and other scenarios .
  • V2X vehicle-to-everything
  • IAB integrated access and backhaul
  • RIS reconfigurable intelligent surface
  • the terminal in the embodiment of the present application may be a device with wireless transceiver functions, and may specifically refer to user equipment (UE), access terminal, subscriber unit (subscriber unit), user station, or mobile station (mobile station). , remote station, remote terminal terminal, mobile device, user terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user device.
  • UE user equipment
  • access terminal subscriber unit (subscriber unit)
  • subscriber unit subscriber unit
  • user station or mobile station (mobile station).
  • remote station remote terminal terminal terminal, mobile device, user terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user device.
  • the terminal device may also be a satellite phone, a cellular phone, a smartphone, a wireless data card, a wireless modem, a machine type communications device, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (wireless local loop, WLL) station, personal digital assistant (PDA), customer-premises equipment (CPE), intelligent point of sale (POS) machine, handheld device with wireless communication function, computing Equipment or other processing equipment connected to wireless modems, vehicle-mounted equipment, communication equipment carried on high-altitude aircraft, wearable devices, drones, robots, terminals in device-to-device (D2D) communication, V2X Terminals in virtual reality (VR) terminal equipment, augmented reality (AR) terminal equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control (industrial control), wireless terminals in self-driving (self driving), remote Wireless terminals in remote medical, wireless terminals in smart grid, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart city, and smart home Wireless terminals or terminal equipment in communication networks evolved after 5G, etc.
  • the device used to implement the functions of the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application may be a terminal device; it may also be a device that can support the terminal device to implement the function, such as a chip system.
  • the device can be installed in a terminal device or used in conjunction with the terminal device.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the network device in the embodiment of the present application has a wireless transceiver function and is used to communicate with the terminal device.
  • the access network equipment can be a node in the radio access network (radio access network, RAN), and can also be called a base station or a RAN node. It can be an evolved base station (evolved Node B, eNB or eNodeB) in LTE; or a base station in a 5G network such as gNodeB (gNB) or a base station in a public land mobile network (public land mobile network, PLMN) evolved after 5G. Broadband network gateway (BNG), aggregation switch or 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) access equipment, etc.
  • eNB evolved Node B
  • gNB gNodeB
  • PLMN public land mobile network
  • BNG Broadband network gateway
  • aggregation switch or 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) access equipment etc.
  • the network equipment in the embodiment of the present application may also include various forms of base stations, such as: macro base stations, micro base stations (also called small stations), relay stations, transmission points (transmitting and receiving point, TRP), transmitting points , TP), mobile switching center and base station responsible for device-to-device (D2D), vehicle outreach (vehicle-to-everything, V2X), machine-to-machine (M2M) communications Functional equipment, etc., can also include centralized units (CU) and distributed units (DU) in cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, C-RAN) systems, and NTN communication systems.
  • Network equipment is not specifically limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • the device used to implement the function of the network device in the embodiment of the present application may be a network device, or may be a device that can support the network device to implement the function, such as a chip system.
  • the device can be installed in a network device or used in conjunction with a network device.
  • the chip system in the embodiment of the present application may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the relay device in the embodiment of the present application has a signal forwarding function and can amplify the signal, such as a repeater.
  • the relay equipment can also move the carrier frequency of the signal, or it can demodulate the signal and then re-modulate it and then forward it, or it can also reduce the noise of the signal and then forward it. Therefore, relaying can be in any of the following forms: amplification forwarding, demodulation forwarding, frequency shift forwarding, or noise reduction forwarding.
  • relay equipment can also be considered as a special form of terminal equipment. If the network side's ability to control relay equipment is considered, it can be divided into non-intelligent relay equipment and intelligent relay equipment; or it can be divided into uncontrolled repeater equipment and network controlled repeater equipment. , NetConRepeater or NCR). Network equipment can control relay equipment to perform more performance-enhancing functions, such as relay transmit power control, relay amplification gain control, relay beam scanning control, relay precoding control, on/off control, and uplink/downlink forwarding control. at least one of them.
  • Relay equipment logically contains multiple parts, including one or more signal transceiver units, controllers, signal amplifiers, etc., which are used to implement communication and signaling interaction, signal amplification, etc. with network equipment and terminal equipment.
  • the controller of the relay device is also called a mobile terminal (MT), terminal, or fixed terminal (FT).
  • MT mobile terminal
  • FT fixed terminal
  • Other block diagrams can constitute a radio unit (RU) (also known as a radio unit (RU)). It can be called either DU, distributed radio unit (distributed radio unit, DRU), etc.).
  • one of the signal transceiver units is used to receive signals from network equipment, and the other signal transceiver unit is used to forward the amplified received signals to the terminal equipment.
  • the controller can also communicate with network equipment or terminal equipment with the help of signal transceiver units. letter.
  • the controller communicates with network equipment through the signal transceiver unit, which is used to establish communication links and beam alignment between relay equipment and network equipment. It can also be used to receive configuration/instruction information of network equipment, thereby facilitating network equipment. Control the working time, working status, or working mode of relay equipment. Or it is used to receive the trigger signal of the terminal device, so that the relay device enters the corresponding working mode as needed.
  • the controller can also determine the working status (such as amplification factor and phase) of the signal amplifier based on the network device indication information or its own measurement information.
  • Each unit may be one or more. For example, there are multiple signal amplifiers, corresponding to different polarization directions or relay wireless radio frequency channels.
  • beamforming technology can limit the energy of transmitted signals to a certain beam direction, thereby increasing the efficiency of signal transmission and reception.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an existing communication system 100.
  • (a) of FIG. 1 shows the beam scanning process of the network device 110.
  • (b) of FIG. 1 shows the beam scanning process of the terminal device 120.
  • the terminal device 120 fixes the receiving beam.
  • the network device 110 sends reference signals to the terminal device 120 through multiple transmit beams, and the terminal device 120 performs measurements, thereby completing the transmission of the network device. Matching between beams and wireless channels.
  • the terminal device 120 fixes the transmit beam.
  • the network device 110 receives the reference signal sent by the terminal device 120 through multiple receive beams and performs measurements, thereby completing the connection between the receive beam of the network device and the wireless channel. match.
  • the network device 110 fixes the transmitting beam.
  • the terminal device 120 receives the reference signal sent by the network device 110 through multiple receiving beams and performs measurements, thereby completing the receiving beam and wireless channel of the terminal device. match between.
  • the network device 110 fixes the receive beam.
  • the terminal device 120 sends a reference signal to the network device 110 through multiple transmit beams, and the network device 110 performs measurements, thereby completing the transmit beam and wireless channel of the terminal device. match between.
  • the communication system incorporating the relay device 130 is shown in Figure 2 .
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of an adaptive communication system 200 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the relay device 130 consists of two parts: a control module 1301 (which can also be a controller) and a forwarding module 1302 (which can also be a forwarding link).
  • the control module 1301 communicates with the network device 110, and the communication link is a control link.
  • the forwarding module 1302 communicates with the network device 110 and the terminal device 120.
  • the link it uses to communicate with the network device 110 is a backhaul link, and the link it uses to communicate with the terminal device 120 is an access link. link).
  • the relay device 130 (which is a reflective surface) has two antenna panels (or, two antennas).
  • the first antenna panel (or first antenna) is used for the control module 1301 to communicate with the network device 110 (the antenna panel is called the antenna panel of the control module 1301, or the antenna is called the antenna of the control module 1301); the second The antenna panel (or second antenna) is used to assist the terminal device 120 in communicating with the network device 110 .
  • the second antenna can be used to reflect the signal. When reflecting a signal, the incident direction and the emitting direction of the signal correspond to two beams respectively.
  • the direction in the relay device 130 opposite to the network device 110 is called the backhaul link beam direction
  • the direction opposite to the terminal device 120 is called the access link beam direction.
  • the backhaul link beam direction may correspond to the first component of the weight #A (generally referred to) of the relay device 130
  • the access link beam direction may correspond to the second component of the weight #A of the relay device 130.
  • Component, weight #A can correspond to both the return link direction and the access link direction.
  • Each antenna panel of the relay device 130 may be composed of multiple (including two or more) antennas, and a single antenna panel may form a beam.
  • the forwarding module 1302 of the relay device 130 realizes signal transmission between the auxiliary terminal device 120 and the network device 110 by reflecting the incident signal and controlling the antenna's reflection of the signal (reflection phase, or reflection weight). In particular, after the beam corresponding to the reflection weight is matched with the beam of the network device and the beam of the terminal device respectively, better transmission performance can be obtained.
  • phase of the weight satisfies the following:
  • the reflective surface (which is the relay device 130) will deflect the signal from the access link angle. Reflected out.
  • signals are incident from the angle of the backhaul link and emitted from the angle of the access link to assist communication between the network device 110 and the terminal device 120 .
  • the embodiment of this application focuses on the phase discussion: the phase ⁇ corresponding to the weight of the reflective surface can be split into two parts: the backhaul link component ⁇ BH and the access link component ⁇ AC , such that:
  • ⁇ BH and ⁇ AC can also be designed based on discrete Fourier transform (discrete fourier transform, DFT) respectively, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • DFT discrete Fourier transform
  • the relay device 130 has three antenna panels (or three antennas), where the first antenna panel (or the first antenna) is used for the relay device 130 to communicate with the network device 110 (This antenna panel is called a backhaul link antenna panel, or this antenna is called a backhaul link antenna).
  • the second antenna panel (or second antenna) is used for the relay device 130 to communicate with the terminal device 120 (the antenna).
  • the third antenna panel (or the third antenna) is used for the control module 1301 of the relay device 130 to communicate with the network device 110 (
  • the antenna panel is called the antenna panel of the control module 1301, or the antenna is called the antenna of the control module 1301); and the first antenna and the second antenna work simultaneously to realize signal reception, amplification, and forwarding functions.
  • Each antenna panel of the relay device 130 may be composed of multiple (including two or more) antennas, and a single antenna panel may form a beam.
  • the backhaul link beam of the relay device 130 amplifies the signal from the network device 110, the amplified signal is forwarded to the terminal device 120 via the access link beam, where it is forwarded by the access link beam of the relay device 130.
  • the beam needs to be aimed at the terminal device 120 to obtain better transmission performance.
  • the access link refers to the link facing the sub-level nodes in the process of auxiliary signal transmission by the relay device.
  • the access link beam refers to the beam used for communication between the relay device and the terminal device.
  • the access link receiving beam refers to the beam used by the relay device to receive signals from the terminal device.
  • the access link transmit beam refers to the beam used by the relay device to send signals to the terminal device.
  • the backhaul link refers to the link facing the parent node during the auxiliary signal transmission process of the relay device.
  • the backhaul link beam refers to the beam used for communication between the relay device and the network device.
  • the backhaul link receiving beam refers to the beam used by the relay device to receive signals from the network device.
  • the backhaul link transmit beam refers to the relay device transmitting beam to the network device.
  • the relay device 130 may include an amplification and forwarding relay device, and may also include a reflective surface.
  • the network device 110 sends a signal to a reflective surface (called a return link), and the reflective surface reflects the signal to the terminal device 120 (called an access link), thereby opening up the terminal device and the network device. signal link between them.
  • the reflective surface is usually composed of a large-scale antenna, and different antennas can reflect signals differently. By adjusting the reflection factor of each antenna, the backhaul link on the reflective surface forms a narrow beam, and the access link also forms a narrow beam, which are respectively aligned with the direction of the network device 120 and the direction of the terminal device 120, thereby better integrating the network.
  • the signal sent by the device is reflected to the end device.
  • the embodiment of this application is described by taking the relay device 130 as an example.
  • the relay device 130 includes a reflective surface and an amplification and forwarding relay device.
  • the beam direction of the backhaul link of the relay device 130 needs to be aligned with the network device 110. If the beam direction of the backhaul link of the relay device 130 is not aligned with the network device 110, the signal sent by the network device 110 may not be received well, and the signal from the network device 110 may not be forwarded to the terminal well.
  • Device 130 the existing beam management between the network device 110 and the terminal device 120 is mainly to facilitate the terminal device 120 to connect to the network device 110, and does not consider how to adjust the beam direction of the relay device 130 after adding the relay device 130, so that the relay The device 130 can better assist communication problems between the network device 110 and the terminal device 120 .
  • the backhaul link beam direction of the relay device 130 is aligned with the network device 110 is directly related to the relay device 130 .
  • the access link beam direction is accurate, that is, the deviation of the backhaul link beam direction of the relay device 130 will cause the access link beam direction of the relay device 130 to deflect, which will cause the relay device 130 to The actual coverage area of the access link does not match the signal blind area or weak area in the network. Therefore, it is necessary to align the backhaul link beam direction of the relay device 130 with the network device 110 .
  • this application provides a beam management method, communication device and communication system, which can realize the beam direction alignment of the relay equipment and the network equipment, so that the relay equipment can better assist the network equipment and the terminal equipment. communication between.
  • backhaul link and access link used throughout this article can also be backhaul side and access side, or other similar terms, which are used to distinguish different directions of relay equipment, that is: backhaul chain
  • backhaul side The path or backhaul side is used to indicate the relative direction between the relay device and the network device; the access link or access side is used to indicate the relative direction between the relay device and the terminal device.
  • backhaul chain The path or backhaul side is used to indicate the relative direction between the relay device and the network device; the access link or access side is used to indicate the relative direction between the relay device and the terminal device.
  • Figure 4 is an interactive flow chart of the beam management method 400 according to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the method flow in Figure 4 can be executed by the relay device 130 and the network device 110, or by modules and/or devices (for example, chips or integrated circuits, etc.) with corresponding functions installed in the relay device 130 and the network device 110. Execution is not limited by this application. The following description takes the relay device 130 and the network device 110 as examples.
  • the execution subjects of the beam management method 400 are the relay device 130 and the network device 110 .
  • the beam management method 400 includes:
  • the relay device 130 sends the beam information W1 to the network device 110.
  • the network device 130 receives the beam information W1 sent from the relay device 130 .
  • the beam information W1 sent by the relay device 130 to the network device 110 may be determined by the control module 1301 of the relay device 130 .
  • the control module 1301 can also be called any one of a controller, a mobile terminal, a terminal or a fixed terminal, which is not limited by the embodiments of this application.
  • the relay device 130 In order for the relay device 130 to assist the network device 110 in communicating with the terminal device 130, the relay device 130 first needs to access the network device 110. During the access process, the relay device 130 and the network device 110 may establish a connection relationship. During the access process, the control module 1301 determines the beam direction information between the network device 110 and the relay device 130. The beam direction information can be regarded as the initial beam direction information between the network device 110 and the relay device 130 . The beam direction information may provide a reference for realizing the beam direction alignment of the backhaul link of the relay device 130 to the network device 110, which will be described in detail below.
  • the control module 1301 has an antenna array, and there is an associated relationship between the antenna array of the control module 1301 and the antenna array used by the forwarding module 1302 to assist the network device 110 in communicating with the terminal device 120 .
  • the antenna array of the control module 1301 may be independent or shared with the forwarding module 1302. If the antenna array of the control module 1301 is independent, the antenna array of the control module 1301 can be used to control the antenna array of the forwarding module 1302.
  • the antenna array of the control module 1301 is different from the antenna array of the reflective surface; when the relay device 130 is an amplification and forwarding relay device, the control module 1301 and the forwarding module can share the antenna array. , it is also possible not to share the antenna array (for example, adopt a simpler controller).
  • the antenna array of the control module 1301 satisfies m ⁇ n
  • the antenna array of the forwarding module 1302 satisfies (m*X) ⁇ (n*Y).
  • the number of antenna arrays of the forwarding module 1302 is X times that of the antenna array of the control module 1301 in the horizontal direction, and Y times that of the antenna array of the control module 1301 in the vertical direction.
  • the beam information W1 determined by the control module 1301 may be determined by an existing beam scanning method.
  • the network device 110 sends a reference signal to the terminal device 120 through the relay device 130.
  • the terminal device 120 measures the reference signal and reports the measurement result of the reference signal to the network device 110.
  • the network device 110 performs the measurement according to the measurement result. As a result, it is determined whether the beam used to transmit the reference signal is suitable. If it is not suitable, the beam is readjusted and the process is repeated; if it is suitable, the beam is determined to be the initial beam between the network device 110 and the relay device 130; by
  • the terminal device 120 sends a reference signal to the network device 110 through the relay device 130.
  • the network device 110 measures the reference signal and determines the measurement result of the reference signal. If it is inappropriate, it re-adjusts the beam and repeats the process. ; If appropriate, determine the beam to be the initial beam between the network device 110 and the relay device 130 .
  • control module 1301 can determine the initial beam direction information between the relay device 130 and the network device 110 and report it to the network device 110 .
  • the beam information W1 includes beam direction information between the relay device 130 and the network device 110 .
  • the beam direction information between the relay device 130 and the network device 110 may refer to the beam direction information of the backhaul link of the relay device, or may refer to the beam direction information of the network device.
  • the beam direction information please refer to the subsequent multi-level description of the beam information W2, which will not be described again here.
  • the network device 110 determines the beam set Q1 according to the beam information W1 and the beam information W2.
  • the beam information W2 may be reported by the relay device 130 or may be preconfigured. For example, when the relay device 130 is deployed, the beam information W2 may be configured in the network device 110 through operation/maintenance means.
  • the beam information W2 may include at least one of the following:
  • Quasi-co-location information for a beam or set of beams
  • the antenna information may include the antenna information of the forwarding module 1302 or the antenna information of the control module 1301. See the description below for details, not much to say here.
  • the beam information W2 is the information of the forwarding module 1302 of the relay device 130 .
  • the beam information W1 corresponds to the first antenna of the relay device 130
  • the beam information W2 corresponds to the second antenna of the relay device 130.
  • the first antenna corresponds to the control module 1301 of the relay device 130
  • the second antenna corresponds to the forwarding module 1302 of the relay device 130.
  • the first antenna belongs to the control module 1301 of the relay device 130
  • the second antenna belongs to the forwarding module 1302 of the relay device 130.
  • the first antenna and the second antenna reference may be made to the foregoing description of the hardware device of the relay device 130 , which will not be described again here.
  • the first antenna may be the antenna panel of the control module 1301 described above, and the second antenna may also be the antenna panel of the forwarding module 1302 described above.
  • the first antenna and the second antenna may be two different antennas.
  • the antenna information may include at least one of the following: number of antennas, polarization configuration information, antenna arrangement, etc.
  • the antenna information may also include a multiple difference between the number of antenna arrays of the control module 1301 and the number of antenna arrays of the forwarding module 1302.
  • the number of antenna arrays of the forwarding module 1302 and the number of antenna arrays of the control module 1301 are in the horizontal direction.
  • the antenna information may also include the angle between the antenna of the control module 1301 and the antenna of the forwarding module 1302. Please refer to Figure 5 for details.
  • Figure 5 is a schematic diagram of the relationship between the antenna of the control module and the antenna of the forwarding module.
  • the antenna array of the forwarding module 1302 is 4 ⁇ 4, and the antenna array of the control module 1301 is 2 ⁇ 2.
  • the polarization directions of the antenna of the control module 1301 and the antenna of the forwarding module 1302 are both dual-polarization directions.
  • the number before the multiplication sign represents the number of antennas in the horizontal direction (horizontal)
  • the number after the multiplication sign represents the number of antennas in the vertical direction (vertical).
  • the number of antennas of the control module 1301 is 4 antennas
  • the number of antennas of the forwarding module 1302 is 16 antennas.
  • the ratio of the number of antennas of the forwarding module 1302 to the number of antennas of the MT is 2. In the vertical direction, the ratio of the number of antennas of the forwarding module 1302 to the number of antennas of the MT is 2.
  • the angle between the antenna of the control module 1301 and the antenna of the forwarding module 1302 is 0° (same direction).
  • the beam set Q1 determined by the network device 110 based on the beam information W1 and the beam information W2 may include all beams that the relay device 130 can generate, or may include some beams among all the beams that the relay device 130 can generate.
  • each beam of the control module 1301 is greater than the width of each backhaul link beam of the relay device 130, and the beam direction of the control module 1301 has a certain reference for determining the backhaul link beam direction of the relay device 130. effect.
  • the antenna array of the control module 1301 and the antenna array of the forwarding module 1302 differ in the number of elements in the horizontal direction by M H , and the number of elements in the vertical direction differ by a multiple of M V , and the co-polarization directions of the two are in the same direction (if If there is a deviation, the azimuth angle difference can be compensated based on the angular offset).
  • the network device 110 may determine the beam set Q1 based on the above-mentioned relationship between the beams of the control module 1301 and the beams of the forwarding module 1302.
  • the network device 110 can respectively obtain the M'H beam components in the horizontal direction and the M'V beam components in the vertical direction of the forwarding module 1302 according to the beams of the control module 1301, and perform beam management based on these beam components.
  • the sum of the widths of the beams of the control module 1301 should be equal to the sum of the widths of the backhaul link beams of the forwarding module 1302. See Figure 6 for details.
  • Figure 6 is a schematic diagram of the relationship between the beams of the control module and the beams of the forwarding module.
  • the beam width of the control module 1301 is represented by a large circle
  • the beam width of the forwarding module 1302 is represented by a small circle.
  • the beam width of each beam of the control module 1301 is greater than the beam width of each beam of the forwarding module 1302 (mainly the backhaul link beam).
  • the ratio of the number of beams of the forwarding module 1302 to the number of beams of the control module 1301 is 2:4 in the horizontal direction, and the ratio in the vertical direction is 2:4.
  • the beam width circled by the small dotted box on the left is equal to the beam width circled by the small dotted box on the right.
  • the resolution of each beam in the small dotted box on the right is higher than that on the left.
  • the beam information W1 can be used to determine the small dotted box on the left, for example, beam #21, and the beam information W2 can be used to determine the large dotted box on the right, for example, beam *31, beam *32, beam * 41 and beam*42.
  • M' V beam components in the vertical direction (see *31 and *41 in Figure 6) and 1 beam component in the horizontal direction constitute M' V beams.
  • the network device 110 selects the most central beam component (see *42 in Figure 6) among the M'H beam components to be combined with the M'V beam components respectively to form M'V beams (for example, The combination of *31 and *42, the combination of *41 and *42).
  • the network device 110 randomly selects one beam component from M' H beam components and combines it with M' V beam components respectively to form M' V beams.
  • the network device 110 determines M' H + M' V -1 beams.
  • the beam set Q1 determined by the network device 110 according to the beam information W1 and the beam information W2 includes R beams.
  • the network device 110 selects the most central K H beam components among the M' H beam components and combines them with the M' V beam components respectively to form K H M' V beams. For example, the network device 110 randomly selects K H beam components from M' H beam components and combines them with M' V beam components respectively to form K H M' V beams.
  • the network device 110 finally determines M′ H +M′ V ⁇ 1 beams.
  • the beam set Q1 determined by the network device 110 according to the beam information W1 and the beam information W2 includes R beams.
  • the M' H beam components in the horizontal direction and the M' V beam components in the vertical direction are combined in pairs in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction respectively to form M' H M' V beams.
  • the network device 110 finally determines M' H M' V beams.
  • the beam set Q1 determined by the network device 110 according to the beam information W1 and the beam information W2 includes R beams.
  • K H , K V , M' H and M' V are positive integers.
  • K H ⁇ M H and K V ⁇ M V can reduce the scanning overhead.
  • M' H ⁇ M H , M' V ⁇ M V making the beam measurement more accurate.
  • M' H is close to M H
  • M' V is close to M V , so that better beam alignment performance can be obtained through beam interpolation.
  • the beam set Q1 includes R beams, and the determination process of the R beams may refer to the above description.
  • the beam set Q1 is used for the relay device 130 to assist the communication between the network device 110 and the terminal device 120, or is used for the communication between the relay device 130 and the network device 110. The two can be understood to have equivalent meanings.
  • the beam information W1 can indicate the initial beam direction information between the relay device 130 and the network device 110.
  • the initial beam direction information can determine at least one beam of the control module 1301, and the width of each beam in the at least one beam. is greater than the width of each backhaul link beam of the forwarding module 1302, which will make the resolution of the beam of the control module 1301 lower than the resolution of the backhaul link beam of the forwarding module 1302.
  • One beam of the control module 1301 may correspond to multiple backhaul link beams of the forwarding module 1302.
  • the network device 110 can determine the backhaul link beam of the forwarding module 1302 according to the beam of the control module 1301, so that the backhaul link beam direction of the relay device 130 is aligned with the network device 110.
  • the beam information W2 includes information on the number of beams/beam sets of backhaul link beams.
  • the quantity information may refer to the number of the largest beams/beam sets of the backhaul link, or it may refer to the number of candidate beams/candidate beam sets of the backhaul link, where the candidate beams/candidate beam sets belong to the backhaul link. A subset of all beams/beam sets.
  • the beam information W2 includes the number of sets in a beam set (a beam set that can be determined according to the beam information W2, such as ⁇ A, B, C, ... ⁇ ), and A, B or C are the indexes of the beam set.
  • the beam information W2 may also include the number of beams, that is, the beam information W2 includes the number of sets in the beam set ⁇ A, B, C,... ⁇ , and the number of beams in the beam set A ( ⁇ a0, a1, a2,... ⁇ ) , the number of beams in beam set B ( ⁇ b0, b1, b2,... ⁇ ), and the number of beams in beam set C ( ⁇ c0, c1, c2,... ⁇ ), a0, a1, a2, b0, b1, b2, c0, c1 and c2 are all the indices of the beam.
  • the beam information W2 may also include information on the number of beams/beam sets of access link beams.
  • the quantity information may refer to the number of the largest beams/beam sets of the access link, or it may refer to the number of candidate beams/candidate beam sets of the access link, where the candidate beams/candidate beam sets belong to the access link. A subset of all beams/beam sets.
  • a beam set (a beam set may also be called a beam set) includes at least one beam.
  • the beam set or the number of beams can be any value among ⁇ 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 16, 24, 32 ⁇ . Among them, the number of beam sets or beams is not greater than K, and K can be any value among ⁇ 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 16, 24, 32 ⁇ .
  • the beam set that can be determined based on the beam information W2 may include one or more beam sets.
  • the beam set determined based on the beam information W2 is ⁇ A, B, C,... ⁇ , which includes multiple beam sets.
  • it includes beam set A, beam set B, beam set C, etc.
  • the beam information W2 includes quasi co-location (QCL) information of the access link beam or the beam/beam set of the backhaul link beam.
  • QCL quasi co-location
  • QCL relationships are used to indicate that multiple resources have one or more identical or similar communication characteristics.
  • the same or similar communication configurations can be used.
  • the signals corresponding to the antenna ports with a QCL relationship have the same parameters, or the parameters of one antenna port (also called QCL parameters) can be used to determine the parameters of another antenna port that has a QCL relationship with the antenna port.
  • this parameter can include one or more of the following: delay spread (delay spread), Doppler spread (doppler spread), Doppler shift (doppler shift), average delay (average delay), average gain , spatial rx parameters.
  • the spatial reception parameters can include one or more of the following: angle of arrival (angle of arrival, AOA), average AOA, AOA extension, angle of departure (angle of departure, AOD), average AOD, AOD extension, receiving antenna spatial correlation parameters, transmit antenna spatial correlation parameters, transmit beam, receive beam and resource identification.
  • beam is an abstract concept, which may correspond to instantaneous or statistical channel characteristics when transmitting signals, such as delay spread, Doppler spread, Doppler spread, etc.
  • Frequency shift (doppler shift), average delay (average delay), average gain, spatial reception parameters (spatial Rx parameters), spatial transmission parameters (spatial Tx parameters).
  • the spatial reception parameters or spatial transmission parameters may include one or more of the following: AOA, average AOA, AOA extension, AOD, average AOD, AOD extension, receiving antenna spatial correlation parameters, transmitting antenna spatial correlation parameters, transmitting antenna spatial correlation parameters, transmit beam, receive beam and resource identification.
  • the beams can be indicated/characterized by reference signals, that is, the QCL relationship between the reference signals reflects different or the same beams; in addition, the beams can also be represented by the weights acting on the antennas in the multi-antenna system or the weights acting on the antenna ports. It is represented by a codebook, that is, a beam can also correspond to a codebook.
  • the QCL information of the beam set is shown in Table 1:
  • Table 1 only shows the QCL information of beam set indexes A, B, and C. "! indicates that in addition, Table 1 can also include QCL information of other beam sets, or Table 1 can also only include some of the above-mentioned beams. The collection of QCL information is not limited in the embodiment of this application. If "! appears in the table below, it can be deduced in this way and will not be described again.
  • TCI-StateId-A is used to indicate the transmission configuration indicator (TCI) information of set A.
  • TCI is used to configure multiple downlink reference signals and physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) solution
  • PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
  • a quasi-co-located QCL relationship is configured between de-modulation reference signals (DMRS).
  • DMRS de-modulation reference signals
  • the TCI here refers to the TCI corresponding to the access link beam of the relay device. It can be used to represent the quasi-co-located QCL relationship between the relay device forwarding the downlink reference signal and the physical downlink shared channel demodulation reference signal.
  • TCI can also It is another name, and the embodiment of this application does not limit it.
  • the QCL information of the beams in the beam set is shown in Table 2:
  • TCI-status number-a0 is used to indicate the TCI information of beam a0.
  • beam information W2 includes coverage information of access link beams or beams/beam sets of backhaul link beams.
  • the coverage information of the beam set is shown in Table 3:
  • the coverage information of the beams in the beam set is as shown in Table 4:
  • the coverage range is the spatial coverage information of the corresponding beam set or beam.
  • the coverage range is the spatial coverage information of the corresponding beam set
  • the coverage area of a beam set may be the union of the coverage areas formed by all beams in the beam set, or may be the union of the coverage areas formed by partial beams in the beam set, or may be the beam gain in the beam set exceeding The union of beamformed coverage areas of a certain value.
  • the spatial coverage information may refer to the coverage area, and the coverage area may refer to the logical area division.
  • the coverage area corresponds to a square, the square defines the length and width, and the coverage area corresponds to the logical number of the square, or the coverage area corresponds to the starting position of the long side, the starting position of the wide side, the length of the long side, the length of the wide side, At least one of the long side end position and the wide side end position.
  • the coverage area corresponds to a cube.
  • the square defines the length, width, and height.
  • the coverage area corresponds to the logical number of the cube, or the coverage area corresponds to the starting position of the long side, the starting position of the wide side, and the starting position of the height.
  • the coverage area corresponds to the polar coordinate area.
  • the polar coordinate area defines the radius and angle.
  • the coverage area corresponds to the logical number of the radius, or the coverage area corresponds to the radius start position, radius end position, angle start position, and angle end position. at least one of them.
  • the spatial coverage information refers to the coverage angle range (or coverage direction, or coverage direction range). Specifically, it may include horizontal angles and/or vertical angles. That is, the coverage angle range information may include at least one of the following: horizontal angle width, horizontal angle starting value, horizontal angle ending value, vertical angle width, vertical angle starting value, beam peak direction (beam peak direction), beam width, Beam center direction (beam center direction), rated beam isotropic radiated power (EIRP), air interface peak direction set (over the air peak directions set), beam direction pair (beam direction pair), or vertical angle end value.
  • the coverage angle range information may include at least one of the following: horizontal angle width, horizontal angle starting value, horizontal angle ending value, vertical angle width, vertical angle starting value, beam peak direction (beam peak direction), beam width, Beam center direction (beam center direction), rated beam isotropic radiated power (EIRP), air interface peak direction set (over the air peak directions set), beam direction pair (beam direction pair), or vertical angle end value.
  • each beam is related to the beam identity, reference beam direction pair, beamwidth, rated beam EIRP, over the air (OTA) peak direction setting, maximum Beam direction pairs in the steering direction are associated with their associated nominal beam EIRP and beamwidth (s).
  • the rated beam EIRP level is the maximum radiated power declared by the repeater in the relevant beam peak direction.
  • a specific rated beam EIRP level may be required for each beam peak direction associated with a pair of beam directions within the OTA peak direction setting.
  • Figure 7 is a schematic diagram of the two-dimensional coverage of a beam or set of beams.
  • (a) of Figure 7 is a schematic diagram in which the coverage area is square, that is, the coverage area of the beam or beam set is two-dimensional.
  • a box in (a) of Figure 7 represents a beam set or the coverage of a beam.
  • (a) of FIG. 7 only illustrates the coverage ranges of adjacent beams, and the coverage ranges between beam sets or beams may overlap.
  • the coverage range of the access link beam can approximately correspond to the area jointly defined by the horizontal direction (horizontal) and the vertical direction (vertical) in the array antenna formation.
  • the x-axis corresponds to the horizontal direction
  • the y-axis corresponds to the vertical direction.
  • the coverage of a beam or a set of beams can be defined as the width of the 3dB angle (the width of the angle can also be other values, such as 5dB, 6dB, that is, the angular area between the directions that differ by 3dB from the strongest beam gain.
  • Figure 7 (b) shows the corresponding coverage area in the polar coordinate area, where the coverage area of a certain beam or beam set is area abcd, and the starting position of the radius is The end position of the radius is The starting position of the angle is ⁇ 1, and the ending position of the angle is
  • the access link beam sets of the relay device 130 or the coverage areas corresponding to the beams may be adjacent, as shown in FIG. 8 .
  • Figure 8 is a schematic diagram of adjacent coverage areas of different beams or sets of beams.
  • the beam information W2 may include the starting coverage of the beam set A, beam sets A, and B , C, etc., and the adjacent/relative order of each beam set, that is, the network device 110 can determine the coverage of each beam set based on the above information.
  • the beam information W2 may include the starting coverage of the beam a0, the coverage width information of each beam (the beam shown in (b) of FIG. 8), and the adjacent/relative order of each beam, that is, the network device 110 can determine the coverage of each beam based on the above information.
  • the beam set or the relative order between beams can be predefined. If the beam set or the relative order between beams is predefined, then the coverage of the 0th beam set or the 0th beam and the coverage of each beam set or each beam Coverage width determines the coverage of each beam set or each beam.
  • a beam set (or beam) can be associated (or corresponding) with a signal, as shown in Figure 7 ( Figure 9 takes a beam set as an example).
  • Figure 9 is a schematic diagram of the correspondence between beam sets and signals. Specifically, the relative order between the beam sets can be determined based on the sequence of the signals in the time domain or frequency domain, or the index of the corresponding beam set can be determined based on the position of the signal in the time domain or frequency domain (or serial number).
  • T in Figure 9 can be understood as the transmission period of signal 0 (or other signals such as signal 1 and signal 2), or the use period of beam set A (or other beam sets such as beam set B and beam set C). This application implements Examples are not limited.
  • the beam information W2 may only include the starting coverage of the 0th beam set and the coverage width of each beam set, and the network device 110 may determine the coverage of each beam set.
  • the coverage in (a) of Figure 8 takes angle as an example. Assume that the relative order between beam sets is predefined according to the order in (a) of Figure 8.
  • the coverage width of each beam set is W, then the 0th
  • the angular coverage range of the beam set (ie, beam set A) is (S, S+W], where S is the starting coverage angle of the beam set A, then the angular coverage range of the beam set B is (S+W, S+2W ], the angular coverage range of beam set C is (S+2W, S+3W], and the angular coverage range of the i-th beam set is (S+i ⁇ W, S+(i+1) ⁇ W].
  • the beam information W2 may only include the starting coverage of the 0th beam and the coverage width of each beam, and the network device 110 may determine the coverage of each beam. That is, the coverage of each beam in (b) of FIG. 8 can also be determined by the above method of determining the coverage of each beam set.
  • the beam information W2 includes the relative relationship between access link beams or beam sets of backhaul link beams, or the relative relationship between beams.
  • Relative relationships can refer to relationships between coverage areas. Relative relationships include intersection relationships, inclusion relationships, affiliation relationships, and QCL relationships. Alternatively, if coverage parameters are introduced in QCL information, intersection relationships, inclusion relationships, and affiliation relationships can be considered as several special cases of QCL relationships.
  • intersection relationship refers to the intersection between the beam coverage areas, that is, the access link (backhaul link) beam set or the access link (backhaul link) beam corresponding coverage areas can overlap with each other. For details, see the figure 10.
  • Figure 10 is a schematic diagram of the coverage areas where different beams or sets of beams intersect.
  • beam sets A and C are adjacent and have no intersection relationship.
  • Beam sets B and A, and beam sets B and C have an intersection relationship, that is, beam sets B and A, beam set B There is overlap with the coverage of C.
  • beams ai and ai+1 are adjacent, beams bi and bi+1 are adjacent, beams ci and ci+1 are adjacent, and beams di and di+1 are adjacent, where i is greater than or equal to 0.
  • O represents the offset between beam sets or beam coverage. O may be half of the beam set or the coverage range of the beam, which is not limited in the embodiment of this application.
  • the network device 110 can determine the coverage information of the other beam set that has a relative relationship with the beam set based on the above information. Or if the beam information W2 includes the relative relationship between the beams and the coverage information of one of the beams, the network device 110 can determine the coverage information of the other beam that has a relative relationship with the beam based on the above information.
  • the beam information W2 includes the angular coverage range of the beam set A as (S, S+W], the angular coverage range of the beam set C as (S+W, S+2W], and the angular coverage range of the beam set C as (S+W, S+2W].
  • Sets A and C are adjacent, beam set B intersects beam sets A and C, and the offset value is 0.
  • the network device 110 may determine that the coverage of beam set B is (S+O, S+W+O].
  • the inclusion relationship or affiliation relationship refers to the coverage range of one beam set (or beam) being included in the coverage range of another beam set (or beam). For details, see Figure 11.
  • Figure 11 is a schematic diagram of the relative relationship between beams or sets of beams.
  • the coverage areas of beams a0 , a1 , and a2 are included in the coverage area of beam set A
  • the coverage areas of beams b0 , b1 , and b2 are included in the coverage area of beam set B.
  • the coverage range of beam A0 is the same as the coverage range of beams a0, a1, a2, and a3.
  • beam A0 can be called a wide beam
  • beam a0 can be called a narrow beam.
  • wide beam and narrow beam are relative to the size of the coverage area of the beam.
  • the beam information W2 may include the relationship between beam sets or the relationship between beams, and the network device 110 may perform the beam (including the access link and the backhaul link) of the relay device 130 based on the beam information W2. Scheduling and Instructions. And the network device 110 can schedule the beam scanning (including the access link and the backhaul link) and data transmission of the relay device through the relative relationship between the beam sets (or beams).
  • the beams of relay equipment do not need to be managed through beam aggregation, that is, they are all in the form of beams, and the beams of relay equipment (including access links and backhaul links) are unified.
  • Management that is, unified indexing, if the access chain of the relay device 130 There are a total of 5 beams in the road, that is, the index of the beam can be a0, a1, a2, a3 and a4. If the beams of the access link of the relay device are managed through beam aggregation, as shown in Figure 9, the coverage ranges of different beams are different. For details, see Figure 9.
  • Figure 12 is a schematic diagram of beam index setting.
  • the coverage area of beam set A (including beams a0, a1, a2) is basically the same as the coverage area of beam set B (including beams b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b4, b5).
  • the coverage range of beam set C (including beams c0, c1, c2, c3, c4, c5, c6, c7, c8, c9, c10, c11) is also basically the same, that is, 3 beams, 6 beams, and 12 beams respectively. The same coverage was achieved. Therefore, it can be understood that the greater the number of beams in the same coverage area, the narrower the coverage area of the corresponding beam, and the higher the beam gain may be.
  • Figure 13 is a schematic diagram of the normalized gain of different beams at different angles.
  • the coverage area (or beam direction) of the beam can be related to the beam weight (also known as the weighting coefficient, filter coefficient, etc.), that is, the actual coverage achieved by the beam of an antenna array is determined by the array elements (or array elements) on the antenna array. ), and the digital and analog weighting coefficients acting on the antenna array are jointly determined.
  • the beam weight also known as the weighting coefficient, filter coefficient, etc.
  • the antenna array is a linear antenna array
  • the element spacing d is half a wavelength
  • the number of elements N e 8
  • the upsampling parameter (or oversampling parameter) a 1/2
  • the offset value b 0
  • the oversampling DFT weight The corresponding beam coverage is shown in Figure 10.
  • the abscissa is the angle
  • the relay device 130 and the network device 110 may also agree on the beam generation (weight) method of the relay device 130 .
  • the transmit weight of the beam also called transmit filtering.
  • the beam or beam index, beam set or beam set index corresponding to the beam transmission weight of the relay device 130 can be determined.
  • Beam coverage area information, quantity information, etc. can correspond to weight information and antenna array information (antenna array parameters).
  • the beam information W2 includes the antenna array information of the relay device (including the access link and the backhaul link), and/or the weight generation information (including the access link and the backhaul link).
  • the antenna array information includes one or more parameters: the number of elements Ne , the element spacing d, the number of phase shifters N p , the number of digital channels, the number of analog channels, and the number of ports.
  • each parameter can be two-dimensional, for example, distinguish the horizontal direction (horizontal, H) and the vertical direction (vertical, V), (N e, H , N e, V ) represents the number of horizontal direction arrays N e, H , the number of vertical arrays N e,V , (d H ,d V ) represents the horizontal array spacing d H , the vertical array spacing d V , (N p,H ,N p,V ) represents the number of horizontal phase shifters N p,H , the number of vertical phase shifters N p,V .
  • the weight generation information may be the weight um corresponding to the antenna array, and um may be a vector based on DFT, where m represents the beam index.
  • the weight u m is expressed as a column vector of N e ⁇ 1, where, is the imaginary unit, e is the base of the natural logarithm, m is any integer, and T is the matrix or vector transpose sign.
  • the weight u m is expressed as a column vector of N e ⁇ 1.
  • a can correspond to the upsampling (or oversampling) parameter
  • b is the offset value.
  • the beam (or weight) corresponding to u m is twice the upsampled DFT beam
  • the beam (or weight) corresponding to u m is a four times upsampled DFT beam.
  • Ne 2N p , that is, one phase shifter drives two elements in the antenna array, That is, the weight u m is expressed as a 2N p ⁇ 1 column vector, and m is any integer or real number.
  • the above example uses one phase shifter driving two arrays, and the two arrays are placed adjacent to each other. In practice, it can be any other number and any layout method, and can be expanded in a similar way. The corresponding weights are obtained in the following example.
  • Ne 2N p , that is, one phase shifter drives two elements in the antenna array, That is, the weight u m is expressed as a 2N p ⁇ 1 column vector, and m is any integer or real number.
  • N e 3N p , that is, one phase shifter drives three elements in the antenna array, That is, the weight u m is expressed as a 2N p ⁇ 1 column vector, and m is any integer or real number.
  • the weight generation information may be the weight um corresponding to the antenna array, and um may be a vector based on DFT expansion.
  • u m can be expanded based on DFT square rate, or expanded in any other form, and this application does not limit this. Taking square rate expansion as an example,
  • the above weight generation information can also be understood as the weight generation method (calculation formula of u m ), such as the transmission weight or reception weight of the beam.
  • the transmission weight is also called transmission filtering, and the reception weight is also called reception filtering.
  • Different weight generation information can generate different beams or beam sets.
  • Using oversampled DFT weights can generate beams or beam sets with narrower and denser coverage directions. By using DFT weights, beams or beam sets with narrow coverage directions and moderate intervals can be generated; by using DFT square rate expansion weights, beams with relatively wide coverage directions can be generated.
  • the above calculation formula of u m is the weight generation method based on oversampling DFT.
  • the calculation formula of u m can also be the weight generation method based on the Hadamard matrix, or the weight generation method based on different cyclic shifts of the basis vector, or This application does not limit the weight generation method based on Golay complementary sequences (or matrices) or other weight generation methods.
  • the description of the weight of the reflective surface can also be as described above. For details, please refer to the description in Figure 3 .
  • the relay device 130 can adopt multiple weight generation methods at the same time to generate different beams (with different coverage areas and/or different intervals) to meet different needs.
  • the network device 110 may determine the access link beam or beam set of the relay device 130, the beam index or Beam set index, coverage information of beam or beam set, number information of beam or beam set, etc.
  • the corresponding weight um and the coverage range of the beam are directly related to m, that is, the beam with index m corresponds to the weight um.
  • the weight of is u 1
  • the beam shown, that is, the weight of beam a1 is u 1
  • the beam information W2 includes at least one of the correspondence between the beam index and the weight, the correspondence between the beam index and the beam, and the correspondence between the beam set index and the beam.
  • the network device 110 can determine the index of the beam generated by the relay device 130 using different weights according to the corresponding relationship between the beam index and the weight, and can directly indicate it when subsequently configuring the beam for measurement (or data transmission).
  • the index of the beam or the network device 110 may directly indicate the index of the beam when subsequently configuring the beam for measurement (or data transmission) according to the corresponding relationship between the beam index and the beam.
  • the network device 110 may save the correspondence between the beam index and the weight, the correspondence between the beam index and the beam, and the correspondence between the beam set index and the beam, to facilitate subsequent beam configuration or instructions.
  • the beam information W2 includes the quantity information of the beam or beam set, the QCL information of the beam or beam set, the coverage information of the beam or beam set, the relative relationship between beams or between beam sets, antenna array information and
  • the network device 110 determines the beam pattern of the relay device 130 .
  • the beam information W2 may also include any two or more items mentioned above.
  • the way the network device 110 determines the beam of the relay device 130 may be combined with the different implementations mentioned above. The method will not be described again here.
  • the relay device 130 can report all the beam information that it may generate/implement to the network device 110, thereby providing information for the network device 110 to schedule the beams of the relay device 130.
  • the beams of relay device 130 include multiple categories. Different categories of beams are used to forward different channels or services.
  • One possible implementation is to classify the beams of the relay device 130 based on differences between beams or beam sets (for example, differences in coverage), so that beams of different categories are used to forward different channels or services. This meets different business needs and can support fast and low-overhead beam scanning.
  • the beam sets of the relay device 130 are classified. As shown in Table 5, beam sets of different categories forward different channels or different services.
  • the beam sets of the relay device are classified, as shown in Table 6. Beam sets of different categories forward different channels or different services.
  • different beam sets correspond to different levels, as shown in Table 7.
  • the channels or signals that can be forwarded by different levels are also shown in Table 7.
  • different access link beam sets correspond to different coverage areas (or blind filling areas, weak filling areas, or coverage areas). Take the coverage area being narrowed in sequence as an example. See Table 8 for details:
  • B is included in A, or the second coverage area is included in the first coverage area.
  • Different coverage areas can also be associated with coverage distances.
  • the coverage distance can reflect the distance between the network device and the relay device and/ Or the distance between the relay device and the terminal device (or the target coverage area). For example, the larger the coverage area, the smaller the corresponding coverage distance. See Table 9 for details.
  • Beams or beam sets are classified based on coverage, the coverage ranges of beams or beam sets of different categories are different. Beams or beam sets can also be classified according to weights or other methods, and the embodiments of this application do not limit this.
  • a single beam in beam set A may have a QCL relationship with 1 or more beams in beam set B.
  • QCL information may be exchanged between the relay device 130 and the network device 110 .
  • the relay device 130 reports the following QCL information to the network device 110: the QCL relationship of each beam in beam set A and beam set B.
  • the network device 110 configures the relay device 130 to respectively transmit at least one beam a0 in the beam set A and some beams (eg, b0, b1) in the beam set #B at different time positions.
  • the time position of beam a0 corresponds to SSB, SIB, PRACH, or the sending time of the paging message;
  • beams b0 and b1 respectively correspond to beam a0 and have a QCL relationship, and are respectively CSI-RS#i (corresponding to beam b0) and CSI -The transmission time of RS#j (corresponding to beam b1), or SRS#m (corresponding to beam b0) and SRS#n (corresponding to beam b1), #i and #j are used to distinguish different CSI-RS, #m and # n is used to distinguish different SRS.
  • the relay device 130 reports the azimuth angle (horizontal placement direction, vertical placement direction), coordinate position and other information of the antenna to the network device 110.
  • the network device 110 can based on the azimuth of the antenna of the relay device 130 Information such as angle and coordinate position determines the beam used by the relay device 130 to assist the network device 110 in communicating with the terminal device 120 .
  • the network device 110 may determine the beam from the multiple beam sets determined by the network device 110 according to the beam information W2 according to the initial beam direction information reported by the relay device 130 between the network device 110 and the relay device 130 Set Q1, in this way, the relay device 130 can better assist the communication between the network device 110 and the terminal device 120 based on the beam set Q1.
  • the beam set Q1 can be aimed at the network device 110.
  • the network device 110 may first configure the beam scanning mode of the relay device 130. See Figure 14 and Figure 15 for details.
  • the beam scanning of the relay device 130 may include two types: nominal backhaul link scanning and nominal access link scanning.
  • nominal backhaul link scanning it is necessary to first fix the access link component (also can be understood as the access link beam), and pass multiple backhaul link components (also can be understood as the backhaul chain Each channel beam) forwards the reference signal respectively, so that one or more backhaul link components that may be suitable can be determined.
  • the backhaul link component needs to be fixed first, and the reference signal is forwarded through multiple access link components respectively, so that one or more access link components that may be suitable can be determined.
  • the following describes the process of beam scanning by taking the relay device 130 as an amplification and forwarding relay device and a reflective surface as an example.
  • Figure 14 is a schematic diagram of beam scanning according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device 110 sends different reference signals (reference signals) to the relay device 130 (which can be an amplification and forwarding relay device) through beam #A. signal, RS) (e.g., RS 0 , RS 2 , ..., RS K-1 ), the relay device 130 may use different backhaul link beams (e.g., beam #0, beam #1, ..., beam #K -1) Receive reference signal.
  • the relay device 130 may respectively send the reference signals sent by the network device 110 and received by the relay device 130 through the same access link beam. In this manner, relay device 130 may determine one or more suitable backhaul link beams.
  • the description of the access link beam scanning may also refer to the above description, and will not be described again here.
  • the network device 110 may indicate the beam management mode of the relay device 130 in the configuration information.
  • the relay device 130 may determine at least one of the following methods according to the configuration information: adopt multiple backhaul link beams and the same access link beam to amplify and forward multiple reference signals respectively; or adopt one backhaul link beam and multiple The access link beams amplify and forward multiple reference signals respectively.
  • the network device 110 may instruct the relay device 130 through resource set 1 to perform the backhaul link beam scanning process, or may instruct the access link beam of the relay device 130 through resource set 2. Scanning process.
  • the device 110 sends multiple reference signals (for example, RS 0 , RS 2 , ..., RS K-1 ) to the relay device 130 through the beam #B respectively.
  • the relay device 130 receives the multiple reference signals through the same beam #k, and forwards them through multiple different access link beams (for example, beam #a 0 , beam #a 1 , ..., beam #a K-1 ). In this way, one or more suitable access link beams can be determined.
  • backhaul link beam scanning and access link beam scanning can be combined with each other.
  • the backhaul link beam scan is performed first, and then the access link beam scan is performed; or the access link beam scan is performed first, and then the backhaul link beam scan is performed, which is not limited by this application.
  • Figure 15 is another schematic diagram of beam scanning according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • (a) in Figure 15 shows the process of nominal backhaul link scanning.
  • the network device 110 sends different reference signals (such as , RS 0 , RS 2 , ..., RS K-1 ), the relay device 130 may use different backhaul link components (for example, backhaul link component #0, backhaul link component #1, ..., backhaul link component #0 Transmission link component #K-1) receives the reference signal.
  • the relay device 130 may respectively send the reference signals sent by the network device 110 and received by the relay device 130 through the same access link component (for example, access link component #a).
  • relay device 130 may determine one or more suitable backhaul link components.
  • the description of nominal access link scanning can also refer to the above description, and will not be described again here.
  • the network device 110 may indicate the beam management mode of the relay device 130 in the configuration information.
  • the relay device 130 may determine at least one of the following methods according to the configuration information: adopt multiple backhaul link components and the same access link component to respectively amplify and forward multiple reference signals; or adopt one backhaul link component and multiple The access link components amplify and forward multiple reference signals respectively.
  • the network device 110 may instruct the relay device 130 through resource set 1 to perform a nominal backhaul link scanning process, or may instruct the relay device 130 through resource set 2 to instruct the relay device 130 to perform a nominal access link scanning process. Scanning process.
  • the network device 110 sends multiple reference signals (eg, RS 0 , RS 2 , ..., RS K-1 ) to the relay device 130 through beam #B respectively.
  • the relay device 130 receives the multiple reference signals through the same backhaul link component #k, and forwards them through multiple different access link components (for example, access link component #a 0 , access link component #a Link component #a 1 ,..., access link component #a K-1 ). In this way, one or more suitable access link components can be determined.
  • nominal backhaul link scanning and nominal access link scanning can be combined with each other.
  • the backhaul link beam scan is performed first, and then the access link beam scan is performed; or the access link beam scan is performed first, and then the backhaul link beam scan is performed, which is not limited by this application.
  • resource set 1 is used for nominal backhaul link scanning
  • resource set 2 is used for nominal access link scanning.
  • time interval and time sequence relationship between the two resource sets are not limited. For example, they can be iterated or crossed in time.
  • R resources in resource set 2 when the network device 110 sends the R resources, the reflective surface uses K weights to reflect respectively; the access link components corresponding to the K weights are the same. , the backhaul link components are different.
  • FIG. 16 is another schematic diagram of beam scanning according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • (a) in FIG. 16 shows the process of beam scanning of the backhaul link, and is described using the relay device 130 as a reflecting surface as an example.
  • the same set of reflection weights reflects the beam directions of the backhaul link and the access link.
  • the network device 110 sends multiple reference signals to the relay device 130 (which is a reflective surface) through the beam #A. For example, the network device 110 sends RS 0 through the beam #A, sends RS 1 through the beam #A, ..., through the beam #A
  • the relay device 130 can receive through the (nominal) backhaul link beam corresponding to different ⁇ BH , and forward it through the nominal access link beam corresponding to the same ⁇ AC .
  • the relay device 130 receives and reflects RS 0 through reflection weight #0 (i.e., ⁇ 0 ) , receives and reflects RS 1 through reflection weight #1 (i.e., ⁇ 1 ), ..., through reflection weight #K-1 (i.e. ⁇ K-1 ) receives and reflects RS K-1 .
  • ⁇ AC corresponds to the nominal access link beam direction
  • the relay device 130 is performing nominal backhaul link beam directions.
  • the values of K ⁇ ACs can be made the same, and the K ⁇ BH,k can be made different.
  • the terminal device 120 located in the nominal access link beam coverage direction can receive/measure K signals and feed back the measurement results.
  • the network device 110 or the relay device 130 may determine possible suitable beams for the backhaul link based on the measurement results.
  • the terminal device 120 matches the direction of the nominal access link the reference signal forwarded in the most matching direction of the backhaul link has the best quality, that is, the reflection weight corresponding to the signal with the highest reception quality matches the channel. In this way, the network device 110 or the relay device 130 can obtain a relatively matching nominal backhaul link direction (or backhaul link component).
  • one or more matching nominal backhaul link beams can be determined through multiple measurements or measurement feedback from multiple different terminal devices. .
  • the network device 110 can notify the relay device 130 of the indication information corresponding to the determined return link component, for example, the weight component index; or, the network device 110 The measurement results are notified to the relay device 130.
  • relay device 130 may determine one or more suitable ⁇ BH,k .
  • relay device 130 (which is a reflective surface) can determine one or more suitable ⁇ AC,k .
  • the beam scanning mode (also called signal forwarding mode, signal reflection mode, weight synthesis mode, or other words with similar equivalent meanings) of the relay device (eg, reflective surface) can be determined according to the instruction information of the network device 110 .
  • the beam scanning method refers to scanning the beam components (or weight components) of the backhaul link and scanning the beam components (or weight components) of the access link. Taking the reflective surface as an example, multiple combined weights can be determined based on the indication information corresponding to the scanning method and the weight component information.
  • the weight components of the access link are fixed, and multiple weights are synthesized based on the weight components of multiple backhaul links; or, the weight components of the backhaul links are fixed, and the weight components are synthesized based on the multiple access links.
  • the weight components of the incoming link are combined into multiple weights.
  • two scanning methods can also be combined with multiple iterations, without limitation.
  • the network device 110 sends multiple reference signals to the relay device 130 through beam #A.
  • the network device 110 sends RS 0 through beam #A, sends RS 1 through beam #A, ..., RS K-1 is sent through beam #A, and the relay device 130 receives it through K ⁇ BH with different values.
  • the relay device 130 receives RS 0 through reflection weight #0 and receives RS through reflection weight #1. 1 ,...,receive RS K-1 through reflection weight #K-1.
  • the direction of the reference signal is not aligned with the beam direction of the backhaul link indicated by ⁇ BH of the relay device 130, for example, the backhaul link indicated by the component ⁇ BH,0 in RS 0 and reflection weight #0
  • the beam direction is not aligned with the direction of the reference signal, and there is an error between the actual incident direction of the reference signal and the backhaul link beam direction indicated by component ⁇ BH,0 . This error will eventually be reflected in the access link, causing the actual signal reflection direction of the access link to deviate from the beam direction corresponding to the nominal access link component.
  • the access link beam direction corresponding to ⁇ 0 is:
  • the phase component used to indicate the actual signal incident direction can refer to the form of ⁇ BH,0 .
  • the actual access link beam direction corresponding to the ⁇ AC obtained by the above formula (3) is equal to the nominal access link beam direction.
  • the actual access link beam direction is: Deviation from the nominal access link beam direction This may cause the terminal device 120 to be unable to receive the signal forwarded by the relay device 130 .
  • the nominal backhaul link beam direction of the relay device 130 is not aligned with the network device 110, the error between the nominal backhaul link beam direction and the direction of the reference signal will cause the actual signal reflection direction to be different from the nominal access direction.
  • Deviation between link beam directions For example, as shown in (a) and (b) of Figure 16, the nominal backhaul link beam direction is in the three schematic directions shown in (a) of Figure 16, and the nominal access link beam direction is in ((a) of Figure 16 a) the three directions shown.
  • the actual signal incident direction is in the three schematic directions shown in Figure 16(b) (the actual signal incident direction remains unchanged), and the actual signal reflection direction is in the three schematic directions shown in Figure 16(b) (it will be affected by the nominal The effect of the deviation between the return link beam direction and the origin direction of the reference signal). If there is a deviation between the nominal backhaul link beam direction and the actual signal incident direction, the deviation will eventually be reflected in the deviation between the nominal access link beam direction and the actual signal reflection direction.
  • the nominal backhaul link beam direction in the reflection weight #0 of the relay device 130 is not aligned with the incoming direction of RS 0 , and the nominal access link beam direction in the reflection weight #0 is consistent with the actual signal.
  • the signal received by the terminal device 120 may be poor; the nominal reflection weight of the relay device 130 #K-1
  • the backhaul link beam direction is aligned with the direction of RS K-1 , and there is no deviation between the nominal access link beam direction in reflection weight #K-1 and the actual signal reflection direction (see (The last example of (b) of Figure 16), the signal received by the terminal device 120 may be very good.
  • the nominal access link beam direction of the relay device 130 cannot forward the signal sent by the network device 110 to the terminal device 120.
  • the deviation will be reflected in the nominal access link beam direction of the relay device 130 and the actual signal reflection direction.
  • the above content can be understood as the deviation between the nominal backhaul link beam direction and the actual signal incident direction of the relay device 130 will be reflected in the nominal access link beam direction and the actual signal reflection direction. above the deviation.
  • the relay device 130 cannot forward the reference signal sent by the network device 110 to the terminal device 120 .
  • the weight design of the reflective surface can be simplified through the nominal beam separation design of the backhaul link and access link, and the matching with the network equipment and the target coverage location (or target coverage area, or target user equipment) can be achieved alignment.
  • the above-mentioned return link component can also be understood as a return link weight component or a return link phase component
  • the access link component can be understood as an access link weight component or an access link.
  • the phase component is not limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • the backhaul link weight component and the backhaul link phase component are equivalent expressions
  • the access link weight component and the access link phase component are also equivalent expressions.
  • the full text uses the backhaul link component and the access link component for description. They are uniformly explained here and will not be repeated in the full text.
  • the network device 110 sends configuration information T1 to the relay device 130, which is used to configure the beam set Q1.
  • the relay device 130 receives the configuration information T1 sent by the network device 110.
  • the configuration information T1 includes information for configuring the beam set Q1.
  • the configuration information T1 includes but is not limited to at least one of the following:
  • the scanning period corresponding to the beam or set of beams.
  • the time slot and/or orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbol position in the scanning period etc.
  • the relay device can determine the beam set Q1 configured by the network device for the relay device based on the above information, and assist communication between the network device and the terminal device according to the configured beam set Q1.
  • this application can realize the alignment of the beam direction of the backhaul link of the relay device with the incoming wave direction of the network device, so that the relay device can better assist the communication between the network device and the terminal device.
  • the method 400 may also include:
  • the network device 110 determines the measurement information of the beam set Q1.
  • the measurement information of beam set Q1 may be determined by the network device 110 itself, or may be determined by the terminal device 130 and reported to the network device 110 .
  • the network device 110 may send at least one reference signal to the terminal device 120 through the beam set Q1 of the relay device 130.
  • the reference signal is used to measure the corresponding beam in the beam set Q1 (or in other words: the reference signal is used for measurement).
  • the relay device 130 may forward at least one reference signal sent by the network device 110 to the terminal device 120 through the beam set Q1.
  • the reference signal may include DMRS, CSI-RS, phase tracking reference signal (PTRS), SSB, tracking reference signal (tracking reference signal, TRS), etc.
  • CSI-RS phase tracking reference signal
  • SSB phase tracking reference signal
  • TRS tracking reference signal
  • this embodiment of the present application takes the reference signal as CSI-RS as an example for description.
  • the beam set Q1 includes three beams, namely beam #q11, beam #q12 and beam #q13, and each beam can be used to transmit one CSI-RS respectively.
  • the network device 110 sends three CSI-RSs to the terminal device 120 through the beam set Q1 of the relay device 130.
  • the relay device 130 may send the three CSI-RSs sent by the network device 110 to the terminal device 120 through the same access link beam.
  • the network device 110 sends at least one CSI-RS to the terminal device 120 through the beam set Q1 of the relay device 130, and the relay device 130 is responsible for forwarding at least one CSI-RS sent by the network device 110 to the terminal device 120 through the beam set Q1.
  • the terminal device 120 After receiving the three CSI-RSs sent by the relay device 130 and forwarded by the network device 110, the terminal device 120 can measure the three CSI-RSs and report the measurement information of the three CSI-RSs to the network device 110.
  • Measurement information can be carried in uplink control information (UCI) and transmitted through the physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) or the physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH).
  • UCI uplink control information
  • PUCCH physical uplink control channel
  • PUSCH physical uplink shared channel
  • the measurement information may be channel state information.
  • Channel state information may include one or more of the following: reference signal receiving quality (RSRQ), signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) ), precoding matrix indicator (precoding matrix indicator, PMI), transmitted precoding matrix indicator (transmitted precoding matrix indicator, TPMI), rank indicator (rank indicator, RI), transmitted rank indicator (transmitted rank indicator, TRI), layer indicator (layer indicator, LI), timing advance (timing advance, TA), AOA, AOD, etc.
  • RSSQ reference signal receiving quality
  • SNR signal-to-noise ratio
  • SINR signal to interference plus noise ratio
  • the network device 110 may receive at least one reference signal sent by the terminal device 120 and forwarded by the relay device 130 to the network device 110 through the beam set Q1.
  • the reference signal received by the network device 110 is sent by the terminal device 120 to the network device 110, and the relay device 130 is responsible for forwarding it through the beam set Q1.
  • the beam set Q1 includes three beams, namely beam #q11, beam #q12 and beam #q13, and each beam can be used to transmit one CSI-RS respectively.
  • the relay device 130 forwards the three CSI-RSs sent by the terminal device 120 to the network device 110 through three different beams in the beam set Q1.
  • the network device 110 can measure the three CSI-RSs and determine the measurement information of the three CSI-RSs.
  • the network device 110 may determine the measurement information of the beam set Q1 through a downlink measurement method or an uplink measurement method.
  • one beam can also be used to transmit multiple reference signals.
  • the method 400 may also include:
  • the network device 110 determines the beam set Q2 based on the measurement information of the beam set Q1.
  • the network device 110 may determine the beam set Q2 according to the measurement information of the beam set Q1 determined by it.
  • the measurement information of beam set Q1 shows that the strength of the reference signal transmitted by beam #q11 in beam set Q1 is lower than the strength of the reference signal transmitted by beam #q12 and beam #q13, the network device 110 can remove the reference signal from beam set Q1 of beam #q11, and retain beam #q12 and beam #q13. Therefore, the beam set Q2 may include beam #q12 and beam #q13.
  • the measurement information of the beam set Q1 shows that the strength of the reference signals transmitted by all beams in the beam set Q1 is low, and the network device 110 can reconfigure the beams.
  • the beams included in the beam set Q2 are all different from the beam set Q1.
  • beam set Q2 is different from beam set Q1, including at least one of the following situations: beam set Q2 and beam set Q1 include different number of beams.
  • beam set Q1 includes beam #q11, beam #q12 and Beam #q13
  • beam set Q2 includes beam #q11 and beam #q12; it can also be reflected that the corresponding beams included in beam set Q1 and beam set Q2 are different, for example, beam set Q1 includes beam #q11, beam #q12 and beam #q13
  • the beam set Q2 includes beam #q21, beam #q22, beam #q23 and so on.
  • the beam set Q2 includes at least one beam that does not belong to the beam set Q1; or, the beam set Q1 includes at least one beam that does not belong to the beam set Q2.
  • the relay device 130 may assist communication between the terminal device 120 and the network device 110 according to the beam set Q1.
  • the process of the relay device 130 assisting the communication between the terminal device 120 and the network device 110 according to the beam set Q1 can be understood as: the relay device 130 forwards the signal P or data according to the beam set Q1, and the signal P or data may be the terminal device 120 It is sent to the network device 110 and forwarded by the relay device 130; it can also be sent by the network device 110 to the terminal device 120 and forwarded by the relay device 130.
  • “Sending" of the access link or backhaul link of the relay device 130 can be understood as “forwarding", that is, the relay device 130 forwards the received signal.
  • the signal P may include a reference signal.
  • the reference signal is used for beam management, channel estimation, or auxiliary signal demodulation, detection, etc.
  • the reference signal may include DMRS, CSI-RS, phase tracking reference signal (PTRS), SSB, tracking reference signal (tracking reference signal, TRS), etc., and is not limited in the embodiment of this application.
  • the terminal device 120 may send the signal generated by the terminal device 120 according to at least one reference signal to the network device 110 through the relay device 130.
  • the relay device 130 assists in sending the measurement information of the determined beam set Q1.
  • the relay device 130 receives the measurement information and forwards the measurement information to the network device 110 .
  • Network device 110 receives this measurement information.
  • the network device 110 can configure the beam set Q2 for the relay device 130 according to the measurement information of the beam set Q1, which is better aligned with the network device 110 than the beam set Q1.
  • the relay device 130 can configure the beam set Q2 according to the beam set Q2. Better assisting the communication between the network device 110 and the terminal device 120.
  • the method 400 may also include:
  • the network device 110 sends the configuration information T2 to the relay device 130, which is used to configure the beam set Q2.
  • the relay device 130 receives the configuration information T2 and determines the beam set Q2 based on the configuration information T2.
  • the configuration information T2 please refer to the description of the configuration information T1, which will not be described again here.
  • the beam set Q2 may include at least one beam used for the relay device to assist communication between the network device 110 and the terminal device 120, or for communication between the relay device 130 and the network device 110.
  • method 400 may also include:
  • the relay device 130 assists communication between the terminal device and the network device according to the beam set Q2.
  • the process of the relay device 130 assisting the communication between the terminal device 120 and the network device 110 according to the beam set Q2 can be understood as the relay device 130 forwarding the signal D or data according to the beam set Q2, and the signal D or data can be the terminal device 120 It may be sent to the network device 110 and forwarded by the relay device 130, or it may be sent by the network device 110 to the terminal device 120 and forwarded by the relay device 130.
  • the relay device 130 forwarding the signal D or data according to the beam set Q2
  • the signal D or data can be the terminal device 120 It may be sent to the network device 110 and forwarded by the relay device 130, or it may be sent by the network device 110 to the terminal device 120 and forwarded by the relay device 130.
  • signal D includes a reference signal, which is used for beam management, channel estimation, or auxiliary signal demodulation, detection, etc.
  • the reference signal may include DMRS, CSI-RS, PTRS, SSB, TRS, etc., which are not limited in the embodiment of this application.
  • the configuration information T1 and the configuration information T2 can be configured by the network device 110 and delivered to the relay device 130 .
  • Configuration information T1 and configuration information T2 can be carried on the physical broadcast channel (PBCH), remaining minimum system information (RMSI), SIB1, SIB2, SIB3, media access control element (media access control) -Control element, MAC-CE), downlink control information (DCI), radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) and any one of the system information.
  • PBCH physical broadcast channel
  • RMSI remaining minimum system information
  • DCI downlink control information
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the beam information W2 may include weight information, which may include: a backhaul link component and an access link component.
  • the configuration information T1 may include at least one first weight.
  • each first weight includes a first component, which is used to indicate the backhaul link beam of the relay device 130 .
  • the relay device 130 may determine the backhaul link beam of the relay device 130 according to the first component.
  • the weight of the reflective surface may include the component corresponding to the backhaul link beam
  • the network device 110 may send the component including the component corresponding to the backhaul link beam to the relay device 130;
  • the relay device 130 can adjust the backhaul link beam component of the relay device 130, and based on the original connection
  • the incoming link beam components form new weights. This causes its backhaul link to be aligned with (or better match) the network device 110, and the access link components are reflected toward (better match) the target direction.
  • each first weight further includes a second component, which is used to indicate the access link beam of the relay device 130 .
  • the relay device 130 may determine the access link beam of the relay device 130 according to the second component.
  • the configuration information issued by the network device 110 includes information indicating the components corresponding to the backhaul link beams. Based on this information, the relay device 130 can adjust the backhaul link beam components of the relay device 130 so that they can be backhauled.
  • the link is aligned with network device 110 .
  • the relay device 130 can also adjust the access link beam component of the relay device 130 to allow it to access the link.
  • the road is aligned with the terminal device 120.
  • the relay device 130 By respectively adjusting the first component of the backhaul link and the second component of the access link, the relay device 130 is connected between the network device 110 and Signal reflection (or forwarding) is implemented between terminal devices 120 to assist communication.
  • first component and the second component may be stored separately.
  • first component and the second component may be indicated separately.
  • the aforementioned backhaul link component may be another alternative name for the first component
  • the access link component may also be another alternative name for the second component.
  • the previous description mainly takes the backhaul link component and the access link component as examples, and the following description mainly uses the first component and the second component, but the two can be regarded as having the same meaning.
  • the configuration information T2 may include at least one second weight.
  • the second weight includes a third component, which is used to indicate the backhaul link beam of the relay device 130 .
  • the relay device 130 may determine the backhaul link beam of the relay device 130 according to the third component.
  • the weight of the reflective surface may include the component corresponding to the backhaul link beam
  • the network device 110 may send the component corresponding to the backhaul link beam to the relay device 130, based on According to the component corresponding to the backhaul link beam included in the configuration information T2 issued by the network device 110, the relay device 130 can adjust the backhaul link beam of the relay device 130, and based on the original access link beam component, New weights are formed such that their backhaul links are aligned with (or better match) the network device 110 and the access link components are reflected toward (more closely match) the target direction.
  • each second weight may also include a fourth component, which is used to indicate the access link beam of the relay device 130 .
  • the relay device 130 may determine the access link beam of the relay device 130 according to the fourth component.
  • the configuration information T1 issued by the network device 110 may include information indicating the components corresponding to the backhaul link beams, and the relay device 130 may adjust the backhaul link beam components of the relay device 130 based on this information to make them return.
  • the transmission link is aligned with the network device 110.
  • the configuration information T1 issued by the network device 110 includes information indicating the components corresponding to the access link beam.
  • the relay device 130 can also adjust the access link beam of the relay device 130 based on this information.
  • the access link is aligned with the terminal device 120.
  • the information included in the above configuration information T1 for indicating the backhaul link beam or the access link beam may be indication information, and the indication information may be used to indicate the component; the information may also be the component itself (directly delivered component) ; It can also be the index information of the component (storing the component and configuring the corresponding index); it can also be other information, which is not limited by the embodiments of this application.
  • the relay device 130 implements signal reflection (or forwarding) between the network device 110 and the terminal device 120, thereby assisting communication.
  • the third component and the fourth component may be indicated separately.
  • the network device 110 can determine the weight R1 of the control module 1301 based on the beam information W1 of the control module 1301 of the relay device 130, and the weight R1 is used to indicate the beam of the control module 1301.
  • the weight R1 of the control module 1301 (can be understood as the beam information W1) can be expressed as:
  • [ ⁇ ] T represents the transpose of a vector or matrix.
  • the embodiments of this application are described using column vectors as an example. In practice, the weights can be described based on matrices and transversal quantities without limitation.
  • the network device 110 may determine the weight R2 based on the weight R1 of the control module 1301 and the beam information W2 of the forwarding module 1302, where the weight R2 is used to indicate the beam set Q1.
  • the weight R2 can be expressed as:
  • weight R3 of the access link beam on the reflective surface can be expressed as:
  • the above Q may be a multiple between the antenna array of the control module 1301 and the antenna array of the forwarding module 1302.
  • WR2 may be used to indicate the beam direction of the backhaul link of the relay device 130
  • WR3 may be used to indicate the beam direction of the access link of the relay device 130.
  • the network device 110 may determine the weight R4 according to the weights R2 and R3, that is:
  • the network device 110 can send the weight R2 to the relay device 130, which can be used to indicate the backhaul link beam direction to the relay device 130, so that the backhaul link beam direction of the relay device 130 can be aligned.
  • the network device 110 may also send the weight R4 to the relay device 130, which may cause the backhaul link beam direction of the relay device 130 to be aligned with the network device 110.
  • the above weight value can be regarded as a specific implementation method of the configuration information, and the implementation method of the relevant variant can also be determined based on the above weight value.
  • the network device 110 can send the index to the relay device 130, and the index is used to determine the above-mentioned weight; for another example, for parameters related to the composition of the weight, the network device 110 can send The relay device 130 sends the parameter, and the parameter is used by the relay device 130 to determine the corresponding weight.
  • the network device 110 can send the configuration information T3 to the relay device 130.
  • the configuration information T3 is used to configure the backhaul link beam of the relay device 130.
  • the configuration information T3 can include the above-mentioned weights, indexes or parameters, etc.
  • the relay device 130 can adjust the beam direction of the backhaul link of the relay device 130 based on the configuration information T3 sent by the network device 110, so as to align it with the network device 110.
  • the beam set Q1 and the beam set Q2 in the embodiment of the present application may respectively correspond to the aforementioned first beam set and the second beam set, and the beam information W1 and the beam information W2 respectively correspond to the aforementioned first beam information.
  • the configuration information T1 and the configuration information T2 may respectively correspond to the aforementioned first configuration information, second configuration information, etc.
  • the above-mentioned quantifiers such as "first” and “second” can be matched with the corresponding content in the foregoing content, which will not be described again here.
  • both the terminal and the network device may include a hardware structure and/or a software module to implement the above functions in the form of a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module. Whether one of the above functions is performed as a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of a relay device in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 shows the controller 1710, the memory 1720, and the antenna array 1730.
  • the antenna array 1730 includes a memory 17301 and a phase converter/analog channel 17302.
  • the beam information W1 reported by the relay device 130 to the network device 110 can enable the network device 110 and the relay device 130 to agree on the corresponding relationship between the beam index and the beam, or between the beam index and the beam weight generation information. corresponding relationship.
  • the beam/beam set index and the beam information corresponding to the beam/beam set index can be stored at both ends of the network device 110 and the relay device 130 (for example, the beam information refers to QCL information, coverage, and weight generation method , weight, or at least one of the weight index, this application does not limit this).
  • the memory 1720 contains multiple sets of beam information, including beam information 1 (stored in the storage subunit 17201) and beam information 2 (stored in the storage subunit 17202) and other beam information not illustrated in the figure.
  • Each group The beam information respectively corresponds to a set of backhaul link beams of a group of relay devices or a set of backhaul link beams of a group of relay devices.
  • the controller 1710 is used to determine the beam information and apply the beam weight corresponding to the beam information to the antenna array 1730.
  • the above-mentioned beam information 1 may be a backhaul link component, and beam information 2 may be an access link component.
  • beam information 1 may be a backhaul link component
  • beam information 2 may be an access link component.
  • the network device 110 can determine the actually used weight through the access link component and the backhaul link component respectively.
  • subsequent descriptions about beam information may also be associated with the aforementioned weight components and the like.
  • the backhaul link components may be a subset of the access link components.
  • the backhaul link component and the access link component may be determined based on the beam information in the same memory. In this way, the backhaul link component and the access link component can be obtained based on the beam information, and the actual weight used is finally determined.
  • both the backhaul link component and the access link component come from the same memory.
  • the backhaul link component and the access link component can be obtained based on the beam information, and the actual weight used is finally determined.
  • the space for weight storage can be saved, thereby reducing the hardware requirements of the reflective surface and achieving low cost.
  • the beam weights can be divided into digital weights and analog weights, where the digital weights are used to act on the digital channel (not shown in the figure), and the analog weights are used to act on the phase shifter 17302. Since there is a certain delay between the configuration and taking effect of the analog weights, the weights may be configured in advance. That is, the antenna array 1730 includes a memory 17301.
  • the memory 17301 can be understood as a mid-range radio frequency memory and a backhaul chain of the relay device 130.
  • the simulation weight of the beam can be configured in the memory 17301 in advance, so that the simulation weight takes effect at the accurate time, that is, the beam switching speed can be made faster.
  • the memory 1720 stores a mapping table of the backhaul link beam index and the analog beam index of each relay device 130. If there is a digital weight, the memory 1720 also stores each backhaul link. The mapping table of the link beam index and the digital beam index, the memory 17301 stores the mapping table of the analog beam index and the analog weight, or the memory 17301 also stores the mapping table of the digital beam index and the digital weight. That is, the controller 1710 determines the backhaul link beam index, determines the analog weight and digital weight corresponding to the backhaul link beam index according to the above mapping table, and applies the analog weight and digital weight to the antenna array. 1730.
  • the weight generator 1703 multiplies the backhaul link weight component and the access link weight component to form an actual weight, and then acts on the reflection array element.
  • the weight generator 1703 sums the phase component of the backhaul link weight and the phase component of the access link weight to form a phase component of the actual weight, and then acts on the reflection Array element.
  • the memory 1720 stores a mapping table of each relay device's backhaul link beam index and the analog beam index (and/or weight generation information). If there is a digital weight, the memory 1720 The center also stores a mapping table of each relay device backhaul link beam index and digital beam index (and/or weight generation information).
  • the weight generator 17303 can generate information) to calculate analog weights, or the weight generator 17303 may calculate digital weights based on the digital beam index (and/or weight generation information). That is, the controller 1710 determines the backhaul link beam index, then calculates the analog weight and digital weight corresponding to the backhaul link beam according to the above mapping table and the weight generator 17303, and uses the analog weight and digital weight Acts on antenna array 1720.
  • the storage subunit 17201 can store the information of the beams a0, a1,..., ai-1, etc., and the storage subunit 17201 can store the information of the beams b0, b1,..., bi-1, etc., And so on.
  • the network device 110 configures the configuration information T1 to the relay device 130 at time t.
  • the relay device 130 obtains the beam a0 from the storage subunit 17201 of the memory 1720 at the time t0- ⁇ , ⁇ >0 before t0. , beam a2, etc. corresponding weights (including analog weights and/or digital weights), and configure the weights to the memory 17301, where time t is before time t0 (or time t0- ⁇ ).
  • the backhaul link of the relay device 130 uses the beam corresponding to the weight to send or receive signals.
  • the network device 110 configures the configuration information T1 to the relay device 130 at time t'.
  • the relay device 130 obtains the configuration information T1 from the storage subunit 17202 of the memory 1720 at the time t1- ⁇ 1 before t1, ⁇ 1>0.
  • the weight corresponding to beam b0 (including analog weight and/or digital weight) is configured into the memory 17301, where time t' is before time t1 (or time t1- ⁇ 1).
  • the backhaul link of the relay device 130 uses the beam corresponding to the weight to send or receive signals.
  • This embodiment of the present application does not limit the number of sets of beam information stored in the memory 1720 and the number of sets of beam information stored in each beam information unit.
  • the above-mentioned memory 1720 can also be used to respectively store weight components corresponding to the backhaul link beam and weight components corresponding to the access link beam. When used, the two weight components can be used together.
  • Figure 18 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of a network device in an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 18 shows the controller 1810 and the memory 1820, where the memory 1820 contains multiple sets of beam information (corresponding to the beam information stored by the relay device 130), including beam information 1 (stored in the storage subunit 18201) and beam information 2 (stored in the storage subunit 18202) and other beam information not illustrated in the figure.
  • Each set of beam information corresponds to a set of backhaul link beam sets or a set of backhaul link beams.
  • the controller 1810 is used to determine the beam information and apply the beam information corresponding to the beam information to the antenna array.
  • This embodiment of the present application does not limit the number of sets of beam information stored in the memory 1820 and the number of sets of beam information stored in each beam information unit.
  • At least one item (items) refers to one item (items) or multiple items (items)
  • at least two items (items) and “multiple items (items)” refer to two items (items) or Two or more items.
  • At least one of the following” or similar expressions thereof refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (items) or a plurality of items (items).
  • at least one of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, a-b, a-c, b-c, or a-b-c, where a, b, c can be single or multiple .
  • execution subject illustrated in FIG. 4 is only an example.
  • the execution subject may also be a chip, a chip system, or a processor that supports the execution subject to implement the method shown in FIG. 4 , which is not limited by the embodiments of this application.
  • the methods and operations implemented by the relay device can also be implemented by components (such as chips or circuits) that can be used for the relay device, and the methods and operations implemented by the network device can also be implemented by the network device. Can be implemented by components (such as chips or circuits) that can be used in network equipment.
  • Embodiments of the present application can divide the transmitting end device or the receiving end device into functional modules according to the above method examples.
  • each functional module can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module. middle.
  • the above integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software function modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiment of the present application is schematic and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. The following is an example of dividing each functional module according to each function.
  • FIG 19 is a schematic diagram of a communication device 1900 in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1900 may be used to perform the actions performed by the relay device 130 in the above method embodiment.
  • the communication device 1900 includes a transceiver unit 1910 and a processing unit 1920.
  • the transceiver unit 1910 can communicate with the outside, and the processing unit 1920 is used for data processing.
  • the transceiver 1910 may also be called a communication interface or communication unit.
  • the communication device 1900 may further include a storage unit, which may be used to store instructions and/or data, and the processing unit 1920 may read the instructions and/or data in the storage unit.
  • a storage unit which may be used to store instructions and/or data
  • the processing unit 1920 may read the instructions and/or data in the storage unit.
  • the communication device 1900 can be a chip or functional module capable of performing the functions of the relay device 130, and sends corresponding outputs and receives corresponding inputs.
  • the transceiver unit 1910 is used to perform the relay device 130 in the above method embodiment.
  • the processing unit 1920 is configured to perform the processing operations of the relay device 130 in the above method embodiment except for sending and receiving.
  • the transceiver unit 1910 may include a sending unit and a receiving unit.
  • the sending unit is used to perform the sending operation in the above method embodiment.
  • the receiving unit is used to perform the receiving operation in the above method embodiment.
  • the communication device 1900 may include a sending unit but not a receiving unit.
  • the communication device 1800 may include a receiving unit instead of a transmitting unit. Specifically, it may depend on whether the above solution executed by the communication device includes a sending action and a receiving action.
  • communication device 1900 may be a device including relay device 130.
  • the communication device 1900 may be a component configured in the relay device 130, for example, a chip in the relay device 130.
  • the transceiver unit 1910 may be an interface circuit, a pin, or the like.
  • the interface circuit may include an input circuit and an output circuit
  • the processing unit 1920 may include a processing circuit.
  • the transceiver unit 1910 is configured to receive the configuration information T1 and configuration information T2 sent by the network device 110 .
  • the configuration information T1 and configuration information T2 sent by the network device 110 are configured to receive the configuration information T1 and configuration information T2 sent by the network device 110 .
  • Figure 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 2000 in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 2000 includes a processor 2010.
  • the processor 2010 is coupled to a memory 2020.
  • the memory 2020 is used to store computer programs or instructions and/or data.
  • the processor 2010 is used to execute the computer programs or instructions and/or data stored in the memory 2020, so that The methods in the above method embodiments are executed.
  • the communication device 2000 includes one or more processors 2010 .
  • the communication device 2000 may further include a memory 2020.
  • the communication device 1900 may include one or more memories 2020 .
  • the memory 2020 may be integrated with the processor 2010 or provided separately.
  • the communication device 2000 may also include a transceiver 2030, which is used for receiving and/or transmitting signals.
  • the processor 2010 is used to control the transceiver 2030 to receive and/or transmit signals.
  • the communication device 2000 is used to implement the operations performed by the network device 110 or the communication device in the above method embodiment.
  • the processor 2010 is used to implement processing-related operations performed by the network device 110 or the communication device in the above method embodiment
  • the transceiver 2030 is used to implement the transceiver performed by the network device 110 or the communication device in the above method embodiment. related operations.
  • the communication device 2000 includes a processor 2010.
  • the processor 2010 is coupled to a memory 2020.
  • the memory 2020 is used to store computer programs or instructions and/or data.
  • the processor 2010 is used to execute the computer programs or instructions and/or data stored in the memory 2020.
  • the method in the above method embodiment is caused to be executed.
  • the communication device 2000 includes a processor 2010, which is configured to implement the operations of the above method 400 performed internally by the network device 110.
  • the communication device 2000 includes one or more processors 2010 .
  • the communication device 2000 may further include a memory 2020.
  • the communication device 2000 may include one or more memories 2020 .
  • the memory 2020 may be integrated with the processor 2010 or provided separately.
  • the communication device 2000 may also include one or more transceivers 2030 and/or communication interfaces, which are used for receiving and/or transmitting signals.
  • the processor 2010 is used to control the transceiver 2030 and/or the communication interface to receive and/or send signals.
  • the devices used to implement the receiving function in the transceiver 2030 can be regarded as receiving modules, and the devices used to implement the transmitting function in the transceiver 2030 can be regarded as sending modules, that is, the transceiver 2030 includes a receiver and a transmitter.
  • a transceiver may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver module, or a transceiver circuit.
  • the receiver may also be called a receiver, receiving module, or receiving circuit.
  • a transmitter can sometimes be called a transmitter, transmitter, transmit module or transmit circuit.
  • the communication device 2000 may also include one or more signal amplifiers. If there are multiple signal amplifiers, different signal amplifiers correspond to different polarization directions or relay wireless radio frequency channels.
  • the signal amplifier In uplink communication, the signal amplifier is used to amplify the signal received from the terminal device. In downlink communication, the signal amplifier is used to amplify the signal received from the network device.
  • the communication device 2000 is used to implement the operations performed by the network device 110 in the above method embodiment.
  • the processor 2010 is used to implement the operations performed internally by the network device 110 in the above method embodiment
  • the transceiver 2030 is used to implement the receiving or transmitting operations performed by the network device 110 in the above method embodiment.
  • Figure 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 2100 in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 2100 includes a logic circuit 2110 and an input/output interface 2120.
  • the logic circuit 2110 may be a processing circuit.
  • the logic circuit 2110 can be coupled to the storage unit and call instructions in the storage unit, so that the communication device can implement the methods and functions of various embodiments of the present application.
  • the input/output interface 2120 may be an input/output circuit, which outputs information processed by the communication device, or inputs data or signaling information to be processed into the communication device for processing.
  • the communication device 2100 is used to implement the operations performed by the network device 110 in each of the above method embodiments.
  • the logic circuit 2110 is used to implement the processing-related operations performed by the network device 110 in the above method embodiment, such as the processing-related operations performed by the network device 110 in the embodiment shown in Figure 3.
  • the input/output interface 2120 It is used to implement the sending and/or receiving related operations performed by the network device 110 in the above method embodiment, such as the sending and/or receiving related operations performed by the network device 110 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the communication device 2100 is used to implement the operations performed by the relay device 130 in each of the above method embodiments.
  • the logic circuit 2110 is used to implement the processing-related operations performed by the relay device 130 in the above method embodiment, such as the processing-related operations performed by the relay device 130 in the embodiment shown in Figure 3, input/output
  • the interface 2120 is used to implement the sending and/or receiving related operations performed by the relay device 130 in the above method embodiment, such as the sending and/or receiving related operations performed by the relay device 130 in the embodiment shown in Figure 3. operate.
  • Figure 22 is a schematic block diagram of the communication device 2200 according to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 2200 may be the network device 110 or a chip.
  • the communication device 2200 may be used to perform operations performed by the network device 110 in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 3 .
  • FIG. 22 shows a simplified schematic structural diagram of a base station.
  • the base station includes part 2210, part 2220 and part 2230.
  • Part 2210 is mainly used for baseband processing, controlling the base station, etc.
  • Part 2210 is usually the control center of the base station, which can usually be called a processor, and is used to control the base station to perform processing operations on the network device side in the above method embodiments.
  • Part 2220 is mainly used to store computer program code and data.
  • the 2230 part is mainly used for the transmission and reception of radio frequency signals and the conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals; the 2230 part can usually be called a transceiver module, a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc.
  • the transceiver module of part 2230 can also be called a transceiver or a transceiver, etc., which includes an antenna 2233 and a radio frequency circuit (not shown in the figure), where the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for radio frequency processing.
  • the device used to implement the receiving function in part 2230 can be regarded as a receiver, and the device used to implement the transmitting function can be regarded as a transmitter, that is, part 2230 includes a receiver 2232 and a transmitter 2131.
  • the receiver can also be called a receiving module, receiver, or receiving circuit, etc.
  • the transmitter can be called a transmitting module, transmitter, or transmitting circuit, etc.
  • Parts 2210 and 2220 may include one or more single boards, and each single board may include one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the processor is used to read and execute programs in the memory to implement baseband processing functions and control the base station. If there are multiple boards, each board can be interconnected to enhance processing capabilities. As an optional implementation, multiple single boards may share one or more processors, or multiple single boards may share one or more memories, or multiple single boards may share one or more processors at the same time. device.
  • the transceiver module of part 2230 is used to perform transceiver-related processes performed by the network device 110 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the processor of part 2210 is used to perform processing-related processes performed by the network device 110 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the processor of part 2210 is used to perform processing-related processes performed by the communication device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the transceiver module of part 2230 is used to perform transceiver-related processes performed by the communication device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 .
  • FIG. 22 is only an example and not a limitation, and the network equipment including the processor, memory and transceiver mentioned above may not rely on the structure shown in FIGS. 16 to 21 .
  • the chip When the communication device 2200 is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver, a memory, and a processor.
  • the transceiver may be an input-output circuit or a communication interface;
  • the processor may be a processor, a microprocessor, or an integrated circuit integrated on the chip.
  • the sending operation of the network device 110 in the above method embodiment can be understood as the output of the chip, and the receiving operation of the network device 110 in the above method embodiment can be understood as the input of the chip.
  • the above-mentioned communication device may be one or more chips.
  • the communication device can be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a system on chip (SoC), or It can be a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), a digital signal processing circuit (DSP), or a microcontroller unit , MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chip.
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • SoC system on chip
  • CPU central processing unit
  • NP network processor
  • DSP digital signal processing circuit
  • MCU microcontroller unit
  • PLD programmable logic device
  • each step of the above method can be completed by instructions in the form of hardware integrated logic circuits or software in the processor.
  • the steps of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application can be directly implemented by a hardware processor for execution, or can be executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the software module can be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other mature storage media in this field.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
  • the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities. During the implementation process, each step of the above method embodiment can be completed through an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, DSP, ASIC, FPGA or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic device, or discrete hardware component. Each method, step and logical block diagram disclosed in the embodiment of this application can be implemented or executed.
  • a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor, etc.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application can be directly implemented by a hardware decoding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module can be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other mature storage media in this field.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory in the embodiment of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memories.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable ROM (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), electrically removable memory. Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory can be random access Memory (random access memory, RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • double data rate SDRAM double data rate SDRAM
  • DDR SDRAM double data rate SDRAM
  • ESDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SLDRAM synchronous link dynamic random access memory
  • direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable medium.
  • the computer-readable medium stores program code.
  • the program code When the program code is run on a computer, it causes the computer to execute the steps shown in Figure 3 or Figure 11.
  • Example methods For example, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method executed by the network device in the above method embodiment, or the method executed by the relay device.
  • Embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product containing instructions.
  • the instructions When the instructions are executed by a computer, the computer implements the method executed by the network device or the method executed by the relay device in the above method embodiment.
  • Embodiments of the present application also provide a communication system.
  • the communication system includes a network device and a relay device.
  • the network device is used to implement the method performed by the network device in the above method embodiment.
  • the relay device is used to implement the above method. Method performed by the relay device in the example.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another, e.g., the computer instructions may be transferred from a website, computer, server or data
  • the center transmits to another website's site, computer, server or data center through wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. that contains one or more available media integrated.
  • the usable media may be magnetic media (e.g., floppy disks, hard disks, tapes), optical media (e.g., high-density digital video discs (DVD)), or semiconductor media (e.g., solid state disks, SSD)) etc.
  • magnetic media e.g., floppy disks, hard disks, tapes
  • optical media e.g., high-density digital video discs (DVD)
  • DVD digital video discs
  • semiconductor media e.g., solid state disks, SSD
  • the network equipment and relay equipment in each of the above apparatus embodiments correspond to the network equipment and relay equipment in the method embodiments, and the corresponding steps are performed by corresponding modules or units.
  • the communication unit transmits the corresponding steps in the method embodiments.
  • the step of receiving or sending, other steps except sending and receiving may be executed by the processing unit (processor).
  • the processing unit processor
  • a component may be, but is not limited to, a process, a processor, an object, an executable file, a thread of execution, a program and/or a computer running on a processor.
  • applications running on the computing device and the computing device may be components.
  • One or more components can reside in a process and/or thread of execution and a component can be localized on one computer and/or distributed between two or more computers. Additionally, these components can execute from various computer-readable media having various data structures stored thereon.
  • a component may, for example, be based on a signal having one or more data packets (eg, data from two components interacting with another component, a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet, which interacts with other systems via signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • data packets eg, data from two components interacting with another component, a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet, which interacts with other systems via signals
  • the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the coupling or direct coupling or communication connection between each other shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of the devices or units may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application can be integrated into one processing unit, each unit can exist physically alone, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application is essentially or contributes to the existing solution or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, It includes several instructions to cause a computer device (which can be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of this application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code. .

Abstract

The present application provides a beam management method and a communication apparatus. The method comprises: a network device receives first beam information sent by a relay device; the network device determines a first beam set according to the first beam information and second beam information, wherein a beam in the first beam set is used for the relay device to forward a reference signal sent by the network device or a terminal device, and the second beam information is reported or pre-configured by the relay device; and the network device sends first configuration information to the relay device, the first configuration information being used for configuring the first beam set. By means of the method, in the present application, a beam direction of the relay device can be aligned with the network device, so that the relay device can better assist in communication between the network device and the terminal device.

Description

波束管理的方法、通信装置以及通信系统Beam management method, communication device and communication system
本申请要求于2022年8月25日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为202211025883.2、申请名称为“波束管理的方法、通信装置以及通信系统”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to the Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office of China on August 25, 2022, with application number 202211025883.2 and application title "Method, communication device and communication system for beam management", the entire content of which is incorporated by reference. incorporated in this application.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,更具体地,涉及一种波束管理的方法、通信装置以及通信系统。The present application relates to the field of communication technology, and more specifically, to a beam management method, a communication device and a communication system.
背景技术Background technique
在近距离的场景中,网络设备与终端设备可以直接进行通信,但当二者之间的距离较远时,可以通过中继设备辅助网络设备和终端设备之间的通信。例如,中继设备将接收到的信号(包括来自网络设备或者来自终端设备的信号)放大后转发。In close-range scenarios, network equipment and terminal equipment can communicate directly, but when the distance between the two is relatively long, relay equipment can be used to assist communication between the network equipment and terminal equipment. For example, the relay device amplifies the received signal (including the signal from the network device or the terminal device) and then forwards it.
目前,新空口(new radio,NR)通信系统只考虑了网络设备和终端设备直接通信时的波束管理,没有考虑在引入中继设备之后,如何调整中继设备的波束方向,使得中继设备能够更好地辅助网络设备与终端设备之间的通信的问题。At present, the new radio (NR) communication system only considers beam management when network equipment and terminal equipment communicate directly. It does not consider how to adjust the beam direction of the relay equipment after the relay equipment is introduced so that the relay equipment can To better assist the communication between network equipment and terminal equipment.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请提供一种波束管理的方法、通信装置以及通信系统,能够实现中继设备的波束方向对准网络设备,从而可以使得中继设备能够更好地辅助网络设备与终端设备之间的通信。The present application provides a beam management method, communication device and communication system, which can realize the beam direction of the relay device to be aligned with the network device, so that the relay device can better assist the communication between the network device and the terminal device.
第一方面,提供了一种波束管理的方法,包括:网络设备接收中继设备发送的第一波束信息;网络设备根据第一波束信息与第二波束信息确定第一波束集合,该第一波束集合中的波束用于中继设备转发网络设备或者终端设备发送的参考信号,该第二波束信息是中继设备上报的或者预配置的;网络设备向中继设备发送第一配置信息,该第一配置信息用于配置该第一波束集合。In a first aspect, a beam management method is provided, including: a network device receiving first beam information sent by a relay device; and the network device determining a first beam set based on the first beam information and the second beam information. The beams in the set are used by the relay device to forward the reference signal sent by the network device or the terminal device. The second beam information is reported or preconfigured by the relay device; the network device sends the first configuration information to the relay device, and the third beam information is sent by the relay device. Configuration information is used to configure the first beam set.
具体来说,网络设备可以根据中继设备的第一波束信息与第二波束信息为中继设备配置第一波束集合,该第一波束集合中波束的方向能够与网络设备进行对准,如此,中继设备可以根据第一波束集合更好的辅助网络设备与终端设备之间的通信。Specifically, the network device can configure a first beam set for the relay device based on the first beam information and the second beam information of the relay device. The direction of the beams in the first beam set can be aligned with the network device. In this way, The relay device can better assist communication between the network device and the terminal device according to the first beam set.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,第一波束信息是中继设备的控制模块确定的,第二波束信息是中继设备的转发模块的信息。In conjunction with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the first beam information is determined by the control module of the relay device, and the second beam information is information of the forwarding module of the relay device.
可选地,第一波束信息对应于中继设备的第一天线,第二波束信息对应于中继设备的第二天线。Optionally, the first beam information corresponds to the first antenna of the relay device, and the second beam information corresponds to the second antenna of the relay device.
可选地,第一天线与第二天线不相同。Optionally, the first antenna and the second antenna are different.
可选地,第一天线对应于控制模块,第二天线对应于转发模块。Optionally, the first antenna corresponds to the control module, and the second antenna corresponds to the forwarding module.
可选地,第一天线属于控制模块,第二天线属于转发模块。Optionally, the first antenna belongs to the control module, and the second antenna belongs to the forwarding module.
网络设备可以根据中继设备的控制模块确定的第一波束信息以及中继设备的转发模块的第二波束信息来确定第一波束集合,可以使得第一波束集合可以对准网络设备,继而,中继设备可以根据第一波束集合更好的辅助网络设备与终端设备之间的通信。The network device can determine the first beam set according to the first beam information determined by the control module of the relay device and the second beam information of the forwarding module of the relay device, so that the first beam set can be aimed at the network device, and then, The relay device can better assist communication between the network device and the terminal device according to the first beam set.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:网络设备确定该第一波束集合的测量信息;网络设备向中继设备发送第二配置信息,该第二配置信息用于配置第二波束集合,该第二波束集合是网络设备根据该测量信息确定的。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: the network device determines the measurement information of the first beam set; the network device sends second configuration information to the relay device, the second configuration information is Configuring a second beam set, the second beam set is determined by the network device based on the measurement information.
可选地,该第一波束集合包括至少一个不属于该第二波束集合的波束,或者,该第二波束集合包括至少一个不属于该第一波束集合的波束。Optionally, the first beam set includes at least one beam that does not belong to the second beam set, or the second beam set includes at least one beam that does not belong to the first beam set.
具体来说,网络设备可以根据第一波束集合的测量信息为中继设备配置相较于第一波束集合更能对准网络设备的第二波束集合,如此,中继设备可以根据第二波束集合更好的辅助网络设备与终端设备之间的通信。 Specifically, the network device can configure the relay device according to the measurement information of the first beam set, which is better aligned with the network device than the first beam set. In this way, the relay device can configure the second beam set according to the second beam set. Better communication between auxiliary network equipment and terminal equipment.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该第一波束信息包括中继设备与网络设备之间的波束方向信息;该第二波束信息包括以下至少一项:波束的数量信息,波束的准共址信息,波束的覆盖范围信息,波束之间的相对关系,波束集合的数量信息,波束集合的准共址信息,波束集合的覆盖范围信息,波束集合之间的相对关系,波束索引与权值之间的对应关系,波束索引与波束之间的对应关系,天线阵列信息,权值生成信息,或者,天线信息。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the first beam information includes beam direction information between the relay device and the network device; the second beam information includes at least one of the following: number information of beams , quasi-co-location information of beams, coverage information of beams, relative relationship between beams, quantity information of beam sets, quasi-co-location information of beam sets, coverage information of beam sets, relative relationship between beam sets, Correspondence between beam index and weight, correspondence between beam index and beam, antenna array information, weight generation information, or antenna information.
具体来说,网络设备可以根据中继设备上报的关于网络设备与中继设备之间的初始的波束方向信息从网络设备根据第一波束信息中确定的多个波束集合中确定第一波束集合,如此,中继设备可以基于该第一波束集合更好地辅助网络设备与终端设备之间的通信,另外,第一波束集合是可以对准网络设备的。Specifically, the network device may determine the first beam set from multiple beam sets determined by the network device based on the first beam information based on the initial beam direction information reported by the relay device about the network device and the relay device, In this way, the relay device can better assist communication between the network device and the terminal device based on the first beam set. In addition, the first beam set can be aimed at the network device.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,网络设备确定第一波束集合的测量信息,包括:网络设备通过中继设备的第一波束集合向终端设备发送至少一个参考信号;网络设备接收该测量信息,该测量信息是终端设备根据中继设备转发的至少一个参考信号确定的;或者,网络设备接收通过中继设备的该第一波束集合转发的至少一个参考信号,至少一个参考信号是终端设备向网络设备发送的;网络设备根据至少一个参考信号确定该测量信息。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the network device determines the measurement information of the first beam set, including: the network device sends at least one reference signal to the terminal device through the first beam set of the relay device; the network device The device receives the measurement information, which is determined by the terminal device based on at least one reference signal forwarded by the relay device; or the network device receives at least one reference signal forwarded by the first beam set of the relay device, and the at least one reference signal The signal is sent by the terminal device to the network device; the network device determines the measurement information based on at least one reference signal.
具体来说,网络设备可以通过下行测量方式或者上行测量方式来确定第一波束集合的测量信息。Specifically, the network device may determine the measurement information of the first beam set through a downlink measurement method or an uplink measurement method.
可选地,参考信号用于波束测量。Optionally, a reference signal is used for beam measurements.
可选地,测量信息是终端设备确定的,并由中继设备负责将终端设备发送的测量信息转发给网络设备。Optionally, the measurement information is determined by the terminal device, and the relay device is responsible for forwarding the measurement information sent by the terminal device to the network device.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该第一配置信息包括至少一个第一权值,每个第一权值包括第一分量,该第一分量用于指示中继设备的回传链路波束。In conjunction with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the first configuration information includes at least one first weight, each first weight includes a first component, and the first component is used to indicate the relay device backhaul link beam.
具体来说,中继设备为反射面时,反射面的权值可以包括回传链路波束对应的分量,网络设备可以向中继设备发送包括回传链路波束的分量对应的信息;基于网络设备下发的配置信息,中继设备可以调整中继设备的回传链路波束的分量,且基于原有的接入链路波束的分量,形成新的权值。从而使其回传链路波束与网络设备对准(或者更加匹配),且接入链路波束朝向目标方向进行反射(与目标方向更加匹配)。Specifically, when the relay device is a reflective surface, the weight of the reflective surface can include the component corresponding to the backhaul link beam, and the network device can send information corresponding to the component including the backhaul link beam to the relay device; based on the network Based on the configuration information issued by the device, the relay device can adjust the components of the backhaul link beam of the relay device and form a new weight based on the components of the original access link beam. Thereby, its backhaul link beam is aligned with the network device (or better matched), and the access link beam is reflected toward the target direction (better matched with the target direction).
网络设备可以通过上述的第一配置信息向中继设备指示至少一个第一权值中的全部或者部分第一权值的第一分量。The network device may indicate to the relay device all or part of the first component of the first weight in at least one first weight through the above-mentioned first configuration information.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,每个第一权值还包括第二分量,该第二分量用于指示中继设备的接入链路波束。In conjunction with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, each first weight further includes a second component, the second component is used to indicate the access link beam of the relay device.
具体来说,通过将反射面的权值分成两部分,分别是回传链路波束对应的第一分量,以及接入链路波束对应的第二分量,如此,可以简化反射面的权值的设计形式。网络设备下发的配置信息中包括的回传链路波束对应的分量,中继设备可以基于该分量,调整中继设备的回传链路波束的分量,使其回传链路与网络设备对准。另外,网络设备下发的配置信息中包括的接入链路波束对应的分量,中继设备还可以基于该分量,调整中继设备的接入链路波束,使其接入链路波束与终端设备对准。Specifically, by dividing the weight of the reflective surface into two parts, which are the first component corresponding to the backhaul link beam and the second component corresponding to the access link beam, the calculation of the weight of the reflective surface can be simplified. Design form. The component corresponding to the backhaul link beam included in the configuration information issued by the network device. Based on this component, the relay device can adjust the component of the backhaul link beam of the relay device so that the backhaul link aligns with the network device. allow. In addition, the component corresponding to the access link beam included in the configuration information issued by the network device, the relay device can also adjust the access link beam of the relay device based on this component, so that the access link beam is consistent with the terminal Device alignment.
通过分别调整回传链路的第一分量和接入链路的第二分量,使得中继设备在网络设备和终端设备之间,实现信号反射(或转发),从而辅助通信。By respectively adjusting the first component of the backhaul link and the second component of the access link, the relay device realizes signal reflection (or forwarding) between the network device and the terminal device, thereby assisting communication.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该第二配置信息包括至少一个第二权值,每个第二权值包括第三分量,该第三分量用于指示中继设备的回传链路波束。In conjunction with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the second configuration information includes at least one second weight, each second weight includes a third component, and the third component is used to indicate the relay device backhaul link beam.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,每个第二权值包括第四分量,该第四分量用于指示中继设备的接入链路波束。In conjunction with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, each second weight includes a fourth component, the fourth component being used to indicate the access link beam of the relay device.
第二方面,提供了一种波束管理的方法,包括:中继设备向网络设备发送第一波束信息;中继设备接收网络设备发送的第一配置信息,该第一配置信息用于配置第一波束集合,该第一波束集合中的波束用于中继设备转发网络设备或者终端设备发送的参考信号,该第一波束集合是网络设备根据第一波束信息与第二波束信息确定的;其中,该第二波束信息是中继设备上报的或者预配置的。In a second aspect, a beam management method is provided, including: a relay device sends first beam information to a network device; the relay device receives first configuration information sent by the network device, and the first configuration information is used to configure the first beam information. A beam set. The beams in the first beam set are used by the relay device to forward reference signals sent by the network device or the terminal device. The first beam set is determined by the network device based on the first beam information and the second beam information; wherein, The second beam information is reported by the relay device or preconfigured.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,第一波束信息是中继设备的控制模块确定的,第二波束信息是中继设备的转发模块的信息。Combined with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the first beam information is determined by the control module of the relay device, and the second beam information is information of the forwarding module of the relay device.
可选地,第一波束信息对应于中继设备的第一天线,第二波束信息对应于中继设备的第二天线。 Optionally, the first beam information corresponds to the first antenna of the relay device, and the second beam information corresponds to the second antenna of the relay device.
可选地,第一天线与第二天线不相同。Optionally, the first antenna and the second antenna are different.
可选地,第一天线对应于控制模块,第二天线对应于转发模块。Optionally, the first antenna corresponds to the control module, and the second antenna corresponds to the forwarding module.
可选地,第一天线属于控制模块,第二天线属于转发模块。Optionally, the first antenna belongs to the control module, and the second antenna belongs to the forwarding module.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:中继设备通过该第一波束集合向终端设备转发网络设备发送的至少一个参考信号,参考信号用于测量;中继设备向网络设备发送该第一波束集合的测量信息,该测量信息是终端设备根据至少一个参考信号确定的。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the method further includes: the relay device forwards at least one reference signal sent by the network device to the terminal device through the first beam set, and the reference signal is used for measurement; relaying The device sends measurement information of the first beam set to the network device, where the measurement information is determined by the terminal device based on at least one reference signal.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:中继设备通过第一波束集合向网络设备转发终端设备发送的至少一个参考信号。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the method further includes: the relay device forwards at least one reference signal sent by the terminal device to the network device through the first beam set.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:中继设备接收网络设备发送的第二配置信息,该第二配置信息用于配置第二波束集合,该第二波束集合是网络设备根据该第一波束集合的测量信息确定的。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the method further includes: the relay device receives second configuration information sent by the network device, the second configuration information is used to configure the second beam set, the second beam set The set is determined by the network device based on the measurement information of the first beam set.
可选地,该第一波束集合包括至少一个不属于该第二波束集合的波束,或者,该第二波束集合包括至少一个不属于该第一波束集合的波束。Optionally, the first beam set includes at least one beam that does not belong to the second beam set, or the second beam set includes at least one beam that does not belong to the first beam set.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该第一波束信息包括中继设备与网络设备之间的波束方向信息;该第二波束信息包括以下至少一项:波束的数量信息,波束的准共址信息,波束的覆盖范围信息,波束之间的相对关系,波束集合的数量信息,波束集合的准共址信息,波束集合的覆盖范围信息,波束集合之间的相对关系,波束索引与权值之间的对应关系,波束索引与波束之间的对应关系,天线阵列信息,权值生成信息,或者,天线信息。Combined with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the first beam information includes beam direction information between the relay device and the network device; the second beam information includes at least one of the following: number information of beams , quasi-co-location information of beams, coverage information of beams, relative relationship between beams, quantity information of beam sets, quasi-co-location information of beam sets, coverage information of beam sets, relative relationship between beam sets, Correspondence between beam index and weight, correspondence between beam index and beam, antenna array information, weight generation information, or antenna information.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该第一配置信息包括至少一个第一权值,每个第一权值包括第一分量,该第一分量用于指示中继设备的回传链路波束。In conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the first configuration information includes at least one first weight, each first weight includes a first component, and the first component is used to indicate the relay device backhaul link beam.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,每个第一权值还包括第二分量,该第二分量用于指示中继设备的接入链路波束。In conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, each first weight further includes a second component, the second component is used to indicate the access link beam of the relay device.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该第二配置信息包括至少一个第二权值,每个第二权值包括第三分量,该第三分量用于指示中继设备的回传链路波束。In conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the second configuration information includes at least one second weight, each second weight includes a third component, and the third component is used to indicate the relay device backhaul link beam.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述每个第二权值包括第四分量,所述第四分量用于指示中继设备的接入链路波束。In conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, each of the second weights includes a fourth component, where the fourth component is used to indicate an access link beam of the relay device.
第三方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:通信接口和处理器,通信接口用于收发数据和/或信令,所述处理器用于执行计算机程序或指令,使得该通信装置执行第一方面以及第一方面的任一种可能实现方式中任一项所述的方法;或者,使得该通信装置执行第二方面以及第二方面的任一种可能实现方式中任一项所述的方法。In a third aspect, a communication device is provided, including: a communication interface and a processor. The communication interface is used to send and receive data and/or signaling. The processor is used to execute computer programs or instructions, so that the communication device executes the first aspect. and the method described in any one of the possible implementations of the first aspect; or, causing the communication device to perform the second aspect and the method described in any one of the possible implementations of the second aspect.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能实现方式中,通信装置还包括存储器,所述存储器用于存储所述计算机程序或指令。In conjunction with the third aspect, in some possible implementations of the third aspect, the communication device further includes a memory, and the memory is used to store the computer program or instructions.
第四方面,提供了一种通信装置,该通信装置可以用于第一方面的通信装置,该通信装置可以是网络设备,也可以是网络设备中的装置(例如,芯片,或者芯片系统,或者电路),或者是能够和网络设备匹配使用的装置。The fourth aspect provides a communication device, which can be used in the communication device of the first aspect. The communication device can be a network device or a device in the network device (for example, a chip, or a chip system, or circuit), or a device that can be used with network equipment.
一种可能的实现中,该通信装置可以包括执行第一方面中所描述的方法/操作/步骤/动作所一一对应的模块或单元,该模块或单元可以是硬件电路,也可是软件,也可以是硬件电路结合软件实现。In a possible implementation, the communication device may include modules or units that perform one-to-one correspondence with the methods/operations/steps/actions described in the first aspect. The modules or units may be hardware circuits, software, or It can be implemented by hardware circuit combined with software.
一种可能的实现中,该通信装置包括:收发单元,用于接收中继设备发送的第一波束信息;处理单元,用于根据该第一波束信息与第二波束信息确定第一波束集合,该第一波束集合中的波束用于中继设备转发该通信装置或者终端设备发送的参考信号,该第二波束信息是中继设备上报的或者预配置的;该收发单元,还用于向中继设备发送第一配置信息,该第一配置信息用于配置所述第一波束集合。In a possible implementation, the communication device includes: a transceiver unit, configured to receive the first beam information sent by the relay device; a processing unit, configured to determine the first beam set according to the first beam information and the second beam information, The beams in the first beam set are used by the relay device to forward the reference signal sent by the communication device or terminal device. The second beam information is reported or preconfigured by the relay device; the transceiver unit is also used to transmit The relay device sends first configuration information, where the first configuration information is used to configure the first beam set.
应理解,上述的收发单元可以包括发送单元与接收单元。发送单元用于执行通信装置的发送动作,接收单元用于执行通信装置的接收动作。为便于描述,本申请实施例将发送单元与接收单元合为一个收发单元。在此做统一说明,后文不再赘述。It should be understood that the above-mentioned transceiving unit may include a sending unit and a receiving unit. The sending unit is used to perform the sending action of the communication device, and the receiving unit is used to perform the receiving action of the communication device. For convenience of description, the embodiment of the present application combines the sending unit and the receiving unit into one sending and receiving unit. A unified explanation is given here and will not be repeated in the following paragraphs.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,第一波束信息是中继设备的控制模块确定的,第二波束信息是中继设备的转发模块的信息。Combined with the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the first beam information is determined by the control module of the relay device, and the second beam information is information of the forwarding module of the relay device.
可选地,第一波束信息对应于中继设备的第一天线,第二波束信息对应于中继设备的第二天线。 Optionally, the first beam information corresponds to the first antenna of the relay device, and the second beam information corresponds to the second antenna of the relay device.
可选地,第一天线与第二天线不相同。Optionally, the first antenna and the second antenna are different.
可选地,第一天线对应于控制模块,第二天线对应于转发模块。Optionally, the first antenna corresponds to the control module, and the second antenna corresponds to the forwarding module.
可选地,第一天线属于控制模块,第二天线属于转发模块。Optionally, the first antenna belongs to the control module, and the second antenna belongs to the forwarding module.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,该处理单元,还用于确定第一波束集合的测量信息;该收发单元,还用于向中继设备发送第二配置信息,该第二配置信息用于配置第二波束集合,该第二波束集合是该通信装置根据该测量信息确定的。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the processing unit is also used to determine the measurement information of the first beam set; the transceiver unit is also used to send the second configuration information to the relay device, the The second configuration information is used to configure a second beam set, and the second beam set is determined by the communication device based on the measurement information.
可选地,该第一波束集合包括至少一个不属于该第二波束集合的波束,或者,该第二波束集合包括至少一个不属于该第一波束集合的波束。Optionally, the first beam set includes at least one beam that does not belong to the second beam set, or the second beam set includes at least one beam that does not belong to the first beam set.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,该第一波束信息包括中继设备与网络设备之间的波束方向信息;该第二波束信息包括以下至少一项:波束的数量信息,波束的准共址信息,波束的覆盖范围信息,波束之间的相对关系,波束集合的数量信息,波束集合的准共址信息,波束集合的覆盖范围信息,波束集合之间的相对关系,波束索引与权值之间的对应关系,波束索引与波束之间的对应关系,天线阵列信息,权值生成信息,或者,天线信息。Combined with the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the first beam information includes beam direction information between the relay device and the network device; the second beam information includes at least one of the following: number information of beams , quasi-co-location information of beams, coverage information of beams, relative relationship between beams, quantity information of beam sets, quasi-co-location information of beam sets, coverage information of beam sets, relative relationship between beam sets, Correspondence between beam index and weight, correspondence between beam index and beam, antenna array information, weight generation information, or antenna information.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,该收发单元,还用于通过中继设备的第一波束集合向终端设备发送至少一个参考信号;该收发单元,还用于接收中继设备转发的该测量信息,该测量信息是终端设备根据中继设备转发的至少一个参考信号确定的;或者,该收发单元,还用于接收通过中继设备的第一波束集合转发的至少一个参考信号,每个参考信号是终端设备向网络设备发送的;该处理单元,还用于根据至少一个参考信号确定该测量信息。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the transceiver unit is also used to send at least one reference signal to the terminal device through the first beam set of the relay device; the transceiver unit is also used to receive The measurement information forwarded by the relay device, the measurement information is determined by the terminal device based on at least one reference signal forwarded by the relay device; or, the transceiver unit is also used to receive at least one beam forwarded by the first beam set of the relay device. Reference signals, each reference signal is sent by the terminal device to the network device; the processing unit is also used to determine the measurement information based on at least one reference signal.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,该第一配置信息包括至少一个第一权值,每个第一权值包括第一分量,该第一分量用于指示中继设备的回传链路波束。In conjunction with the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the first configuration information includes at least one first weight, each first weight includes a first component, and the first component is used to indicate the relay device backhaul link beam.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,每个第一权值还包括第二分量,该第二分量用于指示中继设备的接入链路波束。In conjunction with the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, each first weight further includes a second component, the second component is used to indicate the access link beam of the relay device.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,该第二配置信息包括至少一个第二权值,每个第二权值包括第三分量,该第三分量用于指示中继设备的回传链路波束。In conjunction with the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the second configuration information includes at least one second weight, each second weight includes a third component, and the third component is used to indicate the relay device backhaul link beam.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,每个第二权值包括第四分量,该第四分量用于指示中继设备的接入链路波束。In conjunction with the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, each second weight includes a fourth component, the fourth component being used to indicate the access link beam of the relay device.
第五方面,提供了一种通信装置,该通信装置可以用于第二方面的通信装置,该通信装置可以是中继设备,也可以是中继设备中的装置(例如,芯片,或者芯片系统,或者电路),或者是能够和中继设备匹配使用的装置。The fifth aspect provides a communication device, which can be used in the communication device of the second aspect. The communication device can be a relay device or a device in the relay device (for example, a chip, or a chip system , or circuit), or a device that can be used with relay equipment.
一种可能的实现中,该通信装置可以包括执行第二方面中所描述的方法/操作/步骤/动作所一一对应的模块或单元,该模块或单元可以是硬件电路,也可是软件,也可以是硬件电路结合软件实现。In a possible implementation, the communication device may include modules or units that perform one-to-one correspondence with the methods/operations/steps/actions described in the second aspect. The modules or units may be hardware circuits, software, or It can be implemented by hardware circuit combined with software.
一种可能的实现中,该通信装置包括:收发单元,用于向网络设备发送第一波束信息;该收发单元,还用于接收网络设备发送的第一配置信息,该第一配置信息用于配置第一波束集合,该第一波束集合中的波束用于该通信装置转发网络设备或者终端设备发送的参考信号,该第一波束集合是网络设备根据该第一波束信息与第二波束信息确定的;其中,该第二波束信息是该通信装置上报的或者预配置的。In a possible implementation, the communication device includes: a transceiver unit, configured to send the first beam information to the network device; the transceiver unit is also configured to receive the first configuration information sent by the network device, where the first configuration information is used to Configuring a first beam set, the beams in the first beam set are used by the communication device to forward the reference signal sent by the network device or the terminal device, the first beam set is determined by the network device based on the first beam information and the second beam information ; wherein the second beam information is reported or preconfigured by the communication device.
结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,第一波束信息是该通信装置的控制模块确定的,第二波束信息是该通信装置的转发模块的信息。Combined with the fifth aspect, in some implementations of the fifth aspect, the first beam information is determined by the control module of the communication device, and the second beam information is information of the forwarding module of the communication device.
可选地,第一波束信息对应于该通信装置的第一天线,第二波束信息对应于该通信装置的第二天线。Optionally, the first beam information corresponds to the first antenna of the communication device, and the second beam information corresponds to the second antenna of the communication device.
可选地,第一天线与第二天线不相同。Optionally, the first antenna and the second antenna are different.
可选地,第一天线对应于控制模块,第二天线对应于转发模块。Optionally, the first antenna corresponds to the control module, and the second antenna corresponds to the forwarding module.
可选地,第一天线属于控制模块,第二天线属于转发模块。Optionally, the first antenna belongs to the control module, and the second antenna belongs to the forwarding module.
应理解,上述的收发单元可以包括发送单元与接收单元。发送单元用于执行通信装置的发送动作,接收单元用于执行通信装置的接收动作。为便于描述,本申请实施例将发送单元与接收单元合为一个收发单元。在此做统一说明,后文不再赘述。It should be understood that the above-mentioned transceiving unit may include a sending unit and a receiving unit. The sending unit is used to perform the sending action of the communication device, and the receiving unit is used to perform the receiving action of the communication device. For convenience of description, the embodiment of the present application combines the sending unit and the receiving unit into one sending and receiving unit. A unified explanation is given here and will not be repeated in the following paragraphs.
结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,该收发单元,还用于通过该第一波束集合向终端 设备转发网络设备发送的至少一个参考信号,参考信号用于测量束;该收发单元,还用于向网络设备发送该第一波束集合的测量信息,该测量信息是终端设备根据至少一个参考信号确定的。In conjunction with the fifth aspect, in some implementations of the fifth aspect, the transceiver unit is also configured to send signals to the terminal through the first beam set The device forwards at least one reference signal sent by the network device, and the reference signal is used for measuring beams; the transceiver unit is also used to send measurement information of the first beam set to the network device, the measurement information is determined by the terminal device based on at least one reference signal of.
结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,该收发单元,还用于通过该第一波束集合向网络设备转发终端设备发送的至少一个参考信号。In conjunction with the fifth aspect, in some implementations of the fifth aspect, the transceiver unit is further configured to forward at least one reference signal sent by the terminal device to the network device through the first beam set.
结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,该收发单元,还用于接收网络设备发送的第二配置信息,该第二配置信息用于配置第二波束集合,该第二波束集合是网络设备根据该第一波束集合的测量信息确定的。In conjunction with the fifth aspect, in some implementations of the fifth aspect, the transceiver unit is also configured to receive second configuration information sent by the network device, where the second configuration information is used to configure the second beam set. The second beam The set is determined by the network device based on the measurement information of the first beam set.
可选地,该第一波束集合包括至少一个不属于该第二波束集合的波束,或者,该第二波束集合包括至少一个不属于该第一波束集合的波束。Optionally, the first beam set includes at least one beam that does not belong to the second beam set, or the second beam set includes at least one beam that does not belong to the first beam set.
结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,该第一波束信息包括中继设备与网络设备之间的波束方向信息;该第二波束信息包括以下至少一项:波束的数量信息,波束的准共址信息,波束的覆盖范围信息,波束之间的相对关系,波束集合的数量信息,波束集合的准共址信息,波束集合的覆盖范围信息,波束集合之间的相对关系,波束索引与权值之间的对应关系,波束索引与波束之间的对应关系,天线阵列信息,权值生成信息,或者,天线信息。In conjunction with the fifth aspect, in some implementations of the fifth aspect, the first beam information includes beam direction information between the relay device and the network device; the second beam information includes at least one of the following: number information of beams , quasi-co-location information of beams, coverage information of beams, relative relationship between beams, quantity information of beam sets, quasi-co-location information of beam sets, coverage information of beam sets, relative relationship between beam sets, Correspondence between beam index and weight, correspondence between beam index and beam, antenna array information, weight generation information, or antenna information.
结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,该第一配置信息包括至少一个第一权值,每个第一权值包括第一分量,该第一分量用于指示中继设备的回传链路波束。In conjunction with the fifth aspect, in some implementations of the fifth aspect, the first configuration information includes at least one first weight, each first weight includes a first component, and the first component is used to indicate the relay device backhaul link beam.
结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,每个第一权值还包括第二分量,该第二分量用于指示中继设备的接入链路波束。In conjunction with the fifth aspect, in some implementations of the fifth aspect, each first weight further includes a second component, the second component is used to indicate the access link beam of the relay device.
结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,该第二配置信息包括至少一个第二权值,每个第二权值包括第三分量,该第三分量用于指示中继设备的回传链路波束。In conjunction with the fifth aspect, in some implementations of the fifth aspect, the second configuration information includes at least one second weight, each second weight includes a third component, and the third component is used to indicate the relay device backhaul link beam.
结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,每个第二权值包括第四分量,该第四分量用于指示中继设备的接入链路波束。In conjunction with the fifth aspect, in some implementations of the fifth aspect, each second weight includes a fourth component, the fourth component being used to indicate the access link beam of the relay device.
第六方面,提供了一种通信系统,包括:网络设备与中继设备;网络设备用于执行第一方面以及第一方面的任一种可能实现方式中任一项所述的方法;中继设备用于执行第二方面以及第二方面的任一种可能实现方式中任一项所述的方法。A sixth aspect provides a communication system, including: a network device and a relay device; the network device is configured to perform the method described in any one of the first aspect and any possible implementation of the first aspect; the relay The device is configured to perform the method described in any one of the second aspect and any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
第七方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,包括计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或所述指令在计算机上运行时,使得第一方面以及第一方面的任一种可能实现方式中任一项所述的方法被执行;或者,使得第二方面以及第二方面的任一种可能实现方式中任一项所述的方法被执行。In a seventh aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided, including a computer program or instructions. When the computer program or instructions are run on a computer, the first aspect and any possible implementation of the first aspect are enabled. The method described in any one of them is executed; or, the method described in any one of the second aspect and any possible implementation manner of the second aspect is executed.
第八方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,包含指令,当所述指令在计算机上运行时,使得第一方面以及第一方面的任一种可能实现方式中任一项所述的方法被执行;或者,使得第二方面以及第二方面的任一种可能实现方式中任一项所述的方法被执行。In an eighth aspect, a computer program product is provided, which includes instructions that, when the instructions are run on a computer, cause the method described in any one of the first aspect and any possible implementation of the first aspect to be executed. ; Or, causing the method described in any one of the second aspect and any possible implementation manner of the second aspect to be executed.
第九方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括逻辑电路和输入输出接口,输入输出接口用于输出和/或输入信号,逻辑电路用于执行第一方面以及第一方面的任一种可能实现方式中任一项所述的方法;或者,执行第二方面以及第二方面的任一种可能实现方式中任一项所述的方法。In a ninth aspect, a communication device is provided, including a logic circuit and an input-output interface. The input-output interface is used to output and/or input signals. The logic circuit is used to perform the first aspect and any possible implementation of the first aspect. The method described in any one of them; or, perform the method described in any one of the second aspect and any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
一种可能的实现中,该输入输出接口用于接收中继设备发送的第一波束信息;该逻辑电路用于根据该第一波束信息与第二波束信息确定第一波束集合,该第一波束集合中的波束用于转发至少一个参考信号中对应的参考信号,该第二波束信息是中继设备上报的或者预配置的;该输入输出接口还用于向中继设备发送第一配置信息,该第一配置信息用于配置该第一波束集合。In a possible implementation, the input and output interface is used to receive the first beam information sent by the relay device; the logic circuit is used to determine the first beam set according to the first beam information and the second beam information, and the first beam The beams in the set are used to forward the corresponding reference signal in at least one reference signal, and the second beam information is reported or preconfigured by the relay device; the input and output interface is also used to send the first configuration information to the relay device, The first configuration information is used to configure the first beam set.
一种可能的实现中,该输入输出接口用于向网络设备发送第一波束信息;该输入输出接口还用于接收网络设备发送的第一配置信息,该第一配置信息用于配置第一波束集合,该第一波束集合中的波束用于转发至少一个参考信号中对应的参考信号,该第一波束集合是网络设备根据该第一波束信息与第二波束信息确定的;其中,该第二波束信息是该通信装置上报的或者预配置的。In a possible implementation, the input and output interface is used to send the first beam information to the network device; the input and output interface is also used to receive the first configuration information sent by the network device, and the first configuration information is used to configure the first beam. A set, the beams in the first beam set are used to forward the corresponding reference signal in at least one reference signal, the first beam set is determined by the network device based on the first beam information and the second beam information; wherein, the second The beam information is reported or preconfigured by the communication device.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1是现有的通信系统100的示意图。Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of an existing communication system 100.
图2是本申请实施例的适应通信系统200的示意图。Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of an adaptive communication system 200 according to an embodiment of the present application.
图3是本申请实施例的反射面工作原理的示意图。 Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of the working principle of the reflective surface according to the embodiment of the present application.
图4是本申请实施例的波束管理的方法400的交互流程图。Figure 4 is an interactive flow chart of the beam management method 400 according to the embodiment of the present application.
图5是控制模块的天线与转发模块的天线之间的关系示意图。Figure 5 is a schematic diagram of the relationship between the antenna of the control module and the antenna of the forwarding module.
图6是控制模块的波束与转发模块的波束之间的关系示意图。Figure 6 is a schematic diagram of the relationship between the beams of the control module and the beams of the forwarding module.
图7是波束或波束集合的二维覆盖范围的示意图。Figure 7 is a schematic diagram of the two-dimensional coverage of a beam or set of beams.
图8是不同波束或波束集合相邻的覆盖范围的示意图。Figure 8 is a schematic diagram of adjacent coverage areas of different beams or sets of beams.
图9是波束集合与信号之间对应的示意图。Figure 9 is a schematic diagram of the correspondence between beam sets and signals.
图10是不同波束或波束集合相交的覆盖范围的示意图。Figure 10 is a schematic diagram of the coverage areas where different beams or sets of beams intersect.
图11是波束或波束集合之间的相对关系的示意图。Figure 11 is a schematic diagram of the relative relationship between beams or sets of beams.
图12是波束索引设置的示意图。Figure 12 is a schematic diagram of beam index setting.
图13是不同波束在不同角度的归一化增益的示意图。Figure 13 is a schematic diagram of the normalized gains of different beams at different angles.
图14是本申请实施例的波束扫描的一种示意图。Figure 14 is a schematic diagram of beam scanning according to an embodiment of the present application.
图15是本申请实施例的波束扫描的另一种示意图。Figure 15 is another schematic diagram of beam scanning according to an embodiment of the present application.
图16是本申请实施例的波束扫描的再一种示意图。Figure 16 is another schematic diagram of beam scanning according to an embodiment of the present application.
图17是本申请实施例的中继设备的部分结构的示意图。Figure 17 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of a relay device according to an embodiment of the present application.
图18是本申请实施例的网络设备的部分结构的示意图。Figure 18 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
图19是本申请实施例的通信装置1900的示意图。Figure 19 is a schematic diagram of a communication device 1900 according to an embodiment of the present application.
图20是本申请实施例的通信装置2000的结构示意图。Figure 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 2000 according to an embodiment of the present application.
图21是本申请实施例的通信装置2100的结构示意图。Figure 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 2100 according to an embodiment of the present application.
图22是本申请实施例的通信装置2200的结构示意图。Figure 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 2200 according to an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunication system,UMTS)、第五代(5th generation,5G)系统或新空口(new radio,NR)、第六代(6th generation,6G)系统等5G之后演进的系统、星间通信和卫星通信等非陆地通信网络(non-terrestrial network,NTN)系统。卫星通信系统包括卫星基站以及终端设备。卫星基站为终端设备提供通信服务。卫星基站也可以与地面基站进行通信。卫星可作为基站,也可作为终端设备。其中,卫星可以是指无人机,热气球,低轨卫星,中轨卫星,高轨卫星等非地面基站或非地面设备等。The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, such as: long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (time division duplex) , TDD), universal mobile telecommunication system (UMTS), fifth generation ( 5th generation, 5G) system or new radio (NR), sixth generation ( 6th generation, 6G) system, etc. Systems evolved after 5G, non-terrestrial network (NTN) systems such as inter-satellite communications and satellite communications. Satellite communication systems include satellite base stations and terminal equipment. Satellite base stations provide communication services to terminal devices. Satellite base stations can also communicate with ground base stations. Satellites can serve as base stations and terminal equipment. Among them, satellites can refer to non-ground base stations or non-ground equipment such as UAVs, hot air balloons, low-orbit satellites, medium-orbit satellites, and high-orbit satellites.
本申请实施例的技术方案对于同构网络与异构网络的场景均适用,同时对于传输点也无限制,可以是宏基站与宏基站、微基站与微基站和宏基站与微基站之间的多点协同传输,对FDD/TDD系统均适用。本申请实施例的技术方案不仅适用于低频场景(sub 6G),也适用于高频场景(6GHz以上),太赫兹,光通信等。本申请实施例的技术方案不仅可以适用于网络设备和终端的通信,也可以适用于网络设备和网络设备的通信,终端和终端的通信,车联网,物联网,工业互联网等的通信。The technical solutions of the embodiments of this application are applicable to both homogeneous and heterogeneous network scenarios. At the same time, there are no restrictions on transmission points. They can be between macro base stations and macro base stations, micro base stations and micro base stations, or macro base stations and micro base stations. Multi-point coordinated transmission is applicable to FDD/TDD systems. The technical solutions of the embodiments of this application are not only applicable to low-frequency scenarios (sub 6G), but also to high-frequency scenarios (above 6GHz), terahertz, optical communications, etc. The technical solutions of the embodiments of this application can be applied not only to the communication between network equipment and terminals, but also to the communication between network equipment and network equipment, the communication between terminals, the Internet of Vehicles, the Internet of Things, the Industrial Internet, etc.
本申请实施例的技术方案也可以应用于终端与单个基站连接的场景,其中,终端所连接的基站以及基站所连接的核心网(core network,CN)为相同制式。比如CN为5G Core,基站对应的为5G基站,5G基站直接连接5G Core;或者CN为6G Core,基站为6G基站,6G基站直接连接6G Core。本申请实施例的技术方案也可以适用于终端与至少两个基站连接的双连接(dual connectivity,DC)场景。The technical solution of the embodiment of the present application can also be applied to a scenario where a terminal is connected to a single base station, where the base station to which the terminal is connected and the core network (core network, CN) to which the base station is connected are of the same standard. For example, if CN is 5G Core, the base station corresponds to 5G base station, and 5G base station is directly connected to 5G Core; or if CN is 6G Core, the base station is 6G base station, and 6G base station is directly connected to 6G Core. The technical solution of the embodiment of the present application can also be applied to a dual connectivity (DC) scenario in which a terminal is connected to at least two base stations.
本申请实施例的技术方案也可以使用通信网络中不同形态的基站组成的宏微场景,例如,基站可以是卫星、空中气球站、无人机站点等。本申请实施例的技术方案也适合于同时存在广覆盖基站和小覆盖基站的场景。The technical solutions of the embodiments of this application can also use macro and micro scenarios composed of different forms of base stations in the communication network. For example, the base stations can be satellites, aerial balloon stations, drone stations, etc. The technical solutions of the embodiments of this application are also suitable for scenarios in which wide-coverage base stations and small-coverage base stations coexist.
还可以理解的是,本申请实施例的技术方案还可以应用于5.5G、6G及以后的无线通信系统,适用场景包括但不限于地面蜂窝通信、NTN、卫星通信、高空通信平台(high altitude platform station,HAPS)通信、车辆外联(vehicle-to-everything,V2X)、接入回传一体化(integrated access and backhaul,IAB),以及可重构智能表面(reconfigurable intelligent surface,RIS)通信等场景。It can also be understood that the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to 5.5G, 6G and later wireless communication systems. Applicable scenarios include but are not limited to terrestrial cellular communication, NTN, satellite communication, and high altitude communication platform (high altitude platform). station (HAPS) communication, vehicle-to-everything (V2X), integrated access and backhaul (IAB), and reconfigurable intelligent surface (RIS) communication and other scenarios .
本申请实施例中的终端可以是一种具有无线收发功能的设备,具体可以指用户设备(user equipment,UE)、接入终端、用户单元(subscriber unit)、用户站、移动台(mobile station)、远方站、远程终 端、移动设备、用户终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。终端设备还可以是卫星电话、蜂窝电话、智能手机、无线数据卡、无线调制解调器、机器类型通信设备、可以是无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、客户终端设备(customer-premises equipment,CPE)、智能销售点(point of sale,POS)机、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、高空飞机上搭载的通信设备、可穿戴设备、无人机、机器人、设备到设备通信(device-to-device,D2D)中的终端、V2X中的终端、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端或者5G之后演进的通信网络中的终端设备等,本申请实施例不作限制。The terminal in the embodiment of the present application may be a device with wireless transceiver functions, and may specifically refer to user equipment (UE), access terminal, subscriber unit (subscriber unit), user station, or mobile station (mobile station). , remote station, remote terminal terminal, mobile device, user terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user device. The terminal device may also be a satellite phone, a cellular phone, a smartphone, a wireless data card, a wireless modem, a machine type communications device, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (wireless local loop, WLL) station, personal digital assistant (PDA), customer-premises equipment (CPE), intelligent point of sale (POS) machine, handheld device with wireless communication function, computing Equipment or other processing equipment connected to wireless modems, vehicle-mounted equipment, communication equipment carried on high-altitude aircraft, wearable devices, drones, robots, terminals in device-to-device (D2D) communication, V2X Terminals in virtual reality (VR) terminal equipment, augmented reality (AR) terminal equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control (industrial control), wireless terminals in self-driving (self driving), remote Wireless terminals in remote medical, wireless terminals in smart grid, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart city, and smart home Wireless terminals or terminal equipment in communication networks evolved after 5G, etc. are not limited by the embodiments of this application.
本申请实施例中用于实现终端设备的功能的装置可以是终端设备;也可以是能够支持终端设备实现该功能的装置,例如芯片系统。该装置可以被安装在终端设备中或者和终端设备匹配使用。本申请实施例中,芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。The device used to implement the functions of the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application may be a terminal device; it may also be a device that can support the terminal device to implement the function, such as a chip system. The device can be installed in a terminal device or used in conjunction with the terminal device. In the embodiments of this application, the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
本申请实施例中的网络设备具有无线收发功能的设备,用于与终端设备进行通信。接入网设备可以为无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)中的节点,又可以称为基站,还可以称为RAN节点。可以是LTE中的演进型基站(evolved Node B,eNB或eNodeB);或者gNodeB(gNB)等5G网络中的基站或者5G之后演进的公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的基站,宽带网络业务网关(broadband network gateway,BNG),汇聚交换机或者第三代合作伙伴项目(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)接入设备等。The network device in the embodiment of the present application has a wireless transceiver function and is used to communicate with the terminal device. The access network equipment can be a node in the radio access network (radio access network, RAN), and can also be called a base station or a RAN node. It can be an evolved base station (evolved Node B, eNB or eNodeB) in LTE; or a base station in a 5G network such as gNodeB (gNB) or a base station in a public land mobile network (public land mobile network, PLMN) evolved after 5G. Broadband network gateway (BNG), aggregation switch or 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) access equipment, etc.
本申请实施例中的网络设备还可以包括各种形式的基站,例如:宏基站、微基站(也称为小站)、中继站、传输点(transmitting and receiving point,TRP)、发射点(transmitting point,TP)、移动交换中心以及设备到设备(device-to-device,D2D)、车辆外联(vehicle-to-everything,V2X)、机器到机器(machine-to-machine,M2M)通信中承担基站功能的设备等,还可以包括云接入网(cloud radio access network,C-RAN)系统中的集中式单元(centralized unit,CU)和分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)、NTN通信系统中的网络设备,本申请实施例不作具体限定。The network equipment in the embodiment of the present application may also include various forms of base stations, such as: macro base stations, micro base stations (also called small stations), relay stations, transmission points (transmitting and receiving point, TRP), transmitting points , TP), mobile switching center and base station responsible for device-to-device (D2D), vehicle outreach (vehicle-to-everything, V2X), machine-to-machine (M2M) communications Functional equipment, etc., can also include centralized units (CU) and distributed units (DU) in cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, C-RAN) systems, and NTN communication systems. Network equipment is not specifically limited in the embodiments of this application.
本申请实施例中用于实现网络设备的功能的装置可以是网络设备,也可以是能够支持网络设备实现该功能的装置,例如芯片系统。该装置可以被安装在网络设备中或者和网络设备匹配使用。本申请实施例中的芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。The device used to implement the function of the network device in the embodiment of the present application may be a network device, or may be a device that can support the network device to implement the function, such as a chip system. The device can be installed in a network device or used in conjunction with a network device. The chip system in the embodiment of the present application may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
另外,本申请实施例中的中继设备具有信号转发功能,可以对信号进行放大,例如中继器。另外,中继设备还可以对信号的载波频率进行搬移,或者还可以将信号解调后重新调制再转发,或者还可以将信号降噪后再转发。因此中继可以是如下任意一种形式:放大转发、解调转发、移频转发、降噪转发。此外,中继还有另外的一种形态,称为反射器,或者称为反射面,或者其它可能称号:智能反射面(intelligent reflecting surface),反射阵列,智能反射阵列(intelligent reflecting array),反射器,智能反射器,反射设备(backscatter device),无源设备(passive device),半有源设备(semi-passive device),散射信号设备(ambient signal device)。中继设备还可以被认为是一种特殊形态的终端设备。如果考虑网络侧对中继设备的控制能力,可以分为非智能中继设备、智能中继设备;或者可以分为非网络控制中继设备(uncontrolled repeater)、网络控制中继设备(network controlled repeater,NetConRepeater或NCR)。网络设备可以控制中继设备进行更多增强性能的功能,例如,中继发送功率控制、中继放大增益控制、中继波束扫描控制、中继预编码控制、通断控制、上/下行转发控制中的至少一项。In addition, the relay device in the embodiment of the present application has a signal forwarding function and can amplify the signal, such as a repeater. In addition, the relay equipment can also move the carrier frequency of the signal, or it can demodulate the signal and then re-modulate it and then forward it, or it can also reduce the noise of the signal and then forward it. Therefore, relaying can be in any of the following forms: amplification forwarding, demodulation forwarding, frequency shift forwarding, or noise reduction forwarding. In addition, there is another form of relay, called a reflector, or a reflecting surface, or other possible names: intelligent reflecting surface, reflective array, intelligent reflecting array, reflective Reflector, smart reflector, reflective device (backscatter device), passive device (passive device), semi-active device (semi-passive device), scattered signal device (ambient signal device). Relay equipment can also be considered as a special form of terminal equipment. If the network side's ability to control relay equipment is considered, it can be divided into non-intelligent relay equipment and intelligent relay equipment; or it can be divided into uncontrolled repeater equipment and network controlled repeater equipment. , NetConRepeater or NCR). Network equipment can control relay equipment to perform more performance-enhancing functions, such as relay transmit power control, relay amplification gain control, relay beam scanning control, relay precoding control, on/off control, and uplink/downlink forwarding control. at least one of them.
中继设备在逻辑上包含多个部分,有信号收发单元、控制器、信号放大器等一个或者多个,用于实现与网络设备和终端设备的通信和信令交互、信号放大等。中继设备的控制器也称为移动终端(mobile terminal,MT)、或者终端(terminal)、或者固定终端(fixed terminal,FT),其它部分框图可以构成无线射频单元(radio unit,RU)(还可以称为或者DU、或者分布式射频单元(distributed radio unit,DRU)等)。Relay equipment logically contains multiple parts, including one or more signal transceiver units, controllers, signal amplifiers, etc., which are used to implement communication and signaling interaction, signal amplification, etc. with network equipment and terminal equipment. The controller of the relay device is also called a mobile terminal (MT), terminal, or fixed terminal (FT). Other block diagrams can constitute a radio unit (RU) (also known as a radio unit (RU)). It can be called either DU, distributed radio unit (distributed radio unit, DRU), etc.).
例如下行通信时,其中一个信号收发单元用于接收网络设备的信号,另外一个信号收发单元用于把放大后的接收信号转发给终端设备。控制器还可以借助信号收发单元与网络设备或终端设备进行通 信。例如,控制器通过信号收发单元与网络设备通信,用于中继设备与网络设备之间建立通信链路以及波束对准等,还可以用于接收网络设备的配置/指示信息,从而方便网络设备控制中继设备的工作时间、工作状态、或工作方式等。或者用于接收终端设备的触发信号,从而使得中继设备根据需要进入相应的工作模式。再例如,控制器还能够根据网络设备指示信息或者自身测量信息,确定信号放大器的工作状态(例如放大倍数、相位)。其中,各个单元可以是一个或者多个。例如信号放大器是多个,分别对应不同的极化方向或者中继无线射频通道。For example, during downlink communication, one of the signal transceiver units is used to receive signals from network equipment, and the other signal transceiver unit is used to forward the amplified received signals to the terminal equipment. The controller can also communicate with network equipment or terminal equipment with the help of signal transceiver units. letter. For example, the controller communicates with network equipment through the signal transceiver unit, which is used to establish communication links and beam alignment between relay equipment and network equipment. It can also be used to receive configuration/instruction information of network equipment, thereby facilitating network equipment. Control the working time, working status, or working mode of relay equipment. Or it is used to receive the trigger signal of the terminal device, so that the relay device enters the corresponding working mode as needed. For another example, the controller can also determine the working status (such as amplification factor and phase) of the signal amplifier based on the network device indication information or its own measurement information. Each unit may be one or more. For example, there are multiple signal amplifiers, corresponding to different polarization directions or relay wireless radio frequency channels.
在无线通信系统中,波束成型技术能够将传输信号的能量限制在某个波束方向内,以此增加信号的发送和接收的效率。在采用波束成型技术的通信网络中,首先需要将发送波束/接收波束与无线信道进行匹配,使得接收波束获得来自发送波束比较好的信号质量,从而完成发送波束/接收波束和无线信道之间的匹配,这通常由波束扫描来完成。In wireless communication systems, beamforming technology can limit the energy of transmitted signals to a certain beam direction, thereby increasing the efficiency of signal transmission and reception. In a communication network using beamforming technology, it is first necessary to match the transmit beam/receive beam with the wireless channel so that the receive beam obtains better signal quality from the transmit beam, thereby completing the transmission beam/receive beam and the wireless channel. Matching, which is usually done by beam scanning.
图1是现有的通信系统100的示意图。图1的(a)示出了网络设备110的波束扫描过程。图1的(b)示出了终端设备120的波束扫描过程。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an existing communication system 100. (a) of FIG. 1 shows the beam scanning process of the network device 110. (b) of FIG. 1 shows the beam scanning process of the terminal device 120.
具体地,网络设备110的发送波束扫描时,终端设备120固定接收波束,网络设备110通过多个发送波束分别向终端设备120发送参考信号,并由终端设备120进行测量,从而完成网络设备的发送波束和无线信道之间的匹配。网络设备110的接收波束扫描时,终端设备120固定发送波束,网络设备110通过多个接收波束接收终端设备120发送的参考信号,并进行测量,从而完成网络设备的接收波束和无线信道之间的匹配。Specifically, when the network device 110 scans the transmit beam, the terminal device 120 fixes the receiving beam. The network device 110 sends reference signals to the terminal device 120 through multiple transmit beams, and the terminal device 120 performs measurements, thereby completing the transmission of the network device. Matching between beams and wireless channels. When the receive beam of the network device 110 is scanned, the terminal device 120 fixes the transmit beam. The network device 110 receives the reference signal sent by the terminal device 120 through multiple receive beams and performs measurements, thereby completing the connection between the receive beam of the network device and the wireless channel. match.
具体地,终端设备120的接收波束扫描时,网络设备110固定发送波束,终端设备120通过多个接收波束接收网络设备110发送的参考信号,并进行测量,从而完成终端设备的接收波束和无线信道之间的匹配。终端设备120的发送波束扫描时,网络设备110固定接收波束,终端设备120通过多个发送波束向网络设备110发送参考信号,并由网络设备110进行测量,从而完成终端设备的发送波束和无线信道之间的匹配。Specifically, when the receiving beam of the terminal device 120 is scanned, the network device 110 fixes the transmitting beam. The terminal device 120 receives the reference signal sent by the network device 110 through multiple receiving beams and performs measurements, thereby completing the receiving beam and wireless channel of the terminal device. match between. When the terminal device 120 scans the transmit beam, the network device 110 fixes the receive beam. The terminal device 120 sends a reference signal to the network device 110 through multiple transmit beams, and the network device 110 performs measurements, thereby completing the transmit beam and wireless channel of the terminal device. match between.
网络设备110与终端设备120之间的距离较远时,两者之间可能存在阻挡、阴影等高损耗因素,终端设备120无法与网络设备110直接进行通信。可以通过中继设备130辅助网络设备110和终端设备120的通信。加入中继设备130的通信系统如图2所示。When the distance between the network device 110 and the terminal device 120 is relatively long, high loss factors such as obstruction and shadow may exist between the two, and the terminal device 120 cannot directly communicate with the network device 110 . Communication between the network device 110 and the terminal device 120 may be assisted by the relay device 130 . The communication system incorporating the relay device 130 is shown in Figure 2 .
图2是本申请实施例的适应通信系统200的示意图。如图2中的(a)所示,中继设备130由两个部分组成:控制模块1301(也可以为控制器)与转发模块1302(也可以为转发链路)。控制模块1301与网络设备110进行通信,其通信的链路为控制链路(control link)。转发模块1302与网络设备110以及终端设备120进行通信,其与网络设备110进行通信的链路为回传链路(backhaul link),与终端设备120进行通信的链路为接入链路(access link)。如图2中的(b)所示,中继设备130(为反射面)有两个天线面板(或者,两个天线)。第一个天线面板(或第一天线)用于控制模块1301与网络设备110进行通信(该天线面板称为控制模块1301的天线面板,或该天线称为控制模块1301的天线);第二个天线面板(或第二天线)用于辅助终端设备120与网络设备110通信。其中,第二天线可以用于反射信号。在反射信号时,信号入射方向和出射方向分别对应两个波束。Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of an adaptive communication system 200 according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in (a) of Figure 2 , the relay device 130 consists of two parts: a control module 1301 (which can also be a controller) and a forwarding module 1302 (which can also be a forwarding link). The control module 1301 communicates with the network device 110, and the communication link is a control link. The forwarding module 1302 communicates with the network device 110 and the terminal device 120. The link it uses to communicate with the network device 110 is a backhaul link, and the link it uses to communicate with the terminal device 120 is an access link. link). As shown in (b) of FIG. 2 , the relay device 130 (which is a reflective surface) has two antenna panels (or, two antennas). The first antenna panel (or first antenna) is used for the control module 1301 to communicate with the network device 110 (the antenna panel is called the antenna panel of the control module 1301, or the antenna is called the antenna of the control module 1301); the second The antenna panel (or second antenna) is used to assist the terminal device 120 in communicating with the network device 110 . Among them, the second antenna can be used to reflect the signal. When reflecting a signal, the incident direction and the emitting direction of the signal correspond to two beams respectively.
进一步地,中继设备130中与网络设备110相对的方向称为回传链路波束方向,与终端设备120相对的方向称为接入链路波束方向。其中,回传链路波束方向可以对应中继设备130的权值#A(为泛指)中的第一分量,接入链路波束方向可以对应中继设备130的权值#A的第二分量,权值#A可以同时对应回传链路方向与接入链路方向。中继设备130的每个天线面板可以由多个(包括两个以及两个以上)天线构成,单个天线面板可以形成波束。中继设备130的转发模块1302通过对入射信号的反射,并控制天线对信号的反射(反射相位,或者反射权值),来实现辅助终端设备120和网络设备110之间的信号传输。尤其是,反射权值对应的波束,分别与网络设备的波束和终端设备的波束匹配后,可以获得比较好的传输性能。Further, the direction in the relay device 130 opposite to the network device 110 is called the backhaul link beam direction, and the direction opposite to the terminal device 120 is called the access link beam direction. Among them, the backhaul link beam direction may correspond to the first component of the weight #A (generally referred to) of the relay device 130, and the access link beam direction may correspond to the second component of the weight #A of the relay device 130. Component, weight #A can correspond to both the return link direction and the access link direction. Each antenna panel of the relay device 130 may be composed of multiple (including two or more) antennas, and a single antenna panel may form a beam. The forwarding module 1302 of the relay device 130 realizes signal transmission between the auxiliary terminal device 120 and the network device 110 by reflecting the incident signal and controlling the antenna's reflection of the signal (reflection phase, or reflection weight). In particular, after the beam corresponding to the reflection weight is matched with the beam of the network device and the beam of the terminal device respectively, better transmission performance can be obtained.
反射面的工作原理可以参见图3。如图3所示,阵子n的权值un满足如下:
The working principle of the reflective surface can be seen in Figure 3. As shown in Figure 3, the weight u n of array n satisfies the following:
或者权值的相位满足如下:
Or the phase of the weight satisfies the following:
具体来说,且当信号从回传链路角度入射时,反射面(为中继设备130)会将信号从接入链路角度反射出去。对于下行通信,信号从回传链路角度入射,从接入链路角度出射,以辅助网络设备110和终端设备120之间的通信。反之,则从接入链路角度入射,从回传链路角度出射。为便于描述,可以将反射面的权值对应的相位写成φ=[φ01,…,φN-1],其中,N为反射面的总阵子数量。Specifically, and when the signal is viewed from the backhaul link perspective When incident, the reflective surface (which is the relay device 130) will deflect the signal from the access link angle. Reflected out. For downlink communication, signals are incident from the angle of the backhaul link and emitted from the angle of the access link to assist communication between the network device 110 and the terminal device 120 . On the contrary, from the perspective of the access link Incidence, from the backhaul link perspective Shoot out. For ease of description, the phase corresponding to the weight of the reflective surface can be written as φ = [φ 0 , φ 1 ,..., φ N-1 ], where N is the total number of arrays on the reflective surface.
根据以上反射面的工作原理,本申请实施例以相位为主来讨论:可以将反射面的权值对应的相位φ拆分成两部分:回传链路分量φBH和接入链路分量φAC,使得:
Based on the working principle of the above reflective surface, the embodiment of this application focuses on the phase discussion: the phase φ corresponding to the weight of the reflective surface can be split into two parts: the backhaul link component φ BH and the access link component φ AC , such that:
其中“+”表示向量求和,即其中,φBH和φAC(和/或对应的权值)还可以分别基于离散傅里叶变化(discrete fourier transform,DFT)的方式进行设计,本申请实施例不作限定。where "+" represents vector summation, that is Among them, φ BH and φ AC (and/or the corresponding weights) can also be designed based on discrete Fourier transform (discrete fourier transform, DFT) respectively, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
如图2中的(c)所示,中继设备130有三个天线面板(或者,三个天线),其中第一个天线面板(或第一天线)用于中继设备130与网络设备110通信(该天线面板称为回传链路天线面板,或该天线称为回传链路天线),第二个天线面板(或第二天线)用于中继设备130与终端设备120通信(该天线面板称为接入链路天线面板,或该天线称为接入链路天线),第三个天线面板(或第三天线)用于中继设备130的控制模块1301与网络设备110进行通信(该天线面板称为控制模块1301的天线面板,或该天线称为控制模块1301的天线);且第一天线和第二天线同时工作,实现信号接收、放大、转发功能。中继设备130的每个天线面板,可以由多个(包括两个以及两个以上)天线构成,单个天线面板可以形成波束。中继设备130的回传链路波束将来自网络设备110的信号放大后,经由接入链路波束将该放大后的信号转发至终端设备120,在中继设备130的接入链路波束转发信号时,需要将该波束对准终端设备120,以获得比较好的传输性能。As shown in (c) of Figure 2 , the relay device 130 has three antenna panels (or three antennas), where the first antenna panel (or the first antenna) is used for the relay device 130 to communicate with the network device 110 (This antenna panel is called a backhaul link antenna panel, or this antenna is called a backhaul link antenna). The second antenna panel (or second antenna) is used for the relay device 130 to communicate with the terminal device 120 (the antenna The third antenna panel (or the third antenna) is used for the control module 1301 of the relay device 130 to communicate with the network device 110 ( The antenna panel is called the antenna panel of the control module 1301, or the antenna is called the antenna of the control module 1301); and the first antenna and the second antenna work simultaneously to realize signal reception, amplification, and forwarding functions. Each antenna panel of the relay device 130 may be composed of multiple (including two or more) antennas, and a single antenna panel may form a beam. After the backhaul link beam of the relay device 130 amplifies the signal from the network device 110, the amplified signal is forwarded to the terminal device 120 via the access link beam, where it is forwarded by the access link beam of the relay device 130. When receiving a signal, the beam needs to be aimed at the terminal device 120 to obtain better transmission performance.
其中,接入链路指中继设备辅助信号传输的过程中面向子级节点的链路。例如,中继设备和终端设备之间的链路。接入链路波束指中继设备和终端设备之间通信的波束,接入链路接收波束指中继设备用于接收来自终端设备的信号的波束,接入链路发送波束指中继设备向终端设备发送信号时使用的波束。回传链路指中继设备辅助信号传输的过程中面向父级节点的链路。例如,中继设备与网络之间的链路。回传链路波束指中继设备和网络设备之间通信的波束,回传链路接收波束指中继设备用于接收来自网络设备的信号的波束,回传链路发送波束指中继设备向网络设备发送信号时使用的波束。Among them, the access link refers to the link facing the sub-level nodes in the process of auxiliary signal transmission by the relay device. For example, a link between a relay device and an end device. The access link beam refers to the beam used for communication between the relay device and the terminal device. The access link receiving beam refers to the beam used by the relay device to receive signals from the terminal device. The access link transmit beam refers to the beam used by the relay device to send signals to the terminal device. The beam used by an end device to send signals. The backhaul link refers to the link facing the parent node during the auxiliary signal transmission process of the relay device. For example, the link between a relay device and the network. The backhaul link beam refers to the beam used for communication between the relay device and the network device. The backhaul link receiving beam refers to the beam used by the relay device to receive signals from the network device. The backhaul link transmit beam refers to the relay device transmitting beam to the network device. The beams used by network devices to send signals.
中继设备130可以包括放大转发中继设备,也可以包括反射面。例如,以下行传输为例,网络设备110发送信号到反射面(称为回传链路),反射面将信号反射到终端设备120(称为接入链路),从而打通终端设备和网络设备之间的信号链路。反射面通常由大规模天线构成,不同天线对信号的反射可以不同。通过调整各个天线的反射因子,使得反射面的回传链路形成窄波束,接入链路也形成窄波束,分别对准网络设备120的方向以及终端设备120的方向,从而更好地将网络设备发送的信号反射到终端设备。本申请实施例以中继设备130为例进行描述,中继设备130包括反射面和放大转发中继设备。The relay device 130 may include an amplification and forwarding relay device, and may also include a reflective surface. For example, taking downlink transmission as an example, the network device 110 sends a signal to a reflective surface (called a return link), and the reflective surface reflects the signal to the terminal device 120 (called an access link), thereby opening up the terminal device and the network device. signal link between them. The reflective surface is usually composed of a large-scale antenna, and different antennas can reflect signals differently. By adjusting the reflection factor of each antenna, the backhaul link on the reflective surface forms a narrow beam, and the access link also forms a narrow beam, which are respectively aligned with the direction of the network device 120 and the direction of the terminal device 120, thereby better integrating the network. The signal sent by the device is reflected to the end device. The embodiment of this application is described by taking the relay device 130 as an example. The relay device 130 includes a reflective surface and an amplification and forwarding relay device.
中继设备130辅助网络设备110与终端设备120进行通信的过程中,中继设备130的回传链路波束方向需要对准网络设备110。若中继设备130的回传链路波束方向与网络设备110之间没有对准,则可能无法很好地接收网络设备110发送的信号,继而无法很好地将网络设备110的信号转发给终端设备130。但是现有的网络设备110和终端设备120之间的波束管理主要为了方便终端设备120连接网络设备110,并没有考虑加入中继设备130之后,如何调整中继设备130的波束方向,使得中继设备130能够更好地辅助网络设备110与终端设备120之间的通信的问题。When the relay device 130 assists the network device 110 in communicating with the terminal device 120, the beam direction of the backhaul link of the relay device 130 needs to be aligned with the network device 110. If the beam direction of the backhaul link of the relay device 130 is not aligned with the network device 110, the signal sent by the network device 110 may not be received well, and the signal from the network device 110 may not be forwarded to the terminal well. Device 130. However, the existing beam management between the network device 110 and the terminal device 120 is mainly to facilitate the terminal device 120 to connect to the network device 110, and does not consider how to adjust the beam direction of the relay device 130 after adding the relay device 130, so that the relay The device 130 can better assist communication problems between the network device 110 and the terminal device 120 .
具体来说,中继设备130的回传链路波束方向与网络设备110是否对准直接关系到中继设备130 的接入链路波束的指向是否准确,即中继设备130的回传链路波束方向的偏差会导致中继设备130的接入链路波束方向的偏移,这会使得中继设备130的接入链路的实际覆盖区域与网络中的信号盲区或弱区不匹配。因此,需要使得中继设备130的回传链路波束方向对准网络设备110。Specifically, whether the backhaul link beam direction of the relay device 130 is aligned with the network device 110 is directly related to the relay device 130 Whether the access link beam direction is accurate, that is, the deviation of the backhaul link beam direction of the relay device 130 will cause the access link beam direction of the relay device 130 to deflect, which will cause the relay device 130 to The actual coverage area of the access link does not match the signal blind area or weak area in the network. Therefore, it is necessary to align the backhaul link beam direction of the relay device 130 with the network device 110 .
鉴于上述技术问题,本申请提供一种波束管理的方法、通信装置以及通信系统,能够实现中继设备的波束方向对准网络设备,从而使得中继设备能够更好的辅助网络设备与终端设备之间的通信。In view of the above technical problems, this application provides a beam management method, communication device and communication system, which can realize the beam direction alignment of the relay equipment and the network equipment, so that the relay equipment can better assist the network equipment and the terminal equipment. communication between.
下文将结合附图对本申请实施例的波束管理的方法、通信装置以及通信系统进行描述。应理解,图4所示的流程图中并不是每个步骤都是必须的,且步骤之间的先后顺序不限定。在此做统一说明,后文不再赘述。The beam management method, communication device and communication system according to the embodiments of the present application will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. It should be understood that not every step in the flowchart shown in Figure 4 is necessary, and the order between steps is not limited. A unified explanation is given here and will not be repeated in the following paragraphs.
应理解,全文所使用的回传链路与接入链路等也可以为回传侧与接入侧,或者其他类似的词汇,其用于区分中继设备的不同方向,即:回传链路或者回传侧用于指示中继设备与网络设备之间的相对方向;接入链路或者接入侧用于指示中继设备与终端设备之间的相对方向,在此做统一说明,后文不再赘述。It should be understood that the backhaul link and access link used throughout this article can also be backhaul side and access side, or other similar terms, which are used to distinguish different directions of relay equipment, that is: backhaul chain The path or backhaul side is used to indicate the relative direction between the relay device and the network device; the access link or access side is used to indicate the relative direction between the relay device and the terminal device. A unified explanation is given here. The article will not go into details.
图4是本申请实施例的波束管理的方法400的交互流程图。图4中的方法流程可以由中继设备130与网络设备110执行,或者由安装于中继设备130与网络设备110中的具有相应功能的模块和/或器件(例如,芯片或集成电路等)执行,本申请不限定。下文以中继设备130与网络设备110为例进行说明。波束管理的方法400的执行主体为中继设备130与网络设备110。如图4所示,波束管理的方法400包括:Figure 4 is an interactive flow chart of the beam management method 400 according to the embodiment of the present application. The method flow in Figure 4 can be executed by the relay device 130 and the network device 110, or by modules and/or devices (for example, chips or integrated circuits, etc.) with corresponding functions installed in the relay device 130 and the network device 110. Execution is not limited by this application. The following description takes the relay device 130 and the network device 110 as examples. The execution subjects of the beam management method 400 are the relay device 130 and the network device 110 . As shown in Figure 4, the beam management method 400 includes:
S410、中继设备130向网络设备110发送波束信息W1。S410. The relay device 130 sends the beam information W1 to the network device 110.
相应地,网络设备130接收来自中继设备130发送的波束信息W1。Correspondingly, the network device 130 receives the beam information W1 sent from the relay device 130 .
具体而言,中继设备130向网络设备110发送的波束信息W1可以是由中继设备130的控制模块1301确定的。其中,控制模块1301又可以称为控制器、移动终端、终端(terminal)或者固定终端中的任意一种,本申请实施例不限定。Specifically, the beam information W1 sent by the relay device 130 to the network device 110 may be determined by the control module 1301 of the relay device 130 . Among them, the control module 1301 can also be called any one of a controller, a mobile terminal, a terminal or a fixed terminal, which is not limited by the embodiments of this application.
为了实现中继设备130辅助网络设备110与终端设备130进行通信,中继设备130首先需要接入网络设备110。在接入过程中,中继设备130与网络设备110可以建立连接关系。在接入过程中,控制模块1301确定网络设备110与中继设备130之间的波束方向信息。该波束方向信息可以视为网络设备110与中继设备130之间的初始波束方向信息。该波束方向信息可以为实现中继设备130的回传链路波束方向对准网络设备110提供参考,具体将在下文描述。In order for the relay device 130 to assist the network device 110 in communicating with the terminal device 130, the relay device 130 first needs to access the network device 110. During the access process, the relay device 130 and the network device 110 may establish a connection relationship. During the access process, the control module 1301 determines the beam direction information between the network device 110 and the relay device 130. The beam direction information can be regarded as the initial beam direction information between the network device 110 and the relay device 130 . The beam direction information may provide a reference for realizing the beam direction alignment of the backhaul link of the relay device 130 to the network device 110, which will be described in detail below.
控制模块1301具有天线阵列,控制模块1301的天线阵列与转发模块1302用于辅助网络设备110与终端设备120进行通信的天线阵列之间存在关联关系。例如,控制模块1301的天线阵列可以是独立的,也可以是与转发模块1302共享的。若控制模块1301的天线阵列是独立的,控制模块1301的天线阵列能够用于控制转发模块1302的天线阵列。又例如,控制模块1301的天线阵列的数量与转发模块1302的天线阵列的数量存在关联。The control module 1301 has an antenna array, and there is an associated relationship between the antenna array of the control module 1301 and the antenna array used by the forwarding module 1302 to assist the network device 110 in communicating with the terminal device 120 . For example, the antenna array of the control module 1301 may be independent or shared with the forwarding module 1302. If the antenna array of the control module 1301 is independent, the antenna array of the control module 1301 can be used to control the antenna array of the forwarding module 1302. For another example, there is a correlation between the number of antenna arrays of the control module 1301 and the number of antenna arrays of the forwarding module 1302.
换句话说,中继设备130是反射面时,控制模块1301的天线阵列与反射面的天线阵列不相同;中继设备130是放大转发中继设备时,控制模块1301和转发模块可以共用天线阵列,也可以不共用天线阵列(例如,采取更加简单的控制器)。In other words, when the relay device 130 is a reflective surface, the antenna array of the control module 1301 is different from the antenna array of the reflective surface; when the relay device 130 is an amplification and forwarding relay device, the control module 1301 and the forwarding module can share the antenna array. , it is also possible not to share the antenna array (for example, adopt a simpler controller).
示例性地,控制模块1301的天线阵列满足m×n,转发模块1302的天线阵列满足(m*X)×(n*Y)。其中,转发模块1302的天线阵列的数量在水平方向是控制模块1301的天线阵列的X倍,在垂直方向是控制模块1301的天线阵列的Y倍。For example, the antenna array of the control module 1301 satisfies m×n, and the antenna array of the forwarding module 1302 satisfies (m*X)×(n*Y). The number of antenna arrays of the forwarding module 1302 is X times that of the antenna array of the control module 1301 in the horizontal direction, and Y times that of the antenna array of the control module 1301 in the vertical direction.
具体的说,控制模块1301确定的波束信息W1可以是通过现有的波束扫描方法确定的。例如,通过下行方式时,网络设备110通过中继设备130向终端设备120发送参考信号,终端设备120测量该参考信号,并向网络设备110上报该参考信号的测量结果,网络设备110根据该测量结果确定用于传输该参考信号的波束是否合适,若不合适,则重新调整波束,并重复该过程;若合适,则确定该波束为网络设备110与中继设备130之间的初始波束;通过上行方式时,终端设备120通过中继设备130向网络设备110发送参考信号,网络设备110测量该参考信号,并确定该参考信号的测量结果,若不合适,则重新调整波束,并重复该过程;若合适,则确定该波束为网络设备110与中继设备130之间的初始波束。 Specifically, the beam information W1 determined by the control module 1301 may be determined by an existing beam scanning method. For example, in the downlink mode, the network device 110 sends a reference signal to the terminal device 120 through the relay device 130. The terminal device 120 measures the reference signal and reports the measurement result of the reference signal to the network device 110. The network device 110 performs the measurement according to the measurement result. As a result, it is determined whether the beam used to transmit the reference signal is suitable. If it is not suitable, the beam is readjusted and the process is repeated; if it is suitable, the beam is determined to be the initial beam between the network device 110 and the relay device 130; by In the uplink mode, the terminal device 120 sends a reference signal to the network device 110 through the relay device 130. The network device 110 measures the reference signal and determines the measurement result of the reference signal. If it is inappropriate, it re-adjusts the beam and repeats the process. ; If appropriate, determine the beam to be the initial beam between the network device 110 and the relay device 130 .
综上,控制模块1301可以确定中继设备130与网络设备110之间的初始波束方向信息,并将其上报给网络设备110。In summary, the control module 1301 can determine the initial beam direction information between the relay device 130 and the network device 110 and report it to the network device 110 .
一个可能的实现方式,波束信息W1包括中继设备130与网络设备110之间的波束方向信息。In one possible implementation, the beam information W1 includes beam direction information between the relay device 130 and the network device 110 .
具体地,中继设备130与网络设备110之间的波束方向信息可以是指中继设备的回传链路波束方向信息,也可以是指网络设备的波束方向信息。其中,关于波束方向信息的具体描述可参见后续的关于波束信息W2的多层次的描述,在此不再赘述。Specifically, the beam direction information between the relay device 130 and the network device 110 may refer to the beam direction information of the backhaul link of the relay device, or may refer to the beam direction information of the network device. For detailed description of the beam direction information, please refer to the subsequent multi-level description of the beam information W2, which will not be described again here.
S420、网络设备110根据波束信息W1与波束信息W2确定波束集合Q1。S420. The network device 110 determines the beam set Q1 according to the beam information W1 and the beam information W2.
波束信息W2可以是中继设备130上报的,也可以是预配置的。例如,在部署中继设备130时,可以通过运行/维护手段将波束信息W2配置在网络设备110中。The beam information W2 may be reported by the relay device 130 or may be preconfigured. For example, when the relay device 130 is deployed, the beam information W2 may be configured in the network device 110 through operation/maintenance means.
一个可能的实现方式,波束信息W2可以包括如下至少一项:In a possible implementation, the beam information W2 may include at least one of the following:
波束或波束集合的数量信息;Information on the number of beams or sets of beams;
波束或波束集合的准共址信息;Quasi-co-location information for a beam or set of beams;
波束或波束集合的覆盖范围信息;Coverage information for a beam or set of beams;
波束之间,或波束集合之间的相对关系;The relative relationship between beams, or between sets of beams;
波束索引与权值之间的对应关系;Correspondence between beam index and weight;
波束索引与波束之间的对应关系;Correspondence between beam index and beam;
天线阵列信息;Antenna array information;
权值生成信息;以及,weight generation information; and,
天线信息。Antenna information.
天线信息可以包括转发模块1302的天线信息,也可以包括控制模块1301的天线信息。具体见下文描述,在此不多言。The antenna information may include the antenna information of the forwarding module 1302 or the antenna information of the control module 1301. See the description below for details, not much to say here.
应理解,波束信息W2是中继设备130的转发模块1302的信息。It should be understood that the beam information W2 is the information of the forwarding module 1302 of the relay device 130 .
可选地,波束信息W1与中继设备130的第一天线之间有关联关系,波束信息W2与中继设备130的第二天线之间有关联关系。Optionally, there is an association relationship between the beam information W1 and the first antenna of the relay device 130 , and there is an association relationship between the beam information W2 and the second antenna of the relay device 130 .
可选地,波束信息W1对应于中继设备130的第一天线,波束信息W2对应于中继设备130的第二天线。Optionally, the beam information W1 corresponds to the first antenna of the relay device 130, and the beam information W2 corresponds to the second antenna of the relay device 130.
可选地,第一天线对应于中继设备130的控制模块1301,第二天线对应于中继设备130的转发模块1302。Optionally, the first antenna corresponds to the control module 1301 of the relay device 130, and the second antenna corresponds to the forwarding module 1302 of the relay device 130.
可选地,第一天线属于中继设备130的控制模块1301,第二天线属于中继设备130的转发模块1302。其中,关于第一天线与第二天线的描述可以参考前述关于中继设备130的硬件设备的描述,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the first antenna belongs to the control module 1301 of the relay device 130, and the second antenna belongs to the forwarding module 1302 of the relay device 130. For the description of the first antenna and the second antenna, reference may be made to the foregoing description of the hardware device of the relay device 130 , which will not be described again here.
可选地,第一天线可以是上述所描述的控制模块1301的天线面板,第二天线也可以是上文所描述的转发模块1302的天线面板。其中,第一天线与第二天线可以是不相同的两个天线。Alternatively, the first antenna may be the antenna panel of the control module 1301 described above, and the second antenna may also be the antenna panel of the forwarding module 1302 described above. The first antenna and the second antenna may be two different antennas.
天线信息可以包括以下至少一项:天线数量、极化配置信息、天线排布等。The antenna information may include at least one of the following: number of antennas, polarization configuration information, antenna arrangement, etc.
可选地,天线信息还可以包括控制模块1301的天线阵列数量与转发模块1302的天线阵列数量之间的倍数差,例如,转发模块1302的天线阵列数量与控制模块1301的天线阵列数量在水平方向的比值;转发模块1302的天线阵列数量与控制模块1301的天线阵列数量在垂直方向的倍数差。Optionally, the antenna information may also include a multiple difference between the number of antenna arrays of the control module 1301 and the number of antenna arrays of the forwarding module 1302. For example, the number of antenna arrays of the forwarding module 1302 and the number of antenna arrays of the control module 1301 are in the horizontal direction. The ratio; the multiple difference in the vertical direction between the number of antenna arrays of the forwarding module 1302 and the number of antenna arrays of the control module 1301.
可选地,天线信息还可以包括控制模块1301的天线与转发模块1302的天线之间的夹角。具体可以参看图5。Optionally, the antenna information may also include the angle between the antenna of the control module 1301 and the antenna of the forwarding module 1302. Please refer to Figure 5 for details.
图5是控制模块的天线与转发模块的天线之间的关系示意图。如图5所示,转发模块1302的天线阵列为4×4,控制模块1301的天线阵列为2×2。其中,控制模块1301的天线与转发模块1302的天线的极化方向均为双极化方向。其中,乘号之前的数字表示水平方向(horizontal)的天线数量,乘号之后的数字表示垂直方向(vertical)的天线数量。控制模块1301的天线数量为4根天线,转发模块1302的天线数量为16根天线。在水平方向,转发模块1302的天线数量与MT的天线数量的比值为2。在垂直方向,转发模块1302的天线数量与MT的天线数量的比值为2。Figure 5 is a schematic diagram of the relationship between the antenna of the control module and the antenna of the forwarding module. As shown in Figure 5, the antenna array of the forwarding module 1302 is 4×4, and the antenna array of the control module 1301 is 2×2. Among them, the polarization directions of the antenna of the control module 1301 and the antenna of the forwarding module 1302 are both dual-polarization directions. Among them, the number before the multiplication sign represents the number of antennas in the horizontal direction (horizontal), and the number after the multiplication sign represents the number of antennas in the vertical direction (vertical). The number of antennas of the control module 1301 is 4 antennas, and the number of antennas of the forwarding module 1302 is 16 antennas. In the horizontal direction, the ratio of the number of antennas of the forwarding module 1302 to the number of antennas of the MT is 2. In the vertical direction, the ratio of the number of antennas of the forwarding module 1302 to the number of antennas of the MT is 2.
示例性地,控制模块1301的天线和转发模块1302的天线之间的夹角为0°(同方向)。 For example, the angle between the antenna of the control module 1301 and the antenna of the forwarding module 1302 is 0° (same direction).
网络设备110根据波束信息W1与波束信息W2确定的波束集合Q1可以包括中继设备130能够生成的所有波束,也可以包括中继设备130能够生成的所有波束中的部分波束。The beam set Q1 determined by the network device 110 based on the beam information W1 and the beam information W2 may include all beams that the relay device 130 can generate, or may include some beams among all the beams that the relay device 130 can generate.
控制模块1301的每个波束的宽度大于中继设备130的每个回传链路波束的宽度,以及,控制模块1301的波束方向对于确定中继设备130的回传链路波束方向有一定的参考作用。假设控制模块1301的天线阵列和转发模块1302的天线阵列在水平方向的阵子数量相差倍数为MH,在垂直方向的阵子数量相差倍数为MV,且二者的同极化方向朝向相同(如果有偏差,可以根据角度偏移补偿方位角度差)。The width of each beam of the control module 1301 is greater than the width of each backhaul link beam of the relay device 130, and the beam direction of the control module 1301 has a certain reference for determining the backhaul link beam direction of the relay device 130. effect. Assume that the antenna array of the control module 1301 and the antenna array of the forwarding module 1302 differ in the number of elements in the horizontal direction by M H , and the number of elements in the vertical direction differ by a multiple of M V , and the co-polarization directions of the two are in the same direction (if If there is a deviation, the azimuth angle difference can be compensated based on the angular offset).
网络设备110可以基于上述的控制模块1301的波束与转发模块1302的波束之间的关系进行确定波束集合Q1。The network device 110 may determine the beam set Q1 based on the above-mentioned relationship between the beams of the control module 1301 and the beams of the forwarding module 1302.
具体地,网络设备110可以根据控制模块1301的波束,分别获取转发模块1302水平方向的M'H个波束分量与垂直方向的M'V个波束分量,并根据这些波束分量进行波束管理。具体来说,控制模块1301的波束的宽度总和应该等于转发模块1302的回传链路波束的宽度总和。具体可以见图6。Specifically, the network device 110 can respectively obtain the M'H beam components in the horizontal direction and the M'V beam components in the vertical direction of the forwarding module 1302 according to the beams of the control module 1301, and perform beam management based on these beam components. Specifically, the sum of the widths of the beams of the control module 1301 should be equal to the sum of the widths of the backhaul link beams of the forwarding module 1302. See Figure 6 for details.
图6是控制模块的波束与转发模块的波束之间的关系示意图。如图6所示,控制模块1301的波束宽度以大圆形进行表征,转发模块1302的波束宽度以小圆形进行表征。控制模块1301的每个波束的波束宽度均大于转发模块1302的每个波束(以回传链路波束为主)的波束宽度。转发模块1302的波束数量与控制模块1301的波束数量在水平方向的比值为2:4,在垂直方向的比值为2:4。Figure 6 is a schematic diagram of the relationship between the beams of the control module and the beams of the forwarding module. As shown in FIG. 6 , the beam width of the control module 1301 is represented by a large circle, and the beam width of the forwarding module 1302 is represented by a small circle. The beam width of each beam of the control module 1301 is greater than the beam width of each beam of the forwarding module 1302 (mainly the backhaul link beam). The ratio of the number of beams of the forwarding module 1302 to the number of beams of the control module 1301 is 2:4 in the horizontal direction, and the ratio in the vertical direction is 2:4.
如图6所示,左侧的虚线小框所圈定的波束宽度等于右侧的虚线小框所圈定的波束宽度相同,右侧的虚线小框内的每个波束的分辨率高于左侧的虚线小框内的每个波束的分辨率。示例性地,波束信息W1可以用于确定左侧的虚线小框,例如,波束#21,波束信息W2可以用于确定右侧的虚线大框,例如,波束*31、波束*32、波束*41以及波束*42。As shown in Figure 6, the beam width circled by the small dotted box on the left is equal to the beam width circled by the small dotted box on the right. The resolution of each beam in the small dotted box on the right is higher than that on the left. The resolution of each beam within the small dashed box. For example, the beam information W1 can be used to determine the small dotted box on the left, for example, beam #21, and the beam information W2 can be used to determine the large dotted box on the right, for example, beam *31, beam *32, beam * 41 and beam*42.
例如,网络设备110确定R=M'H+M'V-1个波束。其中,水平方向的M'H个波束分量(见图6中的*31与*32)与1个垂直方向的波束分量组成M'H个波束。示例性地,网络设备110选择M'V个波束分量(见图6中的*31与*41)中位于最中心的波束分量(见图6中的*41)分别与M'H个波束分量进行组合,构成M'H个波束(例如,*31与*41的组合,*32与*41的组合)。又示例性地,网络设备110随机从M'V个波束分量中选择1个波束分量分别与M'H个波束分量进行组合,构成M'H个波束。垂直方向的M'V个波束分量(见图6中的*31与*41)以及1个水平方向的波束分量构成M'V个波束。示例性地,网络设备110选择M'H个波束分量中位于最中心的波束分量(见图6中的*42)分别与M'V个波束分量进行组合,构成M'V个波束(例如,*31与*42的组合,*41与*42的组合)。又示例性地,网络设备110随机从M'H个波束分量中选择1个波束分量分别与M'V个波束分量进行组合,构成M'V个波束。For example, network device 110 determines R= M'H + M'V -1 beams. Among them, M' H beam components in the horizontal direction (see *31 and *32 in Figure 6) and one vertical beam component form M' H beams. Exemplarily, the network device 110 selects the most central beam component (see *41 in Figure 6) among the M' V beam components (see *31 and *41 in Figure 6), respectively, and the M' H beam components. Combine to form M' H beams (for example, the combination of *31 and *41, the combination of *32 and *41). As another example, the network device 110 randomly selects one beam component from M' V beam components and combines it with M' H beam components respectively to form M' H beams. M' V beam components in the vertical direction (see *31 and *41 in Figure 6) and 1 beam component in the horizontal direction constitute M' V beams. Illustratively, the network device 110 selects the most central beam component (see *42 in Figure 6) among the M'H beam components to be combined with the M'V beam components respectively to form M'V beams (for example, The combination of *31 and *42, the combination of *41 and *42). As another example, the network device 110 randomly selects one beam component from M' H beam components and combines it with M' V beam components respectively to form M' V beams.
综上,除去水平方向与垂直方向之间重叠的一个波束(见图6中的*31),网络设备110最终确定M'H+M'V-1个波束。换言之,网络设备110根据波束信息W1与波束信息W2确定的波束集合Q1包括R个波束。In summary, except for one beam that overlaps between the horizontal direction and the vertical direction (see *31 in Figure 6), the network device 110 finally determines M' H + M' V -1 beams. In other words, the beam set Q1 determined by the network device 110 according to the beam information W1 and the beam information W2 includes R beams.
例如,网络设备110确定R=KVM'H+KHM'V个波束。其中,水平方向的M'H个波束分量与KV个垂直方向的波束分量组成KVM'H个波束。示例性地,网络设备110选择M'V个波束分量中位于最中心的KV个波束分量分别与M'H个波束分量组合,构成KVM'H个波束。示例性地,网络设备110随机从M'V个波束分量中选择KV个波束分量分别与M'H个波束分量进行组合,构成KVM'H个波束。垂直方向的M'V个波束分量与KH个水平方向的波束分量组成KHM'V个波束。示例性地,网络设备110选择M'H个波束分量中位于最中心的KH个波束分量分别与M'V个波束分量组合,构成KH M'V个波束。示例性地,网络设备110随机从M'H个波束分量中选择KH个波束分量分别与M'V个波束分量组合,构成KHM'V个波束。For example, network device 110 determines R = K V M' H + K H M' V beams. Among them, M' H beam components in the horizontal direction and K V beam components in the vertical direction form K V M' H beams. For example, the network device 110 selects the most central K V beam components among the M' V beam components and combines them with the M' H beam components respectively to form K V M' H beams. For example, the network device 110 randomly selects K V beam components from M' V beam components and combines them with M' H beam components respectively to form K V M' H beams. M' V beam components in the vertical direction and K H beam components in the horizontal direction form K H M' V beams. For example, the network device 110 selects the most central K H beam components among the M' H beam components and combines them with the M' V beam components respectively to form K H M' V beams. For example, the network device 110 randomly selects K H beam components from M' H beam components and combines them with M' V beam components respectively to form K H M' V beams.
综上,网络设备110最终确定M'H+M'V-1个波束。换言之,网络设备110根据波束信息W1与波束信息W2确定的波束集合Q1包括R个波束。In summary, the network device 110 finally determines M′ H +M′ V −1 beams. In other words, the beam set Q1 determined by the network device 110 according to the beam information W1 and the beam information W2 includes R beams.
例如,网络设备110确定R=M'HM'V个波束。其中,水平方向的M'H个波束分量与垂直方向的M'V个波束分量分别在垂直方向和水平方向进行两两组合,组成M'HM'V个波束。For example, network device 110 determines R=M' H M' V beams. Among them, the M' H beam components in the horizontal direction and the M' V beam components in the vertical direction are combined in pairs in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction respectively to form M' H M' V beams.
综上,网络设备110最终确定M'HM'V个波束。换言之,网络设备110根据波束信息W1与波束信息W2确定的波束集合Q1包括R个波束。In summary, the network device 110 finally determines M' H M' V beams. In other words, the beam set Q1 determined by the network device 110 according to the beam information W1 and the beam information W2 includes R beams.
可选地,水平方向与垂直方向之间可以有更多的组合关系。 Optionally, there can be more combinatorial relationships between the horizontal direction and the vertical direction.
应理解,KH、KV、M'H、M'V为正整数。一般地,KH<<MH,KV<<MV,可以降低扫描开销。M'H≈MH,M'V≈MV,使得波束测量更准。其中,M'H与MH相近,M'V与MV相近,从而可以实现通过波束插值就获得比较好的波束对准性能。It should be understood that K H , K V , M' H and M' V are positive integers. Generally, K H << M H and K V << M V can reduce the scanning overhead. M' H ≈ M H , M' V ≈ M V , making the beam measurement more accurate. Among them, M' H is close to M H , and M' V is close to M V , so that better beam alignment performance can be obtained through beam interpolation.
具体而言,波束集合Q1包括R个波束,R个波束的确定过程可以参考上述描述。波束集合Q1用于中继设备130辅助网络设备110与终端设备120之间的通信,或者说,用于中继设备130与网络设备110之间的通信,这二者可以理解为是等同含义。Specifically, the beam set Q1 includes R beams, and the determination process of the R beams may refer to the above description. The beam set Q1 is used for the relay device 130 to assist the communication between the network device 110 and the terminal device 120, or is used for the communication between the relay device 130 and the network device 110. The two can be understood to have equivalent meanings.
具体来说,波束信息W1能够指示中继设备130与网络设备110之间的初始波束方向信息,该初始波束方向信息能够确定控制模块1301的至少一个波束,且至少一个波束中每个波束的宽度是大于转发模块1302的每个回传链路波束的宽度,这会使得控制模块1301的波束的分辨率低于转发模块1302的回传链路波束的分辨率。控制模块1301的一个波束可能对应转发模块1302的多个回传链路波束。网络设备110可以根据控制模块1301的波束确定转发模块1302的回传链路波束,从而使得中继设备130的回传链路波束方向对准网络设备110。具体内容可以参见上述的内容。Specifically, the beam information W1 can indicate the initial beam direction information between the relay device 130 and the network device 110. The initial beam direction information can determine at least one beam of the control module 1301, and the width of each beam in the at least one beam. is greater than the width of each backhaul link beam of the forwarding module 1302, which will make the resolution of the beam of the control module 1301 lower than the resolution of the backhaul link beam of the forwarding module 1302. One beam of the control module 1301 may correspond to multiple backhaul link beams of the forwarding module 1302. The network device 110 can determine the backhaul link beam of the forwarding module 1302 according to the beam of the control module 1301, so that the backhaul link beam direction of the relay device 130 is aligned with the network device 110. For specific content, please refer to the above content.
一种可能的实现,波束信息W2包括回传链路波束的波束/波束集合的数量信息。数量信息可以是指回传链路最大的波束/波束集合的数量,也可以是指回传链路的候选波束/候选波束集合的数量,其中,候选波束/候选波束集合属于回传链路的所有波束/波束集合中的一部分。In one possible implementation, the beam information W2 includes information on the number of beams/beam sets of backhaul link beams. The quantity information may refer to the number of the largest beams/beam sets of the backhaul link, or it may refer to the number of candidate beams/candidate beam sets of the backhaul link, where the candidate beams/candidate beam sets belong to the backhaul link. A subset of all beams/beam sets.
示例性地,波束信息W2包括波束集合(可以根据波束信息W2确定的波束集合,例如{A,B,C,…})中集合的数量,A、B或C为波束集合的索引。波束信息W2也可以包括波束的数量,即波束信息W2包括波束集合{A,B,C,…}中集合的数量,以及波束集合A({a0,a1,a2,…})中波束的数量,波束集合B({b0,b1,b2,…})中波束的数量,以及波束集合C({c0,c1,c2,…})中波束的数量,a0、a1、a2、b0、b1、b2、c0、c1和c2均为波束的索引。Exemplarily, the beam information W2 includes the number of sets in a beam set (a beam set that can be determined according to the beam information W2, such as {A, B, C, ...}), and A, B or C are the indexes of the beam set. The beam information W2 may also include the number of beams, that is, the beam information W2 includes the number of sets in the beam set {A, B, C,...}, and the number of beams in the beam set A ({a0, a1, a2,...}) , the number of beams in beam set B ({b0, b1, b2,...}), and the number of beams in beam set C ({c0, c1, c2,...}), a0, a1, a2, b0, b1, b2, c0, c1 and c2 are all the indices of the beam.
一个可能的实现方式,波束信息W2还可以包括接入链路波束的波束/波束集合的数量信息。数量信息可以是指接入链路最大的波束/波束集合的数量,也可以是指接入链路的候选波束/候选波束集合的数量,其中,候选波束/候选波束集合属于接入链路的所有波束/波束集合中的一部分。In one possible implementation, the beam information W2 may also include information on the number of beams/beam sets of access link beams. The quantity information may refer to the number of the largest beams/beam sets of the access link, or it may refer to the number of candidate beams/candidate beam sets of the access link, where the candidate beams/candidate beam sets belong to the access link. A subset of all beams/beam sets.
一个波束集合(波束集合也可称为波束集)包括至少一个波束。波束集合或者波束的数量可以是{1,2,4,6,8,10,16,24,32}中的任意一个值。其中,波束集合或者波束的数量不大于K,K可以是{1,2,4,6,8,10,16,24,32}中的任意一个值。A beam set (a beam set may also be called a beam set) includes at least one beam. The beam set or the number of beams can be any value among {1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 16, 24, 32}. Among them, the number of beam sets or beams is not greater than K, and K can be any value among {1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 16, 24, 32}.
一个可能的实现,能根据波束信息W2确定的波束集合可以包括一个或多个波束集合,例如根据波束信息W2确定的波束集合为{A,B,C,…},其中包括多个波束集合,例如包括波束集合A、波束集合B、波束集合C等。In one possible implementation, the beam set that can be determined based on the beam information W2 may include one or more beam sets. For example, the beam set determined based on the beam information W2 is {A, B, C,...}, which includes multiple beam sets. For example, it includes beam set A, beam set B, beam set C, etc.
一种可能的实现,波束信息W2包括接入链路波束或者回传链路波束的波束/波束集合的准共址(quasi co-location,QCL)信息。In one possible implementation, the beam information W2 includes quasi co-location (QCL) information of the access link beam or the beam/beam set of the backhaul link beam.
QCL关系用于表示多个资源之间具有一个或多个相同或者相类似的通信特征,对于具有QCL关系的多个资源,可以采用相同或者类似的通信配置。QCL relationships are used to indicate that multiple resources have one or more identical or similar communication characteristics. For multiple resources with QCL relationships, the same or similar communication configurations can be used.
具体地,具有QCL关系的天线端口对应的信号中具有相同的参数,或者,一个天线端口的参数(也可以称为QCL参数)可用于确定与该天线端口具有QCL关系的另一个天线端口的参数,或者,两个天线端口具有相同的参数,或者,两个天线端口间的参数差小于某阈值。其中,该参数可以包括以下一项或多项:时延扩展(delay spread),多普勒扩展(doppler spread),多普勒频移(doppler shift),平均时延(average delay),平均增益,空间接收参数(spatial rx parameters)。其中,空间接收参数可以包括以下一项或多项:到达角(angle of arrival,AOA)、平均AOA、AOA扩展、离开角(angle of departure,AOD)、平均AOD、AOD扩展、接收天线空间相关性参数、发送天线空间相关性参数、发射波束、接收波束以及资源标识。Specifically, the signals corresponding to the antenna ports with a QCL relationship have the same parameters, or the parameters of one antenna port (also called QCL parameters) can be used to determine the parameters of another antenna port that has a QCL relationship with the antenna port. , or the two antenna ports have the same parameters, or the parameter difference between the two antenna ports is less than a certain threshold. Among them, this parameter can include one or more of the following: delay spread (delay spread), Doppler spread (doppler spread), Doppler shift (doppler shift), average delay (average delay), average gain , spatial rx parameters. Among them, the spatial reception parameters can include one or more of the following: angle of arrival (angle of arrival, AOA), average AOA, AOA extension, angle of departure (angle of departure, AOD), average AOD, AOD extension, receiving antenna spatial correlation parameters, transmit antenna spatial correlation parameters, transmit beam, receive beam and resource identification.
在本申请实施例中,“波束”是一个抽象概念,其可以对应于传输信号时的瞬时或统计信道特征,例如时延扩展(delay spread),多普勒扩展(doppler spread),多普勒频移(doppler shift),平均时延(average delay),平均增益,空间接收参数(spatial Rx parameters)、空间发送参数(spatial Tx parameters)。其中,空间接收参数或空间发送参数可以包括以下的一项或多项:AOA、平均AOA、AOA扩展、AOD、平均AOD、AOD扩展、接收天线空间相关性参数、发送天线空间相关性参数、发 射波束、接收波束以及资源标识。即,波束可以通过参考信号来指示/表征,即参考信号之间的QCL关系来体现不同或相同的波束;另外,波束还可以通过多天线系统中作用于天线的权值或者作用于天线端口的码本(codebook)来表示,即波束也可以对应为码本。In the embodiment of this application, "beam" is an abstract concept, which may correspond to instantaneous or statistical channel characteristics when transmitting signals, such as delay spread, Doppler spread, Doppler spread, etc. Frequency shift (doppler shift), average delay (average delay), average gain, spatial reception parameters (spatial Rx parameters), spatial transmission parameters (spatial Tx parameters). The spatial reception parameters or spatial transmission parameters may include one or more of the following: AOA, average AOA, AOA extension, AOD, average AOD, AOD extension, receiving antenna spatial correlation parameters, transmitting antenna spatial correlation parameters, transmitting antenna spatial correlation parameters, transmit beam, receive beam and resource identification. That is, the beams can be indicated/characterized by reference signals, that is, the QCL relationship between the reference signals reflects different or the same beams; in addition, the beams can also be represented by the weights acting on the antennas in the multi-antenna system or the weights acting on the antenna ports. It is represented by a codebook, that is, a beam can also correspond to a codebook.
示例地,波束集合的QCL信息如表1所示:For example, the QCL information of the beam set is shown in Table 1:
表1
Table 1
表1只示出了波束集合索引为A、B、C的QCL信息,“...”表示除此之外表1还可以包括其他波束集合的QCL信息,或者表1也可以只包括上述部分波束集合的QCL信息,本申请实施例不做限制,后文表格出现“...”可以此类推,不再赘述。Table 1 only shows the QCL information of beam set indexes A, B, and C. "..." indicates that in addition, Table 1 can also include QCL information of other beam sets, or Table 1 can also only include some of the above-mentioned beams. The collection of QCL information is not limited in the embodiment of this application. If "..." appears in the table below, it can be deduced in this way and will not be described again.
TCI-状态编号(StateId)-A用于指示集合A的传输配置编号(transmission configuration indicator,TCI)信息,TCI用于配置多个下行参考信号和物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel,PDSCH)解调参考信号(de-modulation reference signal,DMRS)之间配置准共址QCL关系。这里的TCI是指中继设备接入链路波束对应的TCI,可以用于表示中继设备转发下行参考信号和物理下行共享信道解调参考信号之间准共址QCL关系,实际中TCI还可以是其它名称,本申请实施例对此不作限定。TCI-StateId-A is used to indicate the transmission configuration indicator (TCI) information of set A. TCI is used to configure multiple downlink reference signals and physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) solution A quasi-co-located QCL relationship is configured between de-modulation reference signals (DMRS). The TCI here refers to the TCI corresponding to the access link beam of the relay device. It can be used to represent the quasi-co-located QCL relationship between the relay device forwarding the downlink reference signal and the physical downlink shared channel demodulation reference signal. In practice, TCI can also It is another name, and the embodiment of this application does not limit it.
示例地,波束集合中的波束的QCL信息如表2所示:For example, the QCL information of the beams in the beam set is shown in Table 2:
表2
Table 2
其中,TCI-状态编号-a0用于指示波束a0的TCI信息。Among them, TCI-status number-a0 is used to indicate the TCI information of beam a0.
一种可能的实现,波束信息W2包括接入链路波束或者回传链路波束的波束/波束集合的覆盖范围信息。示例地,波束集合的覆盖范围信息如表3所示:In one possible implementation, beam information W2 includes coverage information of access link beams or beams/beam sets of backhaul link beams. For example, the coverage information of the beam set is shown in Table 3:
表3
table 3
示例地,波束集合中的波束的覆盖范围信息如表4所示:For example, the coverage information of the beams in the beam set is as shown in Table 4:
表4
Table 4
覆盖范围为对应波束集合或者波束的空间覆盖信息。当覆盖范围为对应波束集合的空间覆盖信息 时,波束集合的覆盖范围可以是该波束集合中所有波束形成的覆盖范围的并集,或者可以是该波束集合中部分波束形成的覆盖范围的并集,或者可以是该波束集合中波束增益超过一定值的波束形成的覆盖范围的并集。The coverage range is the spatial coverage information of the corresponding beam set or beam. When the coverage range is the spatial coverage information of the corresponding beam set When , the coverage area of a beam set may be the union of the coverage areas formed by all beams in the beam set, or may be the union of the coverage areas formed by partial beams in the beam set, or may be the beam gain in the beam set exceeding The union of beamformed coverage areas of a certain value.
空间覆盖信息可以指覆盖区域,覆盖区域可以指逻辑区域划分。例如,覆盖区域对应为方形,方形定义了长和宽,覆盖区域对应了方形的逻辑编号,或者覆盖区域对应长边起始位置、宽边起始位置、长边的长度、宽边的长度、长边结束位置、宽边结束位置中的至少一项。再例如,覆盖区域对应为方体,方形定义了长、宽、和高,覆盖区域对应了方体的逻辑编号,或者覆盖区域对应长边起始位置、宽边起始位置、高起始位置、长边的长度、宽边的长度、高度、长边结束位置、宽边结束位置以及高结束位置中的至少一项。再例如,覆盖区域对应为极坐标区域,极坐标区域定义了半径和角度,覆盖区域对应了半径的逻辑编号,或者覆盖区域对应半径起始位置、半径结束位置、角度起始位置、角度结束位置中的至少一项。The spatial coverage information may refer to the coverage area, and the coverage area may refer to the logical area division. For example, the coverage area corresponds to a square, the square defines the length and width, and the coverage area corresponds to the logical number of the square, or the coverage area corresponds to the starting position of the long side, the starting position of the wide side, the length of the long side, the length of the wide side, At least one of the long side end position and the wide side end position. For another example, the coverage area corresponds to a cube. The square defines the length, width, and height. The coverage area corresponds to the logical number of the cube, or the coverage area corresponds to the starting position of the long side, the starting position of the wide side, and the starting position of the height. , at least one of the length of the long side, the length of the wide side, the height, the end position of the long side, the end position of the wide side, and the end position of the high side. For another example, the coverage area corresponds to the polar coordinate area. The polar coordinate area defines the radius and angle. The coverage area corresponds to the logical number of the radius, or the coverage area corresponds to the radius start position, radius end position, angle start position, and angle end position. at least one of them.
或者,空间覆盖信息是指覆盖角度范围(或者覆盖方向、或者覆盖方向范围)。具体可以包括水平角度和/或垂直角度。即,覆盖角度范围信息可以包括以下至少一项:水平角度宽度,水平角度起始值,水平角度结束值,垂直角度宽度,垂直角度起始值,波束峰值方向(beam peak direction),波束宽度,波束中心方向(beam centre direction),额定波束全向辐射功率(effective isotropic radiated power,EIRP),空口峰值方向集合(over the air peak directions set),波束方向对(beam direction pair),或垂直角度结束值。Alternatively, the spatial coverage information refers to the coverage angle range (or coverage direction, or coverage direction range). Specifically, it may include horizontal angles and/or vertical angles. That is, the coverage angle range information may include at least one of the following: horizontal angle width, horizontal angle starting value, horizontal angle ending value, vertical angle width, vertical angle starting value, beam peak direction (beam peak direction), beam width, Beam center direction (beam center direction), rated beam isotropic radiated power (EIRP), air interface peak direction set (over the air peak directions set), beam direction pair (beam direction pair), or vertical angle end value.
换句说,每个波束都与波束特性(beam identity)、参考波束方向对(reference beam direction pair)、波束宽度(beamwidth)、额定波束EIRP、空中(over the air,OTA)峰值方向设置、最大转向方向上的波束方向对及其相关的额定波束EIRP和波束宽度(s)相关联。对于波束和波束方向对,额定波束EIRP水平是中继器在相关波束峰值方向上宣布的最大辐射功率。对于与OTA峰值方向设置内的波束方向对相关联的每个波束峰值方向,可以要求特定的额定波束EIRP水平。In other words, each beam is related to the beam identity, reference beam direction pair, beamwidth, rated beam EIRP, over the air (OTA) peak direction setting, maximum Beam direction pairs in the steering direction are associated with their associated nominal beam EIRP and beamwidth (s). For beam and beam direction pairs, the rated beam EIRP level is the maximum radiated power declared by the repeater in the relevant beam peak direction. A specific rated beam EIRP level may be required for each beam peak direction associated with a pair of beam directions within the OTA peak direction setting.
图7是波束或波束集合的二维覆盖范围的示意图。其中,图7的(a)为覆盖区域为方形的示意图,即波束或波束集合的覆盖区域是二维的。图7的(a)中一个方框代表一个波束集合或者一个波束的覆盖范围。图7的(a)中仅示意相邻波束的覆盖范围,波束集合或波束之间的覆盖范围可以有重叠。接入链路波束的覆盖范围可以近似对应到阵列天线成型中水平方向(horizontal)和垂直方向(vertical)共同定义的区域。例如x轴对应到水平方向,y轴对应到垂直方向。一个波束或者一个波束集合的覆盖范围可以定义为3dB角度的宽度(角度的宽度还可以是其它值,例如5dB、6dB,即与最强波束增益相差3dB的方向之间的角度区域。图7的(b)示出了极坐标区域中对应的覆盖区域,其中某一个波束或波束集合的覆盖区域为区域abcd,半径起始位置为半径结束位置为角度起始位置为θ1,角度结束位置为中继设备130的接入链路波束集合或者波束对应的覆盖范围可以是相邻的,如图8所示。Figure 7 is a schematic diagram of the two-dimensional coverage of a beam or set of beams. Among them, (a) of Figure 7 is a schematic diagram in which the coverage area is square, that is, the coverage area of the beam or beam set is two-dimensional. A box in (a) of Figure 7 represents a beam set or the coverage of a beam. (a) of FIG. 7 only illustrates the coverage ranges of adjacent beams, and the coverage ranges between beam sets or beams may overlap. The coverage range of the access link beam can approximately correspond to the area jointly defined by the horizontal direction (horizontal) and the vertical direction (vertical) in the array antenna formation. For example, the x-axis corresponds to the horizontal direction, and the y-axis corresponds to the vertical direction. The coverage of a beam or a set of beams can be defined as the width of the 3dB angle (the width of the angle can also be other values, such as 5dB, 6dB, that is, the angular area between the directions that differ by 3dB from the strongest beam gain. Figure 7 (b) shows the corresponding coverage area in the polar coordinate area, where the coverage area of a certain beam or beam set is area abcd, and the starting position of the radius is The end position of the radius is The starting position of the angle is θ1, and the ending position of the angle is The access link beam sets of the relay device 130 or the coverage areas corresponding to the beams may be adjacent, as shown in FIG. 8 .
图8是不同波束或波束集合相邻的覆盖范围的示意图。当波束集合或波束对应的覆盖范围相邻时,如图8的(a)和图8的(b)所示,波束信息W2中可以包括波束集合A的起始覆盖范围、波束集合A,B,C等的覆盖范围宽度信息以及每个波束集合的相邻/相对顺序,即网络设备110可以根据上述信息确定每个波束集合的覆盖范围。或者,波束信息W2中可以包括波束a0的起始覆盖范围、每个波束(图8的(b)示出的波束)的覆盖范围宽度信息以及每个波束的相邻/相对顺序,即网络设备110可以根据上述信息确定每个波束的覆盖范围。Figure 8 is a schematic diagram of adjacent coverage areas of different beams or sets of beams. When the beam sets or the coverage areas corresponding to the beams are adjacent, as shown in Figure 8 (a) and Figure 8 (b), the beam information W2 may include the starting coverage of the beam set A, beam sets A, and B , C, etc., and the adjacent/relative order of each beam set, that is, the network device 110 can determine the coverage of each beam set based on the above information. Alternatively, the beam information W2 may include the starting coverage of the beam a0, the coverage width information of each beam (the beam shown in (b) of FIG. 8), and the adjacent/relative order of each beam, that is, the network device 110 can determine the coverage of each beam based on the above information.
波束集合或波束之间的相对顺序可以预定义,若波束集合或波束之间的相对顺序预定义,则第0个波束集合或第0个波束的覆盖范围以及每个波束集合或每个波束的覆盖范围宽度可以确定每个波束集合或每个波束的覆盖范围。波束集合(或者波束)可以与信号之间关联(或对应),如图7所示(图9以波束集合为例)。The beam set or the relative order between beams can be predefined. If the beam set or the relative order between beams is predefined, then the coverage of the 0th beam set or the 0th beam and the coverage of each beam set or each beam Coverage width determines the coverage of each beam set or each beam. A beam set (or beam) can be associated (or corresponding) with a signal, as shown in Figure 7 (Figure 9 takes a beam set as an example).
图9是波束集合与信号之间对应的示意图。具体地,可以根据信号在时域或频域上的先后顺序确定波束集合之间的相对顺序,或者根据信号在时域或频域上的位置确定对应的波束集合的索引(或者 编号)。图9中的T可以理解为信号0(或其他信号例如信号1、信号2)的发送周期,或者波束集合A(或其他波束集合例如波束集合B、波束集合C)的使用周期,本申请实施例不做限制。Figure 9 is a schematic diagram of the correspondence between beam sets and signals. Specifically, the relative order between the beam sets can be determined based on the sequence of the signals in the time domain or frequency domain, or the index of the corresponding beam set can be determined based on the position of the signal in the time domain or frequency domain (or serial number). T in Figure 9 can be understood as the transmission period of signal 0 (or other signals such as signal 1 and signal 2), or the use period of beam set A (or other beam sets such as beam set B and beam set C). This application implements Examples are not limited.
此时,波束信息W2中可以只包括第0个波束集合的起始覆盖范围和每个波束集合的覆盖范围宽度,网络设备110可确定每个波束集合的覆盖范围。图8的(a)中覆盖范围以角度为例,假设波束集合间的相对顺序按图8的(a)中的顺序预定义,每个波束集合的覆盖范围宽度都为W,则第0个波束集合(即波束集合A)的角度覆盖范围为(S,S+W],其中S为波束集合A的起始覆盖角度,则波束集合B的角度覆盖范围为(S+W,S+2W],波束集合C的角度覆盖范围为(S+2W,S+3W],第i个波束集合的角度覆盖范围为(S+i×W,S+(i+1)×W]。At this time, the beam information W2 may only include the starting coverage of the 0th beam set and the coverage width of each beam set, and the network device 110 may determine the coverage of each beam set. The coverage in (a) of Figure 8 takes angle as an example. Assume that the relative order between beam sets is predefined according to the order in (a) of Figure 8. The coverage width of each beam set is W, then the 0th The angular coverage range of the beam set (ie, beam set A) is (S, S+W], where S is the starting coverage angle of the beam set A, then the angular coverage range of the beam set B is (S+W, S+2W ], the angular coverage range of beam set C is (S+2W, S+3W], and the angular coverage range of the i-th beam set is (S+i×W, S+(i+1)×W].
类似地,波束信息W2中可以只包括第0个波束的起始覆盖范围和每个波束的覆盖范围宽度,网络设备110可确定每个波束的覆盖范围。即图8的(b)中每个波束的覆盖范围也可通过上述确定每个波束集合的覆盖范围的方式确定。Similarly, the beam information W2 may only include the starting coverage of the 0th beam and the coverage width of each beam, and the network device 110 may determine the coverage of each beam. That is, the coverage of each beam in (b) of FIG. 8 can also be determined by the above method of determining the coverage of each beam set.
一种可能的实现,波束信息W2包括接入链路波束或者回传链路波束的波束集合之间的相对关系或者波束之间的相对关系。In one possible implementation, the beam information W2 includes the relative relationship between access link beams or beam sets of backhaul link beams, or the relative relationship between beams.
相对关系可以指覆盖范围之间的关系,相对关系包括相交关系、包含关系、隶属关系、QCL关系。或者,在QCL信息中引入覆盖范围的参数,则可以将相交关系、包含关系、隶属关系认为是QCL关系的几种特例。Relative relationships can refer to relationships between coverage areas. Relative relationships include intersection relationships, inclusion relationships, affiliation relationships, and QCL relationships. Alternatively, if coverage parameters are introduced in QCL information, intersection relationships, inclusion relationships, and affiliation relationships can be considered as several special cases of QCL relationships.
相交关系是指波束覆盖范围之间有交集,即接入链路(回传链路)波束集合或者接入链路(回传链路)波束对应的覆盖范围可以相互有重合,具体可以参见图10。The intersection relationship refers to the intersection between the beam coverage areas, that is, the access link (backhaul link) beam set or the access link (backhaul link) beam corresponding coverage areas can overlap with each other. For details, see the figure 10.
图10是不同波束或波束集合相交的覆盖范围的示意图。如图10的(a)所示,波束集合A和C是相邻的,无相交关系,波束集合B和A,以及波束集合B和C有相交关系,即波束集合B和A,波束集合B和C的覆盖范围有交叠。如图10的(b)所示,波束ai与ai+1之间是相邻的,波束bi与bi+1之间是相邻的,波束ci与ci+1之间是相邻的,波束di与di+1之间是相邻的,其中,i大于或等于0。波束ai和bi、波束ai+1和bi的覆盖范围都有交叠,波束ci和di、波束ci+1和di的覆盖范围都有交叠。O表示波束集合或者波束覆盖范围之间的偏移。O可以是波束集合或者波束的覆盖范围的一半,本申请实施例不做限制。Figure 10 is a schematic diagram of the coverage areas where different beams or sets of beams intersect. As shown in (a) of Figure 10, beam sets A and C are adjacent and have no intersection relationship. Beam sets B and A, and beam sets B and C have an intersection relationship, that is, beam sets B and A, beam set B There is overlap with the coverage of C. As shown in (b) of Figure 10, beams ai and ai+1 are adjacent, beams bi and bi+1 are adjacent, beams ci and ci+1 are adjacent, and beams di and di+1 are adjacent, where i is greater than or equal to 0. The coverage ranges of beams ai and bi, beams ai+1 and bi all overlap, and the coverage ranges of beams ci and di, and beams ci+1 and di all overlap. O represents the offset between beam sets or beam coverage. O may be half of the beam set or the coverage range of the beam, which is not limited in the embodiment of this application.
如果波束信息W2中包括波束集合之间的相对关系以及其中一个波束集合的覆盖范围信息,网络设备110可根据上述信息确定与该波束集合有相对关系的另一个波束集合的覆盖范围信息。或者如果波束信息W2中包括波束之间的相对关系以及其中一个波束的覆盖范围信息,网络设备110可根据上述信息确定与该波束有相对关系的另一个波束的覆盖范围信息。If the beam information W2 includes the relative relationship between the beam sets and the coverage information of one of the beam sets, the network device 110 can determine the coverage information of the other beam set that has a relative relationship with the beam set based on the above information. Or if the beam information W2 includes the relative relationship between the beams and the coverage information of one of the beams, the network device 110 can determine the coverage information of the other beam that has a relative relationship with the beam based on the above information.
例如,图10的(a)中,波束信息W2中包括波束集合A的角度覆盖范围为(S,S+W],波束集合C的角度覆盖范围为(S+W,S+2W],波束集合A和C相邻,波束集合B与波束集合A和C相交,且偏移值为O,网络设备110可确定波束集合B的覆盖范围为(S+O,S+W+O]。For example, in (a) of Figure 10, the beam information W2 includes the angular coverage range of the beam set A as (S, S+W], the angular coverage range of the beam set C as (S+W, S+2W], and the angular coverage range of the beam set C as (S+W, S+2W]. Sets A and C are adjacent, beam set B intersects beam sets A and C, and the offset value is 0. The network device 110 may determine that the coverage of beam set B is (S+O, S+W+O].
包含关系或者隶属关系是指一个波束集合(或者波束)的覆盖范围,包含于另外一个波束集合(或者波束)覆盖范围,具体可以参见图11。The inclusion relationship or affiliation relationship refers to the coverage range of one beam set (or beam) being included in the coverage range of another beam set (or beam). For details, see Figure 11.
图11是波束或波束集合之间的相对关系的示意图。如图11的(a)所示,波束a0、a1和a2的覆盖范围包含于波束集合A的覆盖范围,波束b0、b1和b2的覆盖范围包含于波束集合B的覆盖范围。如图11的(b)所示,波束A0的覆盖范围与波束a0、a1、a2、a3的覆盖范围相同,则相对而言,波束A0可以称为宽波束,波束a0可以称为窄波束,此处,宽波束和窄波束是相对于波束的覆盖区域的大小而言的。Figure 11 is a schematic diagram of the relative relationship between beams or sets of beams. As shown in (a) of FIG. 11 , the coverage areas of beams a0 , a1 , and a2 are included in the coverage area of beam set A, and the coverage areas of beams b0 , b1 , and b2 are included in the coverage area of beam set B. As shown in (b) of Figure 11, the coverage range of beam A0 is the same as the coverage range of beams a0, a1, a2, and a3. Relatively speaking, beam A0 can be called a wide beam, and beam a0 can be called a narrow beam. Here, wide beam and narrow beam are relative to the size of the coverage area of the beam.
基于上述方案,波束信息W2可以包括波束集合之间的关系或波束之间的关系,网络设备110可以基于波束信息W2进行中继设备130的波束(包括接入链路和回传链路)的调度和指示。并且网络设备110可通过波束集合(或者波束)之间的相对关系调度中继设备的波束扫描(包括接入链路和回传链路)和数据传输。Based on the above solution, the beam information W2 may include the relationship between beam sets or the relationship between beams, and the network device 110 may perform the beam (including the access link and the backhaul link) of the relay device 130 based on the beam information W2. Scheduling and Instructions. And the network device 110 can schedule the beam scanning (including the access link and the backhaul link) and data transmission of the relay device through the relative relationship between the beam sets (or beams).
中继设备的波束(包括接入链路和回传链路)可以不通过波束集合管理,即都采取波束的形式,对中继设备的波束(包括接入链路和回传链路)统一管理,即统一索引,如果中继设备130的接入链 路共有5个波束,即波束的索引可以是a0,a1,a2,a3和a4。如果中继设备的接入链路的波束通过波束集合管理,则如图9所示,不同波束的覆盖范围不相同,具体可以参见图9。The beams of relay equipment (including access links and backhaul links) do not need to be managed through beam aggregation, that is, they are all in the form of beams, and the beams of relay equipment (including access links and backhaul links) are unified. Management, that is, unified indexing, if the access chain of the relay device 130 There are a total of 5 beams in the road, that is, the index of the beam can be a0, a1, a2, a3 and a4. If the beams of the access link of the relay device are managed through beam aggregation, as shown in Figure 9, the coverage ranges of different beams are different. For details, see Figure 9.
图12是波束索引设置的示意图。如图12所示,波束集合A(包括波束a0,a1,a2)的覆盖范围,与波束集合B(包括波束b0,b1,b2,b3,b4,b4,b5)的覆盖范围基本相同,与波束集合C(包括波束c0,c1,c2,c3,c4,c5,c6,c7,c8,c9,c10,c11)的覆盖范围也基本相同,即3个波束、6个波束,12个波束分别取得了相同的覆盖范围。因此可以理解,相同覆盖范围内波束数量越多,对应的波束的覆盖范围就越窄,波束增益可能越高。Figure 12 is a schematic diagram of beam index setting. As shown in Figure 12, the coverage area of beam set A (including beams a0, a1, a2) is basically the same as the coverage area of beam set B (including beams b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b4, b5). The coverage range of beam set C (including beams c0, c1, c2, c3, c4, c5, c6, c7, c8, c9, c10, c11) is also basically the same, that is, 3 beams, 6 beams, and 12 beams respectively. The same coverage was achieved. Therefore, it can be understood that the greater the number of beams in the same coverage area, the narrower the coverage area of the corresponding beam, and the higher the beam gain may be.
图13是不同波束在不同角度的归一化增益的示意图。波束的覆盖范围(或波束方向)可以和波束权值(或者称为加权系数、滤波系数等)关联,即一个天线阵列的波束实际取得的覆盖范围,是由天线阵列上的阵元(或阵子),以及天线阵列上作用的数字和模拟加权系数共同确定。Figure 13 is a schematic diagram of the normalized gain of different beams at different angles. The coverage area (or beam direction) of the beam can be related to the beam weight (also known as the weighting coefficient, filter coefficient, etc.), that is, the actual coverage achieved by the beam of an antenna array is determined by the array elements (or array elements) on the antenna array. ), and the digital and analog weighting coefficients acting on the antenna array are jointly determined.
假设天线阵列为线性天线阵列,阵子间距d为半波长,阵子数量Ne=8,上采样参数(或者过采样参数)a=1/2,偏移值b=0时,过采样DFT权值对应的波束覆盖范围如图10示意。横坐标为角度,纵坐标为归一化增益(转化为分贝了),波束m=-1和波束m=0在-3°方向相交,相交点的波束增益相比峰值降低了将近4dB,波束m=0和波束m=1在3°方向相交,相交点的波束增益相比峰值降低约4dB,其中,m为波束的索引。m=-1所示的波束可以对应图10的(b)中的波束a0,m=1所示的波束可以对应图10的(b)中的波束a1,m=0所示的波束可以对应图10的(b)中的波束b0,因波束a0,a1和波束b0的覆盖面积相同,因此波束a0,a1和b0的归一化增益波峰值相同。Assume that the antenna array is a linear antenna array, the element spacing d is half a wavelength, the number of elements N e = 8, the upsampling parameter (or oversampling parameter) a = 1/2, and the offset value b = 0, the oversampling DFT weight The corresponding beam coverage is shown in Figure 10. The abscissa is the angle, and the ordinate is the normalized gain (converted into decibels). Beam m=-1 and beam m=0 intersect in the -3° direction. The beam gain at the intersection point is nearly 4dB lower than the peak value. The beam m=0 and beam m=1 intersect in the 3° direction, and the beam gain at the intersection point is about 4dB lower than the peak value, where m is the index of the beam. The beam shown in m=-1 can correspond to the beam a0 in (b) of Figure 10, the beam shown in m=1 can correspond to the beam a1 in (b) of Figure 10, and the beam shown in m=0 can correspond to For beam b0 in (b) of Figure 10 , since the coverage areas of beams a0, a1 and beam b0 are the same, the normalized gain wave peak values of beams a0, a1 and b0 are the same.
因此,中继设备130与网络设备110之间还可以约定中继设备130波束的生成(权值)方式。例如,波束的发送权值(也称为发送滤波)。基于中继设备130天线阵列的参数,可以确定中继设备130的波束发送权值对应的波束或者波束索引、波束集合或波束集合索引。波束的覆盖区域信息、数量信息等,可以对应到权值的信息、天线阵列信息(天线阵列参数)。Therefore, the relay device 130 and the network device 110 may also agree on the beam generation (weight) method of the relay device 130 . For example, the transmit weight of the beam (also called transmit filtering). Based on the parameters of the antenna array of the relay device 130, the beam or beam index, beam set or beam set index corresponding to the beam transmission weight of the relay device 130 can be determined. Beam coverage area information, quantity information, etc. can correspond to weight information and antenna array information (antenna array parameters).
一种可能的实现,波束信息W2包括中继设备的天线阵列信息(包括接入链路和回传链路),和/或权值生成信息(包括接入链路和回传链路)。In one possible implementation, the beam information W2 includes the antenna array information of the relay device (including the access link and the backhaul link), and/or the weight generation information (including the access link and the backhaul link).
示例地,天线阵列信息包括一个或多个参数:阵子数量Ne、阵子间距d、移相器数量Np、数字通道数量、模拟通道数量、端口数量。其中,每个参数可以为二维的,例如,区分水平方向(horizontal,H)和垂直方向(vertical,V),(Ne,H,Ne,V)表示水平方向阵子数量Ne,H、垂直方向阵子数量Ne,V,(dH,dV)表示水平方向阵子间距dH、垂直方向阵子间距dV,(Np,H,Np,V)表示水平方向移相器数量Np,H、垂直方向移相器数量Np,VFor example, the antenna array information includes one or more parameters: the number of elements Ne , the element spacing d, the number of phase shifters N p , the number of digital channels, the number of analog channels, and the number of ports. Among them, each parameter can be two-dimensional, for example, distinguish the horizontal direction (horizontal, H) and the vertical direction (vertical, V), (N e, H , N e, V ) represents the number of horizontal direction arrays N e, H , the number of vertical arrays N e,V , (d H ,d V ) represents the horizontal array spacing d H , the vertical array spacing d V , (N p,H ,N p,V ) represents the number of horizontal phase shifters N p,H , the number of vertical phase shifters N p,V .
示例地,权值生成信息可以是天线阵列对应的权值um,um可以是基于DFT的向量,其中m表示波束索引。For example, the weight generation information may be the weight um corresponding to the antenna array, and um may be a vector based on DFT, where m represents the beam index.
其中,即权值um表示为Ne×1的列向量,其中,为虚数单位,e为自然对数底数,m为任意整数,T为矩阵或向量转置符号。in, That is, the weight u m is expressed as a column vector of N e ×1, where, is the imaginary unit, e is the base of the natural logarithm, m is any integer, and T is the matrix or vector transpose sign.
或者,即权值um表示为Ne×1的列向量,上述公式中,a可以对应为上采样(或者过采样)参数,b为偏移值。例如,则um对应的波束(或权值)为两倍上采样DFT波束,则um对应的波束(或权值)为四倍上采样DFT波束。or, That is, the weight u m is expressed as a column vector of N e ×1. In the above formula, a can correspond to the upsampling (or oversampling) parameter, and b is the offset value. For example, Then the beam (or weight) corresponding to u m is twice the upsampled DFT beam, Then the beam (or weight) corresponding to u m is a four times upsampled DFT beam.
或者,考虑Ne=2Np,即天线阵列中一个移相器驱动两个阵子,即权值um表示为2Np×1的列向量,m为任意整数或实数。以上以一个移相器驱动两个阵子、且两个阵子相邻放置为例,实际中可以是其它任意数以及任意布局方式,可以用类似的方式进行扩展,如下示例得到相应的权值。Or, consider Ne = 2N p , that is, one phase shifter drives two elements in the antenna array, That is, the weight u m is expressed as a 2N p ×1 column vector, and m is any integer or real number. The above example uses one phase shifter driving two arrays, and the two arrays are placed adjacent to each other. In practice, it can be any other number and any layout method, and can be expanded in a similar way. The corresponding weights are obtained in the following example.
或者,考虑Ne=2Np,即天线阵列中一个移相器驱动两个阵子,即权值um表示为2Np×1的列向量,m为任意整数或实数。 Or, consider Ne = 2N p , that is, one phase shifter drives two elements in the antenna array, That is, the weight u m is expressed as a 2N p ×1 column vector, and m is any integer or real number.
或者,考虑Ne=3Np,即天线阵列中一个移相器驱动三个阵子,即权值um表示为2Np×1的列向量,m为任意整数或实数。Or, consider N e = 3N p , that is, one phase shifter drives three elements in the antenna array, That is, the weight u m is expressed as a 2N p ×1 column vector, and m is any integer or real number.
示例地,权值生成信息可以是天线阵列对应的权值um,um可以是基于DFT扩展的向量。For example, the weight generation information may be the weight um corresponding to the antenna array, and um may be a vector based on DFT expansion.
例如,um可以基于DFT平方率扩展,或者其它任意形式扩展,本申请对此不做限制。以平方率扩展为例, For example, u m can be expanded based on DFT square rate, or expanded in any other form, and this application does not limit this. Taking square rate expansion as an example,
上述权值生成信息也可以理解为权值生成方式(um的计算公式),例如波束的发送权值或接收权值,发送权值也称为发送滤波,接收权值也称为接收滤波。不同的权值生成信息可以生成不同的波束或波束集合。采取过采样DFT权值,可以生成覆盖方向比较窄、比较密的波束或者波束集合。采取DFT权值,可以生成覆盖方向比较窄、间隔适中的波束或者波束集合;采取DFT平方率扩展权值,可以生成覆盖方向比较宽的波束。The above weight generation information can also be understood as the weight generation method (calculation formula of u m ), such as the transmission weight or reception weight of the beam. The transmission weight is also called transmission filtering, and the reception weight is also called reception filtering. Different weight generation information can generate different beams or beam sets. Using oversampled DFT weights can generate beams or beam sets with narrower and denser coverage directions. By using DFT weights, beams or beam sets with narrow coverage directions and moderate intervals can be generated; by using DFT square rate expansion weights, beams with relatively wide coverage directions can be generated.
上述um的计算公式为基于过采样DFT的权值生成方式,um的计算公式还可以是基于Hadamard矩阵的权值生成方式,或基于基向量的不同循环移位的权值生成方式,或者基于Golay互补序列(或矩阵)的权值生成方式,或者基于其他的权值生成方式,本申请对此不做限制。关于反射面的权值的描述还可以如上文所述,具体可以参看图3的描述。The above calculation formula of u m is the weight generation method based on oversampling DFT. The calculation formula of u m can also be the weight generation method based on the Hadamard matrix, or the weight generation method based on different cyclic shifts of the basis vector, or This application does not limit the weight generation method based on Golay complementary sequences (or matrices) or other weight generation methods. The description of the weight of the reflective surface can also be as described above. For details, please refer to the description in Figure 3 .
中继设备130可以同时采取多种权值生成方式,从而生成不同的波束(覆盖范围不同,和/或间隔不同),以满足不同的需求。当中继设备130在第二波束信息W2中上报接入链路的天线阵列信息和/或权值生成信息时,网络设备110可以确定中继设备130接入链路波束或波束集合,波束索引或波束集合索引,波束或波束集合的覆盖范围信息,波束或波束集合数量信息等。The relay device 130 can adopt multiple weight generation methods at the same time to generate different beams (with different coverage areas and/or different intervals) to meet different needs. When the relay device 130 reports the antenna array information and/or weight generation information of the access link in the second beam information W2, the network device 110 may determine the access link beam or beam set of the relay device 130, the beam index or Beam set index, coverage information of beam or beam set, number information of beam or beam set, etc.
如果权值生成信息和天线阵列信息确定,则对应的权值um以及波束的覆盖范围与m直接关联,即索引为m的波束对应了权值um。例如,波束的权值和覆盖范围与m直接关联可以通过图12和图13说明,由于图12中的波束c0,c1的覆盖范围分别和波束d0的覆盖范围有交叠,因此可以认为,图12中的波束c0对应图10中m=-1所示的波束,即波束c0的权值为u-1,图12中的波束c1对应图11中m=1所示的波束,即波束c1的权值为u1,图12中的波束d0对应图13中m=0所示的波束,即波束d0的权值为u0If the weight generation information and the antenna array information are determined, the corresponding weight um and the coverage range of the beam are directly related to m, that is, the beam with index m corresponds to the weight um. For example, the direct correlation between the weight and coverage of the beam and m can be illustrated through Figures 12 and 13. Since the coverage of beams c0 and c1 in Figure 12 overlap with the coverage of beam d0, it can be considered that Figure Beam c0 in Figure 12 corresponds to the beam shown as m=-1 in Figure 10, that is, the weight of beam c0 is u -1 . Beam c1 in Figure 12 corresponds to the beam shown as m=1 in Figure 11, that is, beam c1 The weight of is u 1 , and the beam d0 in Figure 12 corresponds to the beam shown as m=0 in Figure 13 , that is, the weight of beam d0 is u 0 .
或者类似地,以图10的(b)和图10为例说明,由于图10的(b)中的波束a0,a1的覆盖范围分别和波束b0的覆盖范围有交叠,因此可以认为,图10的(b)中的波束a0对应图13中m=-1所示的波束,即波束a0的权值为u-1,图10的(b)中的波束a1对应图13中m=1所示的波束,即波束a1的权值为u1,图10的(b)中的波束b0对应图13中m=0所示的波束,即波束b0的权值为u0Or similarly, taking Figure 10(b) and Figure 10 as an example, since the coverage ranges of beams a0 and a1 in Figure 10(b) overlap with the coverage range of beam b0, it can be considered that Figure Beam a0 in (b) of Figure 10 corresponds to the beam shown in m=-1 in Figure 13, that is, the weight of beam a0 is u -1 , and beam a1 in (b) of Figure 10 corresponds to m=1 in Figure 13 The beam shown, that is, the weight of beam a1 is u 1 , and the beam b0 in (b) of Figure 10 corresponds to the beam shown as m=0 in Figure 13 , that is, the weight of beam b0 is u 0 .
一种可能的实现,波束信息W2包括波束索引与权值之间的对应关系,波束索引与波束之间的对应关系以及波束集合索引与波束之间的对应关系中的至少一项。In one possible implementation, the beam information W2 includes at least one of the correspondence between the beam index and the weight, the correspondence between the beam index and the beam, and the correspondence between the beam set index and the beam.
示例地,网络设备110可根据波束索引与权值之间的对应关系确定中继设备130采用不同权值生成的波束的索引,在后续配置用于测量(或传输数据)的波束时可以直接指示波束的索引。或者网络设备110可根据波束索引与波束之间的对应关系,在后续配置用于测量(或传输数据)的波束时可以直接指示波束的索引。For example, the network device 110 can determine the index of the beam generated by the relay device 130 using different weights according to the corresponding relationship between the beam index and the weight, and can directly indicate it when subsequently configuring the beam for measurement (or data transmission). The index of the beam. Or the network device 110 may directly indicate the index of the beam when subsequently configuring the beam for measurement (or data transmission) according to the corresponding relationship between the beam index and the beam.
可选地,网络设备110可以保存波束索引与权值之间的对应关系,波束索引与波束之间的对应关系以及波束集合索引与波束之间的对应关系,便于后续波束的配置或指示。Optionally, the network device 110 may save the correspondence between the beam index and the weight, the correspondence between the beam index and the beam, and the correspondence between the beam set index and the beam, to facilitate subsequent beam configuration or instructions.
上述分别介绍了波束信息W2包括波束或波束集合的数量信息,波束或波束集合的QCL信息,波束或波束集合的覆盖范围信息,波束之间、或波束集合之间的相对关系,天线阵列信息以及权值生成信息中任一项时,网络设备110确定中继设备130的波束的方式。当然,波束信息W2还可以包括上述任两项或更多项,当波束信息W2包括上述任两项或更多项时,网络设备110确定中继设备130的波束的方式可结合上述不同的实施方式,在此不再赘述。The above respectively introduces that the beam information W2 includes the quantity information of the beam or beam set, the QCL information of the beam or beam set, the coverage information of the beam or beam set, the relative relationship between beams or between beam sets, antenna array information and When any item of the weight generation information is generated, the network device 110 determines the beam pattern of the relay device 130 . Of course, the beam information W2 may also include any two or more items mentioned above. When the beam information W2 includes any two or more items mentioned above, the way the network device 110 determines the beam of the relay device 130 may be combined with the different implementations mentioned above. The method will not be described again here.
基于上述的实现方式,中继设备130可以将其所有可能生成/实现的波束信息上报给网络设备110,从而给网络设备110调度中继设备130的波束提供信息。 Based on the above implementation manner, the relay device 130 can report all the beam information that it may generate/implement to the network device 110, thereby providing information for the network device 110 to schedule the beams of the relay device 130.
可选地,中继设备130的波束包括多个类别。不同类别的波束用于转发不同的信道或业务。Optionally, the beams of relay device 130 include multiple categories. Different categories of beams are used to forward different channels or services.
一种可能的实现方式,可以基于波束或波束集合之间的差异(例如,覆盖范围的差异),将中继设备130的波束进行分类,使不同类别的波束用于转发不同的信道或业务,从而满足不同业务需求,并且可以支持快速和低开销的波束扫描。One possible implementation is to classify the beams of the relay device 130 based on differences between beams or beam sets (for example, differences in coverage), so that beams of different categories are used to forward different channels or services. This meets different business needs and can support fast and low-overhead beam scanning.
示例地,对中继设备130的波束集合进行分类,如表5所示,不同类别的波束集合转发不同的信道或者不同的业务。For example, the beam sets of the relay device 130 are classified. As shown in Table 5, beam sets of different categories forward different channels or different services.
表5
table 5
示例地,对中继设备的波束集合进行分类,如表6所示,不同类别的波束集合转发不同的信道或者不同的业务。For example, the beam sets of the relay device are classified, as shown in Table 6. Beam sets of different categories forward different channels or different services.
表6
Table 6
示例地,不同波束集合(或者波束)对应不同的层级,如表7所示,不同层级可以转发的信道或者信号也在表7示出。For example, different beam sets (or beams) correspond to different levels, as shown in Table 7. The channels or signals that can be forwarded by different levels are also shown in Table 7.
表7
Table 7
示例性地,不同接入链路波束集合(或者接入链路波束)对应不同的覆盖区域(或者补盲区域,或者补弱区域,或者覆盖范围)。以覆盖区域依次缩窄为例。具体可以见表8:For example, different access link beam sets (or access link beams) correspond to different coverage areas (or blind filling areas, weak filling areas, or coverage areas). Take the coverage area being narrowed in sequence as an example. See Table 8 for details:
表8
Table 8
可选地,B包含于A,或者第二覆盖区域包含于第一覆盖区域。Optionally, B is included in A, or the second coverage area is included in the first coverage area.
不同的覆盖区域还可以与覆盖距离关联。其中,覆盖距离可以体现网络设备与中继设备的距离和/ 或中继设备与终端设备(或者目标覆盖区域)之间的距离。例如,覆盖区域越大,对应的覆盖距离越小。具体可以见表9。Different coverage areas can also be associated with coverage distances. Among them, the coverage distance can reflect the distance between the network device and the relay device and/ Or the distance between the relay device and the terminal device (or the target coverage area). For example, the larger the coverage area, the smaller the corresponding coverage distance. See Table 9 for details.
表9
Table 9
当波束或波束集合是以覆盖范围进行分类时,不同类别的波束或波束集合之间的覆盖范围不同。波束或波束集合还可以按照权值或者其他方式分类,本申请实施例对此不做限制。When beams or beam sets are classified based on coverage, the coverage ranges of beams or beam sets of different categories are different. Beams or beam sets can also be classified according to weights or other methods, and the embodiments of this application do not limit this.
波束集合A中的单个波束可以与波束集合B中的1个或多个波束具有QCL关系。中继设备130和网络设备110之间可以对QCL信息进行交互。例如,中继设备130上报网络设备110如下QCL信息:波束集合A和波束集合B中各个波束的QCL关系。再例如,网络设备110配置中继设备130在不同的时间位置,分别发送波束集合A中的至少一个波束a0、以及波束集合#B中部分波束(例如b0,b1)。其中,波束a0的时间位置对应SSB、SIB、PRACH、或寻呼消息的发送时间;波束b0和b1分别对应于波束a0具有QCL关系,且分别是CSI-RS#i(对应波束b0)和CSI-RS#j(对应波束b1),或SRS#m(对应波束b0)和SRS#n(对应波束b1)的发送时间,#i和#j用于区分不同的CSI-RS,#m和#n用于区分不同的SRS。A single beam in beam set A may have a QCL relationship with 1 or more beams in beam set B. QCL information may be exchanged between the relay device 130 and the network device 110 . For example, the relay device 130 reports the following QCL information to the network device 110: the QCL relationship of each beam in beam set A and beam set B. For another example, the network device 110 configures the relay device 130 to respectively transmit at least one beam a0 in the beam set A and some beams (eg, b0, b1) in the beam set #B at different time positions. Among them, the time position of beam a0 corresponds to SSB, SIB, PRACH, or the sending time of the paging message; beams b0 and b1 respectively correspond to beam a0 and have a QCL relationship, and are respectively CSI-RS#i (corresponding to beam b0) and CSI -The transmission time of RS#j (corresponding to beam b1), or SRS#m (corresponding to beam b0) and SRS#n (corresponding to beam b1), #i and #j are used to distinguish different CSI-RS, #m and # n is used to distinguish different SRS.
一个可能的实现,中继设备130将天线的方位角(水平摆放方向、垂直摆放方向)、坐标位置等信息上报给网络设备110,网络设备110可以基于该中继设备130的天线的方位角和坐标位置等信息确定中继设备130用于辅助网络设备110与终端设备120通信用的波束。One possible implementation is that the relay device 130 reports the azimuth angle (horizontal placement direction, vertical placement direction), coordinate position and other information of the antenna to the network device 110. The network device 110 can based on the azimuth of the antenna of the relay device 130 Information such as angle and coordinate position determines the beam used by the relay device 130 to assist the network device 110 in communicating with the terminal device 120 .
具体来说,网络设备110可以根据中继设备130上报的关于网络设备110与中继设备130之间的初始的波束方向信息从网络设备110根据波束信息W2中确定的多个波束集合中确定波束集合Q1,如此,中继设备130可以基于该波束集合Q1更好地辅助网络设备110与终端设备120之间的通信,另外,波束集合Q1是可以对准网络设备110的。Specifically, the network device 110 may determine the beam from the multiple beam sets determined by the network device 110 according to the beam information W2 according to the initial beam direction information reported by the relay device 130 between the network device 110 and the relay device 130 Set Q1, in this way, the relay device 130 can better assist the communication between the network device 110 and the terminal device 120 based on the beam set Q1. In addition, the beam set Q1 can be aimed at the network device 110.
一个可能的实现方式,网络设备110在确定波束集合Q1之前,可以先配置中继设备130的波束扫描方式。具体可以见图14与图15。In a possible implementation, before the network device 110 determines the beam set Q1, the network device 110 may first configure the beam scanning mode of the relay device 130. See Figure 14 and Figure 15 for details.
具体而言,中继设备130的波束扫描可以包括名义回传链路扫描与名义接入链路扫描两种。具体地,对于名义回传链路扫描而言,需要先固定接入链路分量(也可以理解为接入链路波束),并通过多个回传链路分量(也可以理解为回传链路波束)分别转发参考信号,如此可以确定可能合适的一个或者多个回传链路分量。对于名义接入链路扫描而言,需要先固定回传链路分量,并通过多个接入链路分量分别转发参考信号,如此可以确定可能合适的一个或者多个接入链路分量。下文分别以中继设备130分别为放大转发中继设备与反射面为例进行描述波束扫描的过程。Specifically, the beam scanning of the relay device 130 may include two types: nominal backhaul link scanning and nominal access link scanning. Specifically, for nominal backhaul link scanning, it is necessary to first fix the access link component (also can be understood as the access link beam), and pass multiple backhaul link components (also can be understood as the backhaul chain Each channel beam) forwards the reference signal respectively, so that one or more backhaul link components that may be suitable can be determined. For nominal access link scanning, the backhaul link component needs to be fixed first, and the reference signal is forwarded through multiple access link components respectively, so that one or more access link components that may be suitable can be determined. The following describes the process of beam scanning by taking the relay device 130 as an amplification and forwarding relay device and a reflective surface as an example.
图14是本申请实施例的波束扫描的一种示意图。图14中的(a)示出了回传链路波束扫描的过程,例如:网络设备110通过波束#A向中继设备130(可以为放大转发中继设备)分别发送不同的参考信号(reference signal,RS)(例如,RS0,RS2,…,RSK-1),中继设备130可以使用不同的回传链路波束(例如,波束#0,波束#1,…,波束#K-1)接收参考信号。之后,中继设备130可以通过相同的接入链路波束分别发送中继设备130所接收到的网络设备110下发的参考信号。如此,中继设备130可以确定一个或者多个合适的回传链路波束。关于接入链路波束扫描的描述也可以参考上述描述,在此就不再赘述。Figure 14 is a schematic diagram of beam scanning according to an embodiment of the present application. (a) in Figure 14 shows the process of backhaul link beam scanning. For example, the network device 110 sends different reference signals (reference signals) to the relay device 130 (which can be an amplification and forwarding relay device) through beam #A. signal, RS) (e.g., RS 0 , RS 2 , ..., RS K-1 ), the relay device 130 may use different backhaul link beams (e.g., beam #0, beam #1, ..., beam #K -1) Receive reference signal. Afterwards, the relay device 130 may respectively send the reference signals sent by the network device 110 and received by the relay device 130 through the same access link beam. In this manner, relay device 130 may determine one or more suitable backhaul link beams. The description of the access link beam scanning may also refer to the above description, and will not be described again here.
网络设备110可以在配置信息中指示中继设备130的波束管理方式。中继设备130根据配置信息可以确定以下至少一个方式:采取多个回传链路波束以及同一个接入链路波束分别放大转发多个参考信号;或者,采取一个回传链路波束以及多个接入链路波束分别放大转发多个参考信号。具体可以参见图14的(b)。如图14的(b)所示,网络设备110可通过资源集1指示中继设备130的回传链路波束扫描的过程,也可以通过资源集2指示中继设备130的接入链路波束扫描的过程。例如,网络设 备110通过波束#B分别向中继设备130发送多个参考信号(例如,RS0,RS2,…,RSK-1)。中继设备130通过相同的波束#k接收该多个参考信号,并通过多个不同的接入链路波束将其转发出去(例如,波束#a0,波束#a1,…,波束#aK-1)。如此,就可以确定一个或多个合适的接入链路波束。The network device 110 may indicate the beam management mode of the relay device 130 in the configuration information. The relay device 130 may determine at least one of the following methods according to the configuration information: adopt multiple backhaul link beams and the same access link beam to amplify and forward multiple reference signals respectively; or adopt one backhaul link beam and multiple The access link beams amplify and forward multiple reference signals respectively. For details, see (b) of Figure 14 . As shown in (b) of FIG. 14 , the network device 110 may instruct the relay device 130 through resource set 1 to perform the backhaul link beam scanning process, or may instruct the access link beam of the relay device 130 through resource set 2. Scanning process. For example, network equipment The device 110 sends multiple reference signals (for example, RS 0 , RS 2 , ..., RS K-1 ) to the relay device 130 through the beam #B respectively. The relay device 130 receives the multiple reference signals through the same beam #k, and forwards them through multiple different access link beams (for example, beam #a 0 , beam #a 1 , ..., beam #a K-1 ). In this way, one or more suitable access link beams can be determined.
可选地,回传链路波束扫描与接入链路波束扫描可以相互结合起来。例如,先进行回传链路波束扫描,再进行接入链路波束扫描;或者,先进行接入链路波束扫描,再进行回传链路波束扫描,本申请不做限定。Optionally, backhaul link beam scanning and access link beam scanning can be combined with each other. For example, the backhaul link beam scan is performed first, and then the access link beam scan is performed; or the access link beam scan is performed first, and then the backhaul link beam scan is performed, which is not limited by this application.
图15是本申请实施例的波束扫描的另一种示意图。图15中的(a)示出了名义回传链路扫描的过程,例如:网络设备110通过波束#A向中继设备130(可以为放大转发中继设备)分别发送不同的参考信号(例如,RS0,RS2,…,RSK-1),中继设备130可以使用不同的回传链路分量(例如,回传链路分量#0,回传链路分量#1,…,回传链路分量#K-1)接收参考信号。之后,中继设备130可以通过相同的接入链路分量(例如,接入链路分量#a)分别发送中继设备130所接收到的网络设备110下发的参考信号。如此,中继设备130可以确定一个或者多个合适的回传链路分量。关于名义接入链路扫描的描述也可以参考上述描述,在此就不再赘述。Figure 15 is another schematic diagram of beam scanning according to an embodiment of the present application. (a) in Figure 15 shows the process of nominal backhaul link scanning. For example, the network device 110 sends different reference signals (such as , RS 0 , RS 2 , ..., RS K-1 ), the relay device 130 may use different backhaul link components (for example, backhaul link component #0, backhaul link component #1, ..., backhaul link component #0 Transmission link component #K-1) receives the reference signal. Afterwards, the relay device 130 may respectively send the reference signals sent by the network device 110 and received by the relay device 130 through the same access link component (for example, access link component #a). As such, relay device 130 may determine one or more suitable backhaul link components. The description of nominal access link scanning can also refer to the above description, and will not be described again here.
网络设备110可以在配置信息中指示中继设备130的波束管理方式。中继设备130根据配置信息可以确定以下至少一个方式:采取多个回传链路分量以及同一个接入链路分量分别放大转发多个参考信号;或者,采取一个回传链路分量以及多个接入链路分量分别放大转发多个参考信号。具体可以参见图15的(b)。如图15的(b)所示,网络设备110可通过资源集1指示中继设备130的名义回传链路扫描的过程,也可以通过资源集2指示中继设备130的名义接入链路扫描的过程。例如,网络设备110通过波束#B分别向中继设备130发送多个参考信号(例如,RS0,RS2,…,RSK-1)。中继设备130通过相同的回传链路分量#k接收该多个参考信号,并通过多个不同的接入链路分量将其转发出去(例如,接入链路分量#a0,接入链路分量#a1,…,接入链路分量#aK-1)。如此,就可以确定一个或多个合适的接入链路分量。The network device 110 may indicate the beam management mode of the relay device 130 in the configuration information. The relay device 130 may determine at least one of the following methods according to the configuration information: adopt multiple backhaul link components and the same access link component to respectively amplify and forward multiple reference signals; or adopt one backhaul link component and multiple The access link components amplify and forward multiple reference signals respectively. For details, see (b) of Figure 15 . As shown in (b) of FIG. 15 , the network device 110 may instruct the relay device 130 through resource set 1 to perform a nominal backhaul link scanning process, or may instruct the relay device 130 through resource set 2 to instruct the relay device 130 to perform a nominal access link scanning process. Scanning process. For example, the network device 110 sends multiple reference signals (eg, RS 0 , RS 2 , ..., RS K-1 ) to the relay device 130 through beam #B respectively. The relay device 130 receives the multiple reference signals through the same backhaul link component #k, and forwards them through multiple different access link components (for example, access link component #a 0 , access link component #a Link component #a 1 ,..., access link component #a K-1 ). In this way, one or more suitable access link components can be determined.
可选地,名义回传链路扫描与名义接入链路扫描可以相互结合起来。例如,先进行回传链路波束扫描,再进行接入链路波束扫描;或者,先进行接入链路波束扫描,再进行回传链路波束扫描,本申请不做限定。Optionally, nominal backhaul link scanning and nominal access link scanning can be combined with each other. For example, the backhaul link beam scan is performed first, and then the access link beam scan is performed; or the access link beam scan is performed first, and then the backhaul link beam scan is performed, which is not limited by this application.
另外,在图15的(b)中,资源集1用于名义回传链路扫描,资源集2用于名义接入链路扫描。应该理解,实际中,两个资源集的时间间隔、时间先后关系不作限定,例如在时间上可以迭代进行或者交叉进行。具体地,资源集1中可以有Y个资源;在网络设备110发送Y个资源的时间上,反射面分别用K个权值进行反射;其中K个权值对应的接入链路分量相同,回传链路分量不同。再具体地,资源集2中可以有R个资源;在网络设备110发送R个资源的时间上,反射面分别用K个权值进行反射;其中K个权值对应的接入链路分量相同,回传链路分量不同。In addition, in (b) of FIG. 15 , resource set 1 is used for nominal backhaul link scanning, and resource set 2 is used for nominal access link scanning. It should be understood that in practice, the time interval and time sequence relationship between the two resource sets are not limited. For example, they can be iterated or crossed in time. Specifically, there may be Y resources in resource set 1; when the network device 110 sends Y resources, the reflective surface uses K weights for reflection respectively; the access link components corresponding to the K weights are the same, The backhaul link components are different. More specifically, there may be R resources in resource set 2; when the network device 110 sends the R resources, the reflective surface uses K weights to reflect respectively; the access link components corresponding to the K weights are the same. , the backhaul link components are different.
图16是本申请实施例的波束扫描的再一种示意图。图16中的(a)示出了回传链路波束扫描的过程,并以中继设备130为反射面为例进行描述。对于反射面,由于同一组反射权值同时反映了回传链路和接入链路的波束方向。进行波束扫描时,反射面可以基于K个权值,即K个权值的相位分别为φk=φBH,kAC,k=0,1…,K-1进行回传链路波束扫描。Figure 16 is another schematic diagram of beam scanning according to an embodiment of the present application. (a) in FIG. 16 shows the process of beam scanning of the backhaul link, and is described using the relay device 130 as a reflecting surface as an example. For the reflective surface, the same set of reflection weights reflects the beam directions of the backhaul link and the access link. When performing beam scanning, the reflective surface can perform backhaul link beams based on K weights, that is, the phases of the K weights are respectively φ kBH,kAC ,k=0,1...,K-1 scanning.
例如,以下行为例,类似的方式可以扩展到上行。网络设备110通过波束#A向中继设备130(为反射面)发送多个参考信号,例如,网络设备110通过波束#A发送RS0,通过波束#A发送RS1,…,通过波束#A发送RSK-1,中继设备130可以通过不同的φBH对应的(名义)回传链路波束进行接收,并通过相同的φAC对应的名义接入链路波束转发出去。例如,中继设备130通过反射权值#0(即φ0)接收并反射RS0,通过反射权值#1(即φ1)接收并反射RS1,…,通过反射权值#K-1(即φK-1)接收并反射RSK-1For example, take the following row as an example, and a similar approach can be extended to the upstream. The network device 110 sends multiple reference signals to the relay device 130 (which is a reflective surface) through the beam #A. For example, the network device 110 sends RS 0 through the beam #A, sends RS 1 through the beam #A, ..., through the beam #A By sending RS K-1 , the relay device 130 can receive through the (nominal) backhaul link beam corresponding to different φ BH , and forward it through the nominal access link beam corresponding to the same φ AC . For example, the relay device 130 receives and reflects RS 0 through reflection weight #0 (i.e., φ 0 ) , receives and reflects RS 1 through reflection weight #1 (i.e., φ 1 ), ..., through reflection weight #K-1 (i.e. φ K-1 ) receives and reflects RS K-1 .
应理解,φBH,k,k=0,1…,K-1对应K个(名义)回传链路波束方向,φAC对应名义接入链路波束方向,中继设备130在进行名义回传链路波束扫描时,可以使得K个φAC的取值相同,且K个φBH,k不同。It should be understood that φ BH,k ,k=0,1...,K-1 corresponds to K (nominal) backhaul link beam directions, φ AC corresponds to the nominal access link beam direction, and the relay device 130 is performing nominal backhaul link beam directions. When scanning the transmission link beam, the values of K φ ACs can be made the same, and the K φ BH,k can be made different.
位于名义接入链路波束覆盖方向的终端设备120可以对K个信号进行接收/测量,并反馈测量结果。 网络设备110或中继设备130根据测量结果可以确定回传链路的可能合适波束。在终端设备120与名义接入链路的方向比较匹配时,回传链路最匹配的方向转发的参考信号质量最好,即接收质量最高的信号对应的反射权值与信道比较匹配。通过这种方式,可以使得网络设备110或中继设备130获取比较匹配的名义回传链路方向(或回传链路分量)。如果名义接入链路有偏差,则可以通过多次测量、或者多个不同终端设备的测量反馈,确定出一个或者多个匹配的名义回传链路波束(即权值分量φBH,k)。另外,如果是终端设备120上报测量结果给网络设备110,网络设备110可以将确定的回传链路分量对应的指示信息,例如,权值分量索引,通知中继设备130;或者,网络设备110将测量结果通知给中继设备130。如此,中继设备130可以确定一个或者多个合适的φBH,kThe terminal device 120 located in the nominal access link beam coverage direction can receive/measure K signals and feed back the measurement results. The network device 110 or the relay device 130 may determine possible suitable beams for the backhaul link based on the measurement results. When the terminal device 120 matches the direction of the nominal access link, the reference signal forwarded in the most matching direction of the backhaul link has the best quality, that is, the reflection weight corresponding to the signal with the highest reception quality matches the channel. In this way, the network device 110 or the relay device 130 can obtain a relatively matching nominal backhaul link direction (or backhaul link component). If there is a deviation in the nominal access link, one or more matching nominal backhaul link beams (i.e., weight component φ BH,k ) can be determined through multiple measurements or measurement feedback from multiple different terminal devices. . In addition, if the terminal device 120 reports the measurement results to the network device 110, the network device 110 can notify the relay device 130 of the indication information corresponding to the determined return link component, for example, the weight component index; or, the network device 110 The measurement results are notified to the relay device 130. As such, relay device 130 may determine one or more suitable φ BH,k .
关于反射面的接入链路波束扫描可以参考上述描述,在此就不再赘述了。通过接入链路波束扫描,中继设备130(为反射面)可以确定一个或多个合适的φAC,kRegarding the access link beam scanning of the reflective surface, reference can be made to the above description and will not be described again here. Through access link beam scanning, relay device 130 (which is a reflective surface) can determine one or more suitable φ AC,k .
中继设备(例如,反射面)的波束扫描方式(也称为信号转发方式、信号反射方式、权值合成方式,或者其它类似等价意义的词)可以根据网络设备110的指示信息确定。波束扫描方式是指进行回传链路波束分量(或权值分量)扫描、进行接入链路波束分量(或权值分量)扫描。以反射面为例,根据扫描方式对应的指示信息、以及权值分量信息,可以确定出合成后的多个权值。The beam scanning mode (also called signal forwarding mode, signal reflection mode, weight synthesis mode, or other words with similar equivalent meanings) of the relay device (eg, reflective surface) can be determined according to the instruction information of the network device 110 . The beam scanning method refers to scanning the beam components (or weight components) of the backhaul link and scanning the beam components (or weight components) of the access link. Taking the reflective surface as an example, multiple combined weights can be determined based on the indication information corresponding to the scanning method and the weight component information.
可选地,其中接入链路的权值分量固定,基于多个回传链路的权值分量,合成多个权值;或者,其中回传链路的权值分量固定,基于多个接入链路的权值分量,合成多个权值。Optionally, the weight components of the access link are fixed, and multiple weights are synthesized based on the weight components of multiple backhaul links; or, the weight components of the backhaul links are fixed, and the weight components are synthesized based on the multiple access links. The weight components of the incoming link are combined into multiple weights.
在另一种实现方式中,还可以两个扫描方式结合多次迭代,不作限定。In another implementation manner, two scanning methods can also be combined with multiple iterations, without limitation.
当回传链路波束方向存在偏差时,回传链路波束方向的误差最终体现到接入链路波束方向。以下行为例,如果回传链路信号的真实方向来自最终的方向如图16中的(b)所示。When there is a deviation in the beam direction of the backhaul link, the error in the beam direction of the backhaul link is eventually reflected in the beam direction of the access link. The following behavior is an example, if the true direction of the backhaul link signal comes from The final direction is shown in (b) in Figure 16.
图16的(b)所示,网络设备110通过波束#A向中继设备130发送多个参考信号,例如,网络设备110通过波束#A发送RS0,通过波束#A发送RS1,…,通过波束#A发送RSK-1,中继设备130通过K个不同取值的φBH进行接收,例如,中继设备130通过反射权值#0接收RS0,通过反射权值#1接收RS1,…,通过反射权值#K-1接收RSK-1。参考信号的来向与中继设备130的φBH所指示的回传链路波束方向没有对准时,例如,RS0与反射权值#0中的分量φBH,0所指示的回传链路波束方向没有对准参考信号的来向,参考信号的实际入射方向与分量φBH,0所指示的回传链路波束方向之间存在误差。该误差最终会体现到接入链路,导致接入链路的实际信号反射方向与名义接入链路分量对应的波束方向相偏离。As shown in (b) of FIG. 16 , the network device 110 sends multiple reference signals to the relay device 130 through beam #A. For example, the network device 110 sends RS 0 through beam #A, sends RS 1 through beam #A, ..., RS K-1 is sent through beam #A, and the relay device 130 receives it through K φ BH with different values. For example, the relay device 130 receives RS 0 through reflection weight #0 and receives RS through reflection weight #1. 1 ,...,receive RS K-1 through reflection weight #K-1. When the direction of the reference signal is not aligned with the beam direction of the backhaul link indicated by φ BH of the relay device 130, for example, the backhaul link indicated by the component φ BH,0 in RS 0 and reflection weight #0 The beam direction is not aligned with the direction of the reference signal, and there is an error between the actual incident direction of the reference signal and the backhaul link beam direction indicated by component φ BH,0 . This error will eventually be reflected in the access link, causing the actual signal reflection direction of the access link to deviate from the beam direction corresponding to the nominal access link component.
具体来说,φ0对应的接入链路波束方向为:
Specifically, the access link beam direction corresponding to φ 0 is:
其中,用于指示实际信号入射方向的相位分量,其表达形式可参考φBH,0的形式。当中继设备130的名义回传链路波束方向对准了参考信号的来向,通过上述公式(3)所得到的φAC对应的实际接入链路波束方向与名义接入链路波束方向之间没有偏差;当中继设备130的名义回传链路波束方向没有对准参考信号的来向,实际的接入链路波束方向为:其与名义接入链路波束方向之间有偏差这会导致终端设备120可能无法接收到中继设备130转发的信号。in, The phase component used to indicate the actual signal incident direction, its expression can refer to the form of φ BH,0 . When the nominal backhaul link beam direction of the relay device 130 is aligned with the direction of the reference signal, the actual access link beam direction corresponding to the φ AC obtained by the above formula (3) is equal to the nominal access link beam direction. There is no deviation between; when the nominal return link beam direction of the relay device 130 is not aligned with the direction of the reference signal, the actual access link beam direction is: Deviation from the nominal access link beam direction This may cause the terminal device 120 to be unable to receive the signal forwarded by the relay device 130 .
因此,如果中继设备130的名义回传链路波束方向没有与网络设备110对准,名义回传链路波束方向与参考信号的来向之间的误差会导致实际信号反射方向与名义接入链路波束方向之间的偏离。例如,如图16的(a)与(b)所示,名义回传链路波束方向在图16的(a)所示的三个示意方向,名义接入链路波束方向在图16的(a)所示的三个方向。实际信号入射方向在图16的(b)所示的三个示意方向(实际信号入射方向不变),实际信号反射方向在图16的(b)所示的三个示意方向(其会受到名义回传链路波束方向与参考信号的来向之间的偏差的影响)。若名义回传链路波束方向与实际信号入射方向之间存在偏差,该偏差会最终体现在名义接入链路波束方向与实际信号反射方向之间的偏差之上。Therefore, if the nominal backhaul link beam direction of the relay device 130 is not aligned with the network device 110, the error between the nominal backhaul link beam direction and the direction of the reference signal will cause the actual signal reflection direction to be different from the nominal access direction. Deviation between link beam directions. For example, as shown in (a) and (b) of Figure 16, the nominal backhaul link beam direction is in the three schematic directions shown in (a) of Figure 16, and the nominal access link beam direction is in ((a) of Figure 16 a) the three directions shown. The actual signal incident direction is in the three schematic directions shown in Figure 16(b) (the actual signal incident direction remains unchanged), and the actual signal reflection direction is in the three schematic directions shown in Figure 16(b) (it will be affected by the nominal The effect of the deviation between the return link beam direction and the origin direction of the reference signal). If there is a deviation between the nominal backhaul link beam direction and the actual signal incident direction, the deviation will eventually be reflected in the deviation between the nominal access link beam direction and the actual signal reflection direction.
示例性地,中继设备130的反射权值#0中的名义回传链路波束方向没有与RS0的来向对准,反射权值#0中的名义接入链路波束方向与实际信号反射方向之间有偏差(见图16的(b)中的第一个示例),终端设备120所接收到的信号可能会很差;中继设备130的反射权值#K-1中的名义回传链路波束方向对准了RSK-1的来向,反射权值#K-1中的名义接入链路波束方向与实际信号反射方向之间没有偏差(见 图16的(b)的最后一个示例),终端设备120所接收到的信号可能会很好。For example, the nominal backhaul link beam direction in the reflection weight #0 of the relay device 130 is not aligned with the incoming direction of RS 0 , and the nominal access link beam direction in the reflection weight #0 is consistent with the actual signal. There is a deviation between the reflection directions (see the first example in (b) of Figure 16), the signal received by the terminal device 120 may be poor; the nominal reflection weight of the relay device 130 #K-1 The backhaul link beam direction is aligned with the direction of RS K-1 , and there is no deviation between the nominal access link beam direction in reflection weight #K-1 and the actual signal reflection direction (see (The last example of (b) of Figure 16), the signal received by the terminal device 120 may be very good.
当中继设备130的名义回传链路波束方向无法对准网络设备110时,中继设备130的名义接入链路波束方向也无法将网络设备110发送的信号转发给终端设备120。换言之,当中继设备130的名义回传链路波束方向与参考信号的来向之间存在偏差时,该偏差会体现在中继设备130的名义接入链路波束方向与实际信号反射方向之间的偏差之上,即:上述内容可以理解为中继设备130的名义回传链路波束方向与实际信号入射方向之间的偏差会体现在名义接入链路波束方向与实际信号反射方向之间的偏差之上。例如,中继设备130无法将网络设备110发送的参考信号转发给终端设备120。When the nominal backhaul link beam direction of the relay device 130 cannot be aligned with the network device 110, the nominal access link beam direction of the relay device 130 cannot forward the signal sent by the network device 110 to the terminal device 120. In other words, when there is a deviation between the nominal backhaul link beam direction of the relay device 130 and the origin direction of the reference signal, the deviation will be reflected in the nominal access link beam direction of the relay device 130 and the actual signal reflection direction. On top of the deviation, that is: the above content can be understood as the deviation between the nominal backhaul link beam direction and the actual signal incident direction of the relay device 130 will be reflected in the nominal access link beam direction and the actual signal reflection direction. above the deviation. For example, the relay device 130 cannot forward the reference signal sent by the network device 110 to the terminal device 120 .
实际中,可以通过名义上的回传链路、接入链路波束分离设计,简化反射面的权值设计,并实现与网络设备、与目标覆盖位置(或者目标覆盖区域,或者目标用户设备)对准。In practice, the weight design of the reflective surface can be simplified through the nominal beam separation design of the backhaul link and access link, and the matching with the network equipment and the target coverage location (or target coverage area, or target user equipment) can be achieved alignment.
可选地,上述的回传链路分量也可以理解为回传链路权值分量或者回传链路相位分量,接入链路分量可以理解为接入链路权值分量或者接入链路相位分量,本申请实施例不限定。Optionally, the above-mentioned return link component can also be understood as a return link weight component or a return link phase component, and the access link component can be understood as an access link weight component or an access link. The phase component is not limited in the embodiments of this application.
在本申请实施例中,回传链路权值分量与回传链路相位分量是等同的表达,接入链路权值分量与接入链路相位分量也是等同的表达。为便于描述,全文采用回传链路分量与接入链路分量进行描述,在此做统一说明,全文不再赘述。In the embodiment of the present application, the backhaul link weight component and the backhaul link phase component are equivalent expressions, and the access link weight component and the access link phase component are also equivalent expressions. For the convenience of description, the full text uses the backhaul link component and the access link component for description. They are uniformly explained here and will not be repeated in the full text.
S430、网络设备110向中继设备130发送配置信息T1,其用于配置波束集合Q1。S430. The network device 110 sends configuration information T1 to the relay device 130, which is used to configure the beam set Q1.
相应地,中继设备130接收网络设备110发送的配置信息T1。Correspondingly, the relay device 130 receives the configuration information T1 sent by the network device 110.
具体地,配置信息T1包括用于配置波束集合Q1的信息。Specifically, the configuration information T1 includes information for configuring the beam set Q1.
可选地,配置信息T1包括但不限于以下至少一项:Optionally, the configuration information T1 includes but is not limited to at least one of the following:
波束或波束集合的索引;Index of a beam or set of beams;
过采样参数;Oversampling parameters;
偏移值;offset value;
波束的权值生成信息;Beam weight generation information;
波束或波束集合对应的使用时间;The usage time corresponding to the beam or beam set;
波束或波束集合对应的扫描周期;以及,The scanning period corresponding to the beam or set of beams; and,
在扫描周期中的时隙和/或正交频分多路复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing,OFDM)符号位置等。The time slot and/or orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbol position in the scanning period, etc.
中继设备可以根据上述这些信息确定网络设备为中继设备配置的波束集合Q1,并根据被配置的波束集合Q1辅助网络设备与终端设备之间的通信。The relay device can determine the beam set Q1 configured by the network device for the relay device based on the above information, and assist communication between the network device and the terminal device according to the configured beam set Q1.
通过上述方式,本申请能够实现中继设备的回传链路波束方向与网络设备的来波方向对准,从而使得中继设备能够更好的辅助网络设备与终端设备之间的通信。Through the above method, this application can realize the alignment of the beam direction of the backhaul link of the relay device with the incoming wave direction of the network device, so that the relay device can better assist the communication between the network device and the terminal device.
可选地,该方法400还可以包括:Optionally, the method 400 may also include:
S440、网络设备110确定波束集合Q1的测量信息。S440. The network device 110 determines the measurement information of the beam set Q1.
具体地,波束集合Q1的测量信息可以是由网络设备110自行确定的,也可以是由终端设备130确定的,并向网络设备110上报的。Specifically, the measurement information of beam set Q1 may be determined by the network device 110 itself, or may be determined by the terminal device 130 and reported to the network device 110 .
在下行场景中,网络设备110可以通过中继设备130的波束集合Q1向终端设备120发送至少一个参考信号。其中,参考信号用于测量波束集合Q1中对应的波束(或者说:参考信号用于测量)。换言之,中继设备130可以通过波束集合Q1向终端设备120转发网络设备110发送的至少一个参考信号。In a downlink scenario, the network device 110 may send at least one reference signal to the terminal device 120 through the beam set Q1 of the relay device 130. The reference signal is used to measure the corresponding beam in the beam set Q1 (or in other words: the reference signal is used for measurement). In other words, the relay device 130 may forward at least one reference signal sent by the network device 110 to the terminal device 120 through the beam set Q1.
可选地,参考信号可以包括DMRS、CSI-RS、相位跟踪参考信号(phase tracking reference signal,PTRS)、SSB、跟踪参考信号(tracking reference signal,TRS)等。为便于描述,本申请实施例以参考信号为CSI-RS为例进行描述。Optionally, the reference signal may include DMRS, CSI-RS, phase tracking reference signal (PTRS), SSB, tracking reference signal (tracking reference signal, TRS), etc. For convenience of description, this embodiment of the present application takes the reference signal as CSI-RS as an example for description.
示例性地,波束集合Q1包括3个波束,分别是波束#q11、波束#q12以及波束#q13,每个波束可以分别用于传输一个CSI-RS。网络设备110通过中继设备130的波束集合Q1向终端设备120发送三个CSI-RS。例如,中继设备130通过三个不同的回传链路波束接收三个参考信号之后,可以通过同一个接入链路波束向终端设备120发送网络设备110发送的三个CSI-RS。其中,上述描述也可以理解为:网络设备110通过中继设备130的波束集合Q1向终端设备120发送至少一个CSI-RS,且由中继设备 130负责通过波束集合Q1向终端设备120转发网络设备110发送的至少一个CSI-RS。终端设备120接收到中继设备130转发网络设备110发送的三个CSI-RS之后,可以对三个CSI-RS进行测量,并向网络设备110上报该三个CSI-RS的测量信息。For example, the beam set Q1 includes three beams, namely beam #q11, beam #q12 and beam #q13, and each beam can be used to transmit one CSI-RS respectively. The network device 110 sends three CSI-RSs to the terminal device 120 through the beam set Q1 of the relay device 130. For example, after receiving three reference signals through three different backhaul link beams, the relay device 130 may send the three CSI-RSs sent by the network device 110 to the terminal device 120 through the same access link beam. The above description can also be understood as: the network device 110 sends at least one CSI-RS to the terminal device 120 through the beam set Q1 of the relay device 130, and the relay device 130 is responsible for forwarding at least one CSI-RS sent by the network device 110 to the terminal device 120 through the beam set Q1. After receiving the three CSI-RSs sent by the relay device 130 and forwarded by the network device 110, the terminal device 120 can measure the three CSI-RSs and report the measurement information of the three CSI-RSs to the network device 110.
测量信息可以承载在上行控制信息(uplink control information,UCI)中,通过物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel,PUCCH)或物理上行共享信道中(physical uplink shared channel,PUSCH)传输。Measurement information can be carried in uplink control information (UCI) and transmitted through the physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) or the physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH).
测量信息可以是信道状态信息。信道状态信息可以包括以下一个或者多个:参考信号接收质量(reference signal receiving quality,RSRQ),信噪比(signal-noise ratio,SNR),信号与干扰噪声比(signal to interference plus noise ratio,SINR),预编码矩阵指示(precoding matrix indicator,PMI)、发送预编码矩阵指示(transmitted precoding matrix indicator,TPMI)、秩指示(rank indicator,RI)、发送秩指示(transmitted rank indicator,TRI)、层指示(layer indicator,LI)、定时提前量(timing advance,TA)、AOA,AOD等。The measurement information may be channel state information. Channel state information may include one or more of the following: reference signal receiving quality (RSRQ), signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) ), precoding matrix indicator (precoding matrix indicator, PMI), transmitted precoding matrix indicator (transmitted precoding matrix indicator, TPMI), rank indicator (rank indicator, RI), transmitted rank indicator (transmitted rank indicator, TRI), layer indicator (layer indicator, LI), timing advance (timing advance, TA), AOA, AOD, etc.
在上行场景中,网络设备110可以接收中继设备130通过波束集合Q1向网络设备110转发终端设备120发送的至少一个参考信号。具体地,网络设备110所接收到的参考信号是由终端设备120向网络设备110发送的,且由中继设备130负责通过波束集合Q1进行转发。In the uplink scenario, the network device 110 may receive at least one reference signal sent by the terminal device 120 and forwarded by the relay device 130 to the network device 110 through the beam set Q1. Specifically, the reference signal received by the network device 110 is sent by the terminal device 120 to the network device 110, and the relay device 130 is responsible for forwarding it through the beam set Q1.
示例性地,波束集合Q1包括3个波束,分别是波束#q11、波束#q12以及波束#q13,每个波束可以分别用于传输一个CSI-RS。中继设备130通过波束集合Q1中的三个不同的波束向网络设备110转发终端设备120发送的三个CSI-RS。网络设备110接收到三个CSI-RS之后,可以对三个CSI-RS进行测量,并确定三个CSI-RS的测量信息。For example, the beam set Q1 includes three beams, namely beam #q11, beam #q12 and beam #q13, and each beam can be used to transmit one CSI-RS respectively. The relay device 130 forwards the three CSI-RSs sent by the terminal device 120 to the network device 110 through three different beams in the beam set Q1. After receiving the three CSI-RSs, the network device 110 can measure the three CSI-RSs and determine the measurement information of the three CSI-RSs.
具体来说,网络设备110可以通过下行测量方式或者上行测量方式确定波束集合Q1的测量信息。Specifically, the network device 110 may determine the measurement information of the beam set Q1 through a downlink measurement method or an uplink measurement method.
可选地,一个波束也可以用于传输多个参考信号。Optionally, one beam can also be used to transmit multiple reference signals.
可选地,该方法400还可以包括:Optionally, the method 400 may also include:
S450、网络设备110根据波束集合Q1的测量信息确定波束集合Q2。S450. The network device 110 determines the beam set Q2 based on the measurement information of the beam set Q1.
具体地,网络设备110可以根据其确定的波束集合Q1的测量信息确定波束集合Q2。例如,波束集合Q1的测量信息显示波束集合Q1中的波束#q11所传输的参考信号的强度低于波束#q12和波束#q13所传输的参考信号的强度,网络设备110可以去除波束集合Q1中的波束#q11,并保留波束#q12和波束#q13。因此,波束集合Q2就可以包括波束#q12和波束#q13。Specifically, the network device 110 may determine the beam set Q2 according to the measurement information of the beam set Q1 determined by it. For example, the measurement information of beam set Q1 shows that the strength of the reference signal transmitted by beam #q11 in beam set Q1 is lower than the strength of the reference signal transmitted by beam #q12 and beam #q13, the network device 110 can remove the reference signal from beam set Q1 of beam #q11, and retain beam #q12 and beam #q13. Therefore, the beam set Q2 may include beam #q12 and beam #q13.
可选地,波束集合Q1的测量信息显示波束集合Q1中的所有波束所传输的参考信号的强度均较低,网络设备110可以重新配置波束。相应地,波束集合Q2所包括的波束均不同于波束集合Q1。Optionally, the measurement information of the beam set Q1 shows that the strength of the reference signals transmitted by all beams in the beam set Q1 is low, and the network device 110 can reconfigure the beams. Correspondingly, the beams included in the beam set Q2 are all different from the beam set Q1.
在本申请实施例中,波束集合Q2不同于波束集合Q1,包括以下至少一项情况:波束集合Q2与波束集合Q1包括的波束数量不同,例如,波束集合Q1包括波束#q11、波束#q12和波束#q13,波束集合Q2包括波束#q11和波束#q12;也可以体现在波束集合Q1与波束集合Q2包括的对应波束不同,例如,波束集合Q1包括波束#q11、波束#q12和波束#q13,波束集合Q2包括波束#q21、波束#q22和波束#q23等等。In the embodiment of the present application, beam set Q2 is different from beam set Q1, including at least one of the following situations: beam set Q2 and beam set Q1 include different number of beams. For example, beam set Q1 includes beam #q11, beam #q12 and Beam #q13, beam set Q2 includes beam #q11 and beam #q12; it can also be reflected that the corresponding beams included in beam set Q1 and beam set Q2 are different, for example, beam set Q1 includes beam #q11, beam #q12 and beam #q13 , the beam set Q2 includes beam #q21, beam #q22, beam #q23 and so on.
综上,波束集合Q2包括至少一个不属于波束集合Q1的波束;或者,波束集合Q1包括至少一个不属于波束集合Q2的波束。To sum up, the beam set Q2 includes at least one beam that does not belong to the beam set Q1; or, the beam set Q1 includes at least one beam that does not belong to the beam set Q2.
可选地,中继设备130可以根据波束集合Q1辅助终端设备120与网络设备110之间的通信。Optionally, the relay device 130 may assist communication between the terminal device 120 and the network device 110 according to the beam set Q1.
中继设备130根据波束集合Q1辅助终端设备120与网络设备110之间的通信的过程,可以理解为:中继设备130根据波束集合Q1转发信号P或者数据,信号P或者数据可以是终端设备120向网络设备110发送的,并由中继设备130转发;也可以是网络设备110向终端设备120发送的,并由中继设备130转发。中继设备130的接入链路或回传链路的“发送”可以理解为“转发”,即中继设备130将接收到的信号转发出去。The process of the relay device 130 assisting the communication between the terminal device 120 and the network device 110 according to the beam set Q1 can be understood as: the relay device 130 forwards the signal P or data according to the beam set Q1, and the signal P or data may be the terminal device 120 It is sent to the network device 110 and forwarded by the relay device 130; it can also be sent by the network device 110 to the terminal device 120 and forwarded by the relay device 130. "Sending" of the access link or backhaul link of the relay device 130 can be understood as "forwarding", that is, the relay device 130 forwards the received signal.
一个可能的实现方式,信号P可以包括参考信号。参考信号用于波束管理,或用于信道估计,或辅助信号解调、检测等。参考信号可以包括DMRS、CSI-RS、相位跟踪参考信号(phase tracking reference signal,PTRS)、SSB、跟踪参考信号(tracking reference signal,TRS)等,本申请实施例不做限制。In one possible implementation, the signal P may include a reference signal. The reference signal is used for beam management, channel estimation, or auxiliary signal demodulation, detection, etc. The reference signal may include DMRS, CSI-RS, phase tracking reference signal (PTRS), SSB, tracking reference signal (tracking reference signal, TRS), etc., and is not limited in the embodiment of this application.
终端设备120可以通过中继设备130向网络设备110发送由终端设备120根据至少一个参考信号 确定的波束集合Q1的测量信息,中继设备130辅助该测量信息的发送。中继设备130接收该测量信息,并向网络设备110转发该测量信息。网络设备110接收该测量信息。The terminal device 120 may send the signal generated by the terminal device 120 according to at least one reference signal to the network device 110 through the relay device 130. The relay device 130 assists in sending the measurement information of the determined beam set Q1. The relay device 130 receives the measurement information and forwards the measurement information to the network device 110 . Network device 110 receives this measurement information.
具体来说,网络设备110可以根据波束集合Q1的测量信息为中继设备130配置相较于波束集合Q1更能对准网络设备110的波束集合Q2,如此,中继设备130可以根据波束集合Q2更好的辅助网络设备110与终端设备120之间的通信。Specifically, the network device 110 can configure the beam set Q2 for the relay device 130 according to the measurement information of the beam set Q1, which is better aligned with the network device 110 than the beam set Q1. In this way, the relay device 130 can configure the beam set Q2 according to the beam set Q2. Better assisting the communication between the network device 110 and the terminal device 120.
可选地,该方法400还可以包括:Optionally, the method 400 may also include:
S460、网络设备110向中继设备130发送配置信息T2,其用于配置波束集合Q2。S460. The network device 110 sends the configuration information T2 to the relay device 130, which is used to configure the beam set Q2.
相应地,中继设备130接收配置信息T2,并基于配置信息T2确定波束集合Q2。关于配置信息T2的描述可以参考配置信息T1的描述,在此不再赘述。Correspondingly, the relay device 130 receives the configuration information T2 and determines the beam set Q2 based on the configuration information T2. For description of the configuration information T2, please refer to the description of the configuration information T1, which will not be described again here.
波束集合Q2可以包括至少一个波束,其用于中继设备辅助网络设备110与终端设备120之间的通信,或者,用于中继设备130与网络设备110之间的通信。The beam set Q2 may include at least one beam used for the relay device to assist communication between the network device 110 and the terminal device 120, or for communication between the relay device 130 and the network device 110.
可选地,方法400还可以包括:Optionally, method 400 may also include:
S470,中继设备130根据波束集合Q2辅助终端设备与网络设备之间的通信。S470: The relay device 130 assists communication between the terminal device and the network device according to the beam set Q2.
中继设备130根据波束集合Q2辅助终端设备120与网络设备110之间的通信的过程,可以理解为是中继设备130根据波束集合Q2转发信号D或者数据,信号D或者数据可以是终端设备120向网络设备110发送的,并由中继设备130转发,也可以是网络设备110向终端设备120发送的,并由中继设备130转发。具体内容可以参考S404。The process of the relay device 130 assisting the communication between the terminal device 120 and the network device 110 according to the beam set Q2 can be understood as the relay device 130 forwarding the signal D or data according to the beam set Q2, and the signal D or data can be the terminal device 120 It may be sent to the network device 110 and forwarded by the relay device 130, or it may be sent by the network device 110 to the terminal device 120 and forwarded by the relay device 130. For specific content, please refer to S404.
一个可能的实现方式,信号D包括参考信号,参考信号用于波束管理,或用于信道估计,或辅助信号解调、检测等。参考信号可以包括DMRS、CSI-RS、PTRS、SSB、TRS等,本申请实施例不做限制。In a possible implementation, signal D includes a reference signal, which is used for beam management, channel estimation, or auxiliary signal demodulation, detection, etc. The reference signal may include DMRS, CSI-RS, PTRS, SSB, TRS, etc., which are not limited in the embodiment of this application.
在本申请实施例中,配置信息T1与配置信息T2可以由网络设备110配置并下发给中继设备130。配置信息T1与配置信息T2可以承载在物理广播信道(physical broadcast channel,PBCH)、剩余最小系统信息(remaining minimum system information,RMSI)、SIB1、SIB2、SIB3,媒体接入控制控制元素(media access control-control element,MAC-CE)、下行控制信息(down link control information,DCI)、无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)以及系统信息中的任意一项。In this embodiment of the present application, the configuration information T1 and the configuration information T2 can be configured by the network device 110 and delivered to the relay device 130 . Configuration information T1 and configuration information T2 can be carried on the physical broadcast channel (PBCH), remaining minimum system information (RMSI), SIB1, SIB2, SIB3, media access control element (media access control) -Control element, MAC-CE), downlink control information (DCI), radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) and any one of the system information.
一个可能的实现方式,中继设备130为反射面时,波束信息W2可以包括权值信息,其可以包括:回传链路分量与接入链路分量。In one possible implementation, when the relay device 130 is a reflective surface, the beam information W2 may include weight information, which may include: a backhaul link component and an access link component.
一个可能的实现方式,配置信息T1可以包括至少一个第一权值。其中,每个第一权值包括第一分量,其用于指示中继设备130的回传链路波束。In a possible implementation, the configuration information T1 may include at least one first weight. Wherein, each first weight includes a first component, which is used to indicate the backhaul link beam of the relay device 130 .
相应地,中继设备130可以根据第一分量确定中继设备130的回传链路波束。Accordingly, the relay device 130 may determine the backhaul link beam of the relay device 130 according to the first component.
具体来说,中继设备130为反射面时,反射面的权值可以包括回传链路波束对应的分量,网络设备110可以通过向中继设备130发送包括回传链路波束对应的分量;基于网络设备110下发的配置信息中包括的用于指示回传链路波束对应的分量的信息,中继设备130可以调整中继设备130的回传链路波束分量,且基于原有的接入链路波束分量,形成新的权值。从而使其回传链路与网络设备110对准(或者更加匹配),且接入链路分量朝向目标方向反射(与目标方向更加匹配)。Specifically, when the relay device 130 is a reflective surface, the weight of the reflective surface may include the component corresponding to the backhaul link beam, and the network device 110 may send the component including the component corresponding to the backhaul link beam to the relay device 130; Based on the information for indicating the components corresponding to the backhaul link beam included in the configuration information issued by the network device 110, the relay device 130 can adjust the backhaul link beam component of the relay device 130, and based on the original connection The incoming link beam components form new weights. This causes its backhaul link to be aligned with (or better match) the network device 110, and the access link components are reflected toward (better match) the target direction.
可选地,每个第一权值还包括第二分量,其用于指示中继设备130的接入链路波束。Optionally, each first weight further includes a second component, which is used to indicate the access link beam of the relay device 130 .
相应地,中继设备130可以根据第二分量确定中继设备130的接入链路波束。Accordingly, the relay device 130 may determine the access link beam of the relay device 130 according to the second component.
具体来说,通过将反射面的权值分成两部分,分别是回传链路波束对应的第一分量,以及接入链路波束对应的第二分量,如此,可以简化反射面的权值的设计形式。网络设备110下发的配置信息中包括用于指示回传链路波束对应的分量的信息,中继设备130可以基于该信息,调整中继设备130的回传链路波束分量,使其回传链路与网络设备110对准。另外,网络设备110下发的配置信息中包括的接入链路波束对应的分量,中继设备130还可以基于该分量,调整中继设备130的接入链路波束分量,使其接入链路与终端设备120对准。Specifically, by dividing the weight of the reflective surface into two parts, which are the first component corresponding to the backhaul link beam and the second component corresponding to the access link beam, the calculation of the weight of the reflective surface can be simplified. Design form. The configuration information issued by the network device 110 includes information indicating the components corresponding to the backhaul link beams. Based on this information, the relay device 130 can adjust the backhaul link beam components of the relay device 130 so that they can be backhauled. The link is aligned with network device 110 . In addition, based on the component corresponding to the access link beam included in the configuration information issued by the network device 110, the relay device 130 can also adjust the access link beam component of the relay device 130 to allow it to access the link. The road is aligned with the terminal device 120.
通过分别调整回传链路的第一分量和接入链路的第二分量,使得中继设备130在网络设备110和 终端设备120之间,实现信号反射(或转发),从而辅助通信。By respectively adjusting the first component of the backhaul link and the second component of the access link, the relay device 130 is connected between the network device 110 and Signal reflection (or forwarding) is implemented between terminal devices 120 to assist communication.
应理解,第一分量与第二分量可以分别存储。It should be understood that the first component and the second component may be stored separately.
可选地,第一分量与第二分量可以分别进行指示。Alternatively, the first component and the second component may be indicated separately.
一个可能的实现方式,前述的回传链路分量可以为第一分量的另一种替代称呼,接入链路分量也可以为第二分量的另一种替代称呼。为便于描述,前文主要以回传链路分量与接入链路分量为例进行描述,后文主要以第一分量与第二分量进行描述,但二者可以视为等同的含义。In one possible implementation, the aforementioned backhaul link component may be another alternative name for the first component, and the access link component may also be another alternative name for the second component. For the convenience of description, the previous description mainly takes the backhaul link component and the access link component as examples, and the following description mainly uses the first component and the second component, but the two can be regarded as having the same meaning.
一个可能的实现方式,配置信息T2可以包括至少一个第二权值。其中,第二权值包括第三分量,其用于指示中继设备130的回传链路波束。In a possible implementation, the configuration information T2 may include at least one second weight. Wherein, the second weight includes a third component, which is used to indicate the backhaul link beam of the relay device 130 .
相应地,中继设备130可以根据第三分量确定中继设备130的回传链路波束。Accordingly, the relay device 130 may determine the backhaul link beam of the relay device 130 according to the third component.
具体来说,中继设备130为反射面时,反射面的权值可以包括回传链路波束对应的分量,网络设备110可以通过向中继设备130发送回传链路波束对应的分量,基于网络设备110下发的配置信息T2中包括的回传链路波束对应的分量,中继设备130可以调整中继设备130的回传链路波束,且基于原有的接入链路波束分量,形成新的权值,从而使其回传链路与网络设备110对准(或者更加匹配),且接入链路分量朝向目标方向反射(与目标方向更加匹配)。Specifically, when the relay device 130 is a reflective surface, the weight of the reflective surface may include the component corresponding to the backhaul link beam, and the network device 110 may send the component corresponding to the backhaul link beam to the relay device 130, based on According to the component corresponding to the backhaul link beam included in the configuration information T2 issued by the network device 110, the relay device 130 can adjust the backhaul link beam of the relay device 130, and based on the original access link beam component, New weights are formed such that their backhaul links are aligned with (or better match) the network device 110 and the access link components are reflected toward (more closely match) the target direction.
可选地,每个第二权值还可以包括第四分量,其用于指示中继设备130的接入链路波束。Optionally, each second weight may also include a fourth component, which is used to indicate the access link beam of the relay device 130 .
相应地,中继设备130可以根据第四分量确定中继设备130的接入链路波束。Correspondingly, the relay device 130 may determine the access link beam of the relay device 130 according to the fourth component.
通过将反射面的权值分成两部分,分别是回传链路波束对应的第一分量,以及接入链路波束对应的第二分量,如此,可以简化反射面的权值的设计形式。网络设备110下发的配置信息T1中可以包括用于指示回传链路波束对应的分量的信息,中继设备130可以基于该信息调整中继设备130的回传链路波束分量,使其回传链路与网络设备110对准。另外,网络设备110下发的配置信息T1中包括用于指示接入链路波束对应的分量的信息,中继设备130还可以基于该信息调整中继设备130的接入链路波束,使其接入链路与终端设备120对准。By dividing the weight of the reflective surface into two parts, namely the first component corresponding to the backhaul link beam and the second component corresponding to the access link beam, the design form of the weight of the reflective surface can be simplified. The configuration information T1 issued by the network device 110 may include information indicating the components corresponding to the backhaul link beams, and the relay device 130 may adjust the backhaul link beam components of the relay device 130 based on this information to make them return. The transmission link is aligned with the network device 110. In addition, the configuration information T1 issued by the network device 110 includes information indicating the components corresponding to the access link beam. The relay device 130 can also adjust the access link beam of the relay device 130 based on this information. The access link is aligned with the terminal device 120.
上述的配置信息T1中包括用于指示回传链路波束或者接入链路波束的信息可以为指示信息,该指示信息可以用于指示分量;该信息还可以为分量本身(直接下发分量);也可以为该分量的索引信息(存储分量,并配置相应的索引);也还可以是其他的信息,本申请实施例不限定。The information included in the above configuration information T1 for indicating the backhaul link beam or the access link beam may be indication information, and the indication information may be used to indicate the component; the information may also be the component itself (directly delivered component) ; It can also be the index information of the component (storing the component and configuring the corresponding index); it can also be other information, which is not limited by the embodiments of this application.
通过分别调整回传链路的第一分量和接入链路的第二分量,使得中继设备130在网络设备110和终端设备120之间实现信号反射(或转发),从而辅助通信。By respectively adjusting the first component of the backhaul link and the second component of the access link, the relay device 130 implements signal reflection (or forwarding) between the network device 110 and the terminal device 120, thereby assisting communication.
应理解,第三分量与第四分量可以分别存储。It should be understood that the third component and the fourth component may be stored separately.
可选地,第三分量与第四分量可以分别进行指示。Optionally, the third component and the fourth component may be indicated separately.
一个可能的实现方式中,网络设备110可以根据中继设备130的控制模块1301的波束信息W1确定控制模块1301的权值R1,权值R1用于指示控制模块1301的波束。In a possible implementation, the network device 110 can determine the weight R1 of the control module 1301 based on the beam information W1 of the control module 1301 of the relay device 130, and the weight R1 is used to indicate the beam of the control module 1301.
具体地,控制模块1301的权值R1(可以理解为波束信息W1)可以表示为:
Specifically, the weight R1 of the control module 1301 (can be understood as the beam information W1) can be expressed as:
其中[·]T表示向量或矩阵的转置。本申请实施例以列向量为例进行描述,实际中可以基于矩阵、横向量来描述权值,不作限定。Where [·] T represents the transpose of a vector or matrix. The embodiments of this application are described using column vectors as an example. In practice, the weights can be described based on matrices and transversal quantities without limitation.
网络设备110可以基于控制模块1301的权值R1与转发模块1302的波束信息W2确定权值R2,权值R2用于指示波束集合Q1。其中,权值R2可以表示为:
The network device 110 may determine the weight R2 based on the weight R1 of the control module 1301 and the beam information W2 of the forwarding module 1302, where the weight R2 is used to indicate the beam set Q1. Among them, the weight R2 can be expressed as:
另外,反射面的接入链路波束的权值R3可以表示为:
In addition, the weight R3 of the access link beam on the reflective surface can be expressed as:
上述的Q可以为控制模块1301的天线阵列与转发模块1302的天线阵列之间的倍数。The above Q may be a multiple between the antenna array of the control module 1301 and the antenna array of the forwarding module 1302.
其中,WR2可以用于指示中继设备130的回传链路波束方向,WR3用于指示中继设备130的接入链路波束方向。Among them, WR2 may be used to indicate the beam direction of the backhaul link of the relay device 130, and WR3 may be used to indicate the beam direction of the access link of the relay device 130.
可选地,网络设备110可以根据权值R2和R3确定权值R4,即:
Optionally, the network device 110 may determine the weight R4 according to the weights R2 and R3, that is:
可选地,网络设备110可以向中继设备130发送权值R2,可以用于向中继设备130指示回传链路波束方向,从而可以使得中继设备130的回传链路波束方向对准网络设备110,也可以向中继设备130发送权值R4,这可以使得中继设备130的回传链路波束方向对准网络设备110。Optionally, the network device 110 can send the weight R2 to the relay device 130, which can be used to indicate the backhaul link beam direction to the relay device 130, so that the backhaul link beam direction of the relay device 130 can be aligned. The network device 110 may also send the weight R4 to the relay device 130, which may cause the backhaul link beam direction of the relay device 130 to be aligned with the network device 110.
上述的权值可以视为配置信息的一种具体实现方式,也可以基于上述的权值来确定相关的变型的实现方式。例如,为不同的权值元素配置索引,网络设备110可以向中继设备130发送索引,该索引用于确定上述的权值;又例如,与权值的构成相关的参数,网络设备110可以向中继设备130发送该参数,该参数用于中继设备130确定对应的权值。The above weight value can be regarded as a specific implementation method of the configuration information, and the implementation method of the relevant variant can also be determined based on the above weight value. For example, to configure indexes for different weight elements, the network device 110 can send the index to the relay device 130, and the index is used to determine the above-mentioned weight; for another example, for parameters related to the composition of the weight, the network device 110 can send The relay device 130 sends the parameter, and the parameter is used by the relay device 130 to determine the corresponding weight.
综上,网络设备110可以向中继设备130发送配置信息T3,该配置信息T3用于配置中继设备130的回传链路波束,该配置信息T3可以包括上述的权值、索引或者参数等具体信息,中继设备130可以基于网络设备110下发的配置信息T3来实现调整中继设备130的回传链路波束方向,从而使其与网络设备110对准。In summary, the network device 110 can send the configuration information T3 to the relay device 130. The configuration information T3 is used to configure the backhaul link beam of the relay device 130. The configuration information T3 can include the above-mentioned weights, indexes or parameters, etc. For specific information, the relay device 130 can adjust the beam direction of the backhaul link of the relay device 130 based on the configuration information T3 sent by the network device 110, so as to align it with the network device 110.
应理解,本申请实施例中的波束集合Q1与波束集合Q2可以分别对应于前述中的第一波束集合与第二波束集合,波束信息W1与波束信息W2分别对应于前述中的第一波束信息与第二波束信息,配置信息T1与配置信息T2可以分别对应于前述的第一配置信息与第二配置信息等。其中,上述的“第一”与“第二”等量词可以分别与前述内容中相应的内容进行匹配,在此就不再赘述了。It should be understood that the beam set Q1 and the beam set Q2 in the embodiment of the present application may respectively correspond to the aforementioned first beam set and the second beam set, and the beam information W1 and the beam information W2 respectively correspond to the aforementioned first beam information. With the second beam information, the configuration information T1 and the configuration information T2 may respectively correspond to the aforementioned first configuration information, second configuration information, etc. Among them, the above-mentioned quantifiers such as "first" and "second" can be matched with the corresponding content in the foregoing content, which will not be described again here.
以上描述了本申请实施例的方法实施例,下面对相应的装置实施例进行介绍。The method embodiments of the embodiments of the present application are described above, and the corresponding device embodiments are introduced below.
可以理解,方法实施例的描述与装置实施例的描述可以相互对应,因此,未描述的部分可以参见前面方法实施例。It can be understood that the description of the method embodiments and the description of the device embodiments may correspond to each other. Therefore, for parts not described, please refer to the previous method embodiments.
为了实现上述本申请实施例提供的方法中的各功能,终端、网络设备均可以包括硬件结构和/或软件模块,以硬件结构、软件模块、或硬件结构加软件模块的形式来实现上述各功能。上述各功能中的某个功能以硬件结构、软件模块、还是硬件结构加软件模块的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。In order to realize each function in the method provided by the above embodiments of the present application, both the terminal and the network device may include a hardware structure and/or a software module to implement the above functions in the form of a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module. . Whether one of the above functions is performed as a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution.
图17是本申请实施例中的中继设备的部分结构的示意图。图17中的(a)示出了控制器1710,存储器1720,天线阵列1730。其中,天线阵列1730包括存储器17301相器/模拟通道17302。Figure 17 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of a relay device in an embodiment of the present application. (a) in FIG. 17 shows the controller 1710, the memory 1720, and the antenna array 1730. Among them, the antenna array 1730 includes a memory 17301 and a phase converter/analog channel 17302.
在S310,中继设备130向网络设备110上报的波束信息W1可以使得网络设备110和中继设备130之间约定波束索引与波束之间的对应关系,或者波束索引和波束权值生成信息之间的对应关系。In S310, the beam information W1 reported by the relay device 130 to the network device 110 can enable the network device 110 and the relay device 130 to agree on the corresponding relationship between the beam index and the beam, or between the beam index and the beam weight generation information. corresponding relationship.
基于上述对应关系,可以在网络设备110和中继设备130两端存储波束/波束集合索引和波束/波束集合索引对应的波束信息(例如,波束信息是指QCL信息、覆盖范围、权值生成方式、权值、或者权值索引中的至少一项,本申请对此不做限制)。Based on the above corresponding relationship, the beam/beam set index and the beam information corresponding to the beam/beam set index can be stored at both ends of the network device 110 and the relay device 130 (for example, the beam information refers to QCL information, coverage, and weight generation method , weight, or at least one of the weight index, this application does not limit this).
示例地,存储器1720包含多组波束信息,包括波束信息1(存储于存储子单元17201中)和波束信息2(存储于存储子单元17202中)和其他在图中未示例的波束信息,每组波束信息分别对应一组中继设备的回传链路波束集合或者一组中继设备的回传链路波束。控制器1710用于确定波束信息,并将波束信息对应的波束权值作用于天线阵列1730。For example, the memory 1720 contains multiple sets of beam information, including beam information 1 (stored in the storage subunit 17201) and beam information 2 (stored in the storage subunit 17202) and other beam information not illustrated in the figure. Each group The beam information respectively corresponds to a set of backhaul link beams of a group of relay devices or a set of backhaul link beams of a group of relay devices. The controller 1710 is used to determine the beam information and apply the beam weight corresponding to the beam information to the antenna array 1730.
可选地,上述的波束信息1可以是回传链路分量,波束信息2可以是接入链路分量。如此,可以实现回传链路分量与接入链路分量的分别存储。在实际使用中,网络设备110可以分别通过接入链路分量和回传链路分量,确定出实际使用的权值。在此作为示例性描述,后续关于波束信息的描述也可以关联前述的权值分量等。Optionally, the above-mentioned beam information 1 may be a backhaul link component, and beam information 2 may be an access link component. In this way, separate storage of backhaul link components and access link components can be achieved. In actual use, the network device 110 can determine the actually used weight through the access link component and the backhaul link component respectively. As an exemplary description here, subsequent descriptions about beam information may also be associated with the aforementioned weight components and the like.
可选地,回传链路分量可以是接入链路分量的子集。此时,回传链路分量与接入链路分量可以基于相同的存储器中的波束信息来确定。如此,可以基于波束信息获取回传链路分量和接入链路分量,并最终确定出实际使用的权值。Alternatively, the backhaul link components may be a subset of the access link components. At this time, the backhaul link component and the access link component may be determined based on the beam information in the same memory. In this way, the backhaul link component and the access link component can be obtained based on the beam information, and the actual weight used is finally determined.
可选地,回传链路分量和接入链路分量都来自相同的存储器。如此,可以基于波束信息获取回传链路分量和接入链路分量,并最终确定出实际使用的权值。Optionally, both the backhaul link component and the access link component come from the same memory. In this way, the backhaul link component and the access link component can be obtained based on the beam information, and the actual weight used is finally determined.
基于这种方式,可以节省权值存储的空间,从而降低反射面的硬件需求,实现低成本。Based on this method, the space for weight storage can be saved, thereby reducing the hardware requirements of the reflective surface and achieving low cost.
波束权值可以分为数字权值和模拟权值,其中,数字权值用于作用数字通道(图中未示出),模拟权值用于作用于移相器17302。由于模拟权值从配置到生效有一定时延,因此权值可能提前配置,即天线阵列1730包括存储器17301,可以将存储器17301理解为中射频存储器,中继设备130的回传链 路需要改变波束(例如,波束扫描时)时,可以提前将波束的模拟权值配置到存储器17301中,以使得模拟权值在准确的时间生效,即可以使得波束的切换速度更快。The beam weights can be divided into digital weights and analog weights, where the digital weights are used to act on the digital channel (not shown in the figure), and the analog weights are used to act on the phase shifter 17302. Since there is a certain delay between the configuration and taking effect of the analog weights, the weights may be configured in advance. That is, the antenna array 1730 includes a memory 17301. The memory 17301 can be understood as a mid-range radio frequency memory and a backhaul chain of the relay device 130. When the path needs to change the beam (for example, during beam scanning), the simulation weight of the beam can be configured in the memory 17301 in advance, so that the simulation weight takes effect at the accurate time, that is, the beam switching speed can be made faster.
在一种可能的实现方式中,存储器1720中存储了每个中继设备130的回传链路波束索引和模拟波束索引的映射表格,如果有数字权值,存储器1720中还存储每个回传链路波束索引和数字波束索引的映射表格,存储器17301中存储了模拟波束索引和模拟权值的映射表格,或存储器17301中还存储了数字波束索引和数字权值的映射表格。即,控制器1710确定回传链路波束索引,则根据上述映射表格,确定该回传链路波束索引对应的模拟权值和数字权值,并将模拟权值和数字权值作用于天线阵列1730。In a possible implementation, the memory 1720 stores a mapping table of the backhaul link beam index and the analog beam index of each relay device 130. If there is a digital weight, the memory 1720 also stores each backhaul link. The mapping table of the link beam index and the digital beam index, the memory 17301 stores the mapping table of the analog beam index and the analog weight, or the memory 17301 also stores the mapping table of the digital beam index and the digital weight. That is, the controller 1710 determines the backhaul link beam index, determines the analog weight and digital weight corresponding to the backhaul link beam index according to the above mapping table, and applies the analog weight and digital weight to the antenna array. 1730.
图17中的(b)与(a)的区别在于将存储器1701替换为权值生成器17303,即在图17的(b)中,移相器/模拟通道的权值是由权值生成器17303确定的。The difference between (b) and (a) in Figure 17 is that the memory 1701 is replaced by the weight generator 17303, that is, in (b) of Figure 17, the weight of the phase shifter/analog channel is determined by the weight generator 17303 confirmed.
在一种可能的实现方式中,权值生成器1703将回传链路权值分量和接入链路权值分量进行乘积,形成实际权值,然后作用于反射阵元。In a possible implementation, the weight generator 1703 multiplies the backhaul link weight component and the access link weight component to form an actual weight, and then acts on the reflection array element.
在一种可能的实现方式中,权值生成器1703将回传链路权值的相位分量和接入链路权值的相位分量进行求和,形成实际权值的相位分量,然后作用于反射阵元。In a possible implementation, the weight generator 1703 sums the phase component of the backhaul link weight and the phase component of the access link weight to form a phase component of the actual weight, and then acts on the reflection Array element.
在一种可能的实现方式中,存储器1720中存储了每个中继设备回传链路波束索引和模拟波束索引(和/或权值生成信息)的映射表格,如果有数字权值,存储器1720中则还存储了每个中继设备回传链路波束索引和数字波束索引(和/或权值生成信息)的映射表格,权值生成器17303可以根据模拟波束索引(和/或权值生成信息)计算模拟权值,或权值生成器17303可以根据数字波束索引(和/或权值生成信息)计算数字权值。即控制器1710确定回传链路波束索引,则根据上述映射表格和权值生成器17303计算得到回传链路波束对应的模拟权值和数字权值,并将该模拟权值和数字权值作用于天线阵列1720。In a possible implementation, the memory 1720 stores a mapping table of each relay device's backhaul link beam index and the analog beam index (and/or weight generation information). If there is a digital weight, the memory 1720 The center also stores a mapping table of each relay device backhaul link beam index and digital beam index (and/or weight generation information). The weight generator 17303 can generate information) to calculate analog weights, or the weight generator 17303 may calculate digital weights based on the digital beam index (and/or weight generation information). That is, the controller 1710 determines the backhaul link beam index, then calculates the analog weight and digital weight corresponding to the backhaul link beam according to the above mapping table and the weight generator 17303, and uses the analog weight and digital weight Acts on antenna array 1720.
以图17的(a)为例,存储子单元17201可以存储波束a0,a1,…,ai-1等的信息,存储子单元17201可以存储波束b0,b1,…,bi-1等的信息,以此类推。Taking (a) of Figure 17 as an example, the storage subunit 17201 can store the information of the beams a0, a1,..., ai-1, etc., and the storage subunit 17201 can store the information of the beams b0, b1,..., bi-1, etc., And so on.
结合S430,网络设备110在时间t将配置信息T1配置给中继设备130,中继设备130在t0之前的时间t0-Δ,Δ>0,从存储器1720的存储子单元17201中,获取波束a0、波束a2等对应的权值(包括模拟权值和/或数字权值),且将该权值配置到存储器17301,其中,时间t在时间t0(或时间t0-Δ)之前。在t0时间,中继设备130的回传链路采取该权值对应的波束进行发送或接收信号。In conjunction with S430, the network device 110 configures the configuration information T1 to the relay device 130 at time t. The relay device 130 obtains the beam a0 from the storage subunit 17201 of the memory 1720 at the time t0-Δ, Δ>0 before t0. , beam a2, etc. corresponding weights (including analog weights and/or digital weights), and configure the weights to the memory 17301, where time t is before time t0 (or time t0-Δ). At time t0, the backhaul link of the relay device 130 uses the beam corresponding to the weight to send or receive signals.
进一步结合S430,网络设备110在时间t’将配置信息T1配置给中继设备130,中继设备130在t1之前的时间t1-Δ1,Δ1>0,从存储器1720的存储子单元17202中,获取波束b0对应的权值(包括模拟权值和/或数字权值),且将该权值配置到存储器17301,其中,时间t’在时间t1(或时间t1-Δ1)之前。在t1时间,中继设备130的回传链路采取该权值对应的波束进行发送或接收信号。Further combined with S430, the network device 110 configures the configuration information T1 to the relay device 130 at time t'. The relay device 130 obtains the configuration information T1 from the storage subunit 17202 of the memory 1720 at the time t1-Δ1 before t1, Δ1>0. The weight corresponding to beam b0 (including analog weight and/or digital weight) is configured into the memory 17301, where time t' is before time t1 (or time t1-Δ1). At time t1, the backhaul link of the relay device 130 uses the beam corresponding to the weight to send or receive signals.
本申请实施例对存储器1720中存储的波束信息的组数以及每个波束信息单元中存储的波束信息的组数不做限制。This embodiment of the present application does not limit the number of sets of beam information stored in the memory 1720 and the number of sets of beam information stored in each beam information unit.
可选地,除了可以用于存储波束信息之外,上述的存储器1720还可以用于分别存储回传链路波束对应的权值分量与接入链路波束对应的权值分量。在进行使用时,可以将两个权值分量合起来进行使用。Optionally, in addition to being used to store beam information, the above-mentioned memory 1720 can also be used to respectively store weight components corresponding to the backhaul link beam and weight components corresponding to the access link beam. When used, the two weight components can be used together.
图18是本申请实施例中的网络设备的部分结构的示意图。图18示出了控制器1810和存储器1820,其中,存储器1820包含多组波束信息(与中继设备130存储的波束信息对应),包括波束信息1(存储于存储子单元18201中)和波束信息2(存储于存储子单元18202中)和其他的在图中未示例的波束信息,每组波束信息分别对应了一组回传链路波束集合或者一组回传链路波束。控制器1810用于确定波束信息,并将波束信息对应的波束信息,作用于天线阵列。Figure 18 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of a network device in an embodiment of the present application. Figure 18 shows the controller 1810 and the memory 1820, where the memory 1820 contains multiple sets of beam information (corresponding to the beam information stored by the relay device 130), including beam information 1 (stored in the storage subunit 18201) and beam information 2 (stored in the storage subunit 18202) and other beam information not illustrated in the figure. Each set of beam information corresponds to a set of backhaul link beam sets or a set of backhaul link beams. The controller 1810 is used to determine the beam information and apply the beam information corresponding to the beam information to the antenna array.
本申请实施例对存储器1820中存储的波束信息的组数,以及每个波束信息单元中存储的波束信息的组数不做限制。This embodiment of the present application does not limit the number of sets of beam information stored in the memory 1820 and the number of sets of beam information stored in each beam information unit.
本申请实施例提供的方法可以单独使用,也可以结合使用,本申请实施例提供的各种实施方式可以单独使用,也可以结合使用,本申请对此不做限制。The methods provided in the embodiments of this application can be used alone or in combination. The various implementation methods provided in the embodiments of this application can be used alone or in combination. This application does not limit this.
本申请中术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况,其中A,B可以是单数 或者复数。另外,本文中字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系,但也可能表示的是一种“和/或”的关系,具体可参考前后文进行理解。The term "and/or" in this application is just an association relationship describing related objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, alone There are three cases of B, among which A and B can be singular Or plural. In addition, the character "/" in this article generally indicates that the related objects are an "or" relationship, but it may also indicate an "and/or" relationship. For details, please refer to the previous and later contexts for understanding.
本申请中,“至少一个项(个)“是指一项(个)或者多项(个),“至少两项(个)“以及“多项(个)”是指两项(个)或两项(个)以上。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a,b,或c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,b,c,a-b,a-c,b-c,或a-b-c,其中a,b,c可以是单个,也可以是多个。In this application, "at least one item (items)" refers to one item (items) or multiple items (items), "at least two items (items)" and "multiple items (items)" refer to two items (items) or Two or more items. "At least one of the following" or similar expressions thereof refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (items) or a plurality of items (items). For example, at least one of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, a-b, a-c, b-c, or a-b-c, where a, b, c can be single or multiple .
另外,图4中示意的执行主体仅为示例,该执行主体也可以是支持该执行主体实现图4所示方法的芯片、芯片系统、或处理器,本申请实施例不作限制。In addition, the execution subject illustrated in FIG. 4 is only an example. The execution subject may also be a chip, a chip system, or a processor that supports the execution subject to implement the method shown in FIG. 4 , which is not limited by the embodiments of this application.
可以理解的是,上述各个方法实施例中,由中继设备实现的方法和操作,也可以由可用于中继设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)实现,由网络设备实现的方法和操作,也可以由可用于网络设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)实现。It can be understood that in the above method embodiments, the methods and operations implemented by the relay device can also be implemented by components (such as chips or circuits) that can be used for the relay device, and the methods and operations implemented by the network device can also be implemented by the network device. Can be implemented by components (such as chips or circuits) that can be used in network equipment.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对发射端设备或者接收端设备进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。下面以采用对应各个功能划分各个功能模块为例进行说明。Embodiments of the present application can divide the transmitting end device or the receiving end device into functional modules according to the above method examples. For example, each functional module can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module. middle. The above integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software function modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiment of the present application is schematic and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. The following is an example of dividing each functional module according to each function.
图19是本申请实施例中的通信装置1900的示意图。通信装置1900可以用于执行上文方法实施例中的中继设备130所执行的动作,通信装置1900包括收发单元1910和处理单元1920。收发单元1910可以与外部进行通信,处理单元1920用于进行数据处理。收发单1910还可以称为通信接口或通信单元。Figure 19 is a schematic diagram of a communication device 1900 in an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 1900 may be used to perform the actions performed by the relay device 130 in the above method embodiment. The communication device 1900 includes a transceiver unit 1910 and a processing unit 1920. The transceiver unit 1910 can communicate with the outside, and the processing unit 1920 is used for data processing. The transceiver 1910 may also be called a communication interface or communication unit.
可选地,通信装置1900还可以包括存储单元,该存储单元可以用于存储指令或者和/或数据,该处理单元1920可以读取存储单元中的指令或者和/或数据。Optionally, the communication device 1900 may further include a storage unit, which may be used to store instructions and/or data, and the processing unit 1920 may read the instructions and/or data in the storage unit.
在一种设计中,通信装置1900可以为能够执行中继设备130功能的芯片或功能模块,并且发送对应输出,接收对应输入,收发单元1910用于执行上文方法实施例中的中继设备130的接收或发送的操作,处理单元1920用于执行上文方法实施例中的中继设备130除发送和接收之外的处理的操作。In one design, the communication device 1900 can be a chip or functional module capable of performing the functions of the relay device 130, and sends corresponding outputs and receives corresponding inputs. The transceiver unit 1910 is used to perform the relay device 130 in the above method embodiment. The processing unit 1920 is configured to perform the processing operations of the relay device 130 in the above method embodiment except for sending and receiving.
可选的,收发单元1910可以包括发送单元和接收单元。发送单元用于执行上述方法实施例中的发送操作。接收单元用于执行上述方法实施例中的接收操作。Optionally, the transceiver unit 1910 may include a sending unit and a receiving unit. The sending unit is used to perform the sending operation in the above method embodiment. The receiving unit is used to perform the receiving operation in the above method embodiment.
需要说明的是,通信装置1900可以包括发送单元,而不包括接收单元。或者,通信装置1800可以包括接收单元,而不包括发送单元。具体可以视通信装置执行的上述方案中是否包括发送动作和接收动作。It should be noted that the communication device 1900 may include a sending unit but not a receiving unit. Alternatively, the communication device 1800 may include a receiving unit instead of a transmitting unit. Specifically, it may depend on whether the above solution executed by the communication device includes a sending action and a receiving action.
在另一种设计中,通信装置1900可以为包括中继设备130的设备。或者,通信装置1900可以为配置在中继设备130中的部件,例如,中继设备130中的芯片。这种情况下,收发单元1910可以为接口电路、管脚等。具体地,接口电路可以包括输入电路和输出电路,处理单元1920可以包括处理电路。In another design, communication device 1900 may be a device including relay device 130. Alternatively, the communication device 1900 may be a component configured in the relay device 130, for example, a chip in the relay device 130. In this case, the transceiver unit 1910 may be an interface circuit, a pin, or the like. Specifically, the interface circuit may include an input circuit and an output circuit, and the processing unit 1920 may include a processing circuit.
示例性地,收发单元1910用于接收网络设备110发送的配置信息T1与配置信息T2。具体内容可以参考前述描述,在此不再赘述。Illustratively, the transceiver unit 1910 is configured to receive the configuration information T1 and configuration information T2 sent by the network device 110 . For specific content, please refer to the foregoing description and will not be repeated here.
图20是本申请实施例中的通信装置2000的结构示意图。通信装置2000包括处理器2010,处理器2010与存储器2020耦合,存储器2020用于存储计算机程序或指令和/或数据,处理器2010用于执行存储器2020存储的计算机程序或指令和/或数据,使得上文方法实施例中的方法被执行。Figure 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 2000 in an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 2000 includes a processor 2010. The processor 2010 is coupled to a memory 2020. The memory 2020 is used to store computer programs or instructions and/or data. The processor 2010 is used to execute the computer programs or instructions and/or data stored in the memory 2020, so that The methods in the above method embodiments are executed.
可选地,通信装置2000包括的处理器2010为一个或多个。Optionally, the communication device 2000 includes one or more processors 2010 .
可选地,如图20所示,通信装置2000还可以包括存储器2020。Optionally, as shown in Figure 20, the communication device 2000 may further include a memory 2020.
可选地,通信装置1900包括的存储器2020可以为一个或多个。Optionally, the communication device 1900 may include one or more memories 2020 .
可选地,存储器2020可以与处理器2010集成在一起,或者分离设置。Alternatively, the memory 2020 may be integrated with the processor 2010 or provided separately.
可选地,如图20所示,通信装置2000还可以包括收发器2030,收发器2030用于信号的接收和/或发送。例如,处理器2010用于控制收发器2030进行信号的接收和/或发送。Optionally, as shown in Figure 20, the communication device 2000 may also include a transceiver 2030, which is used for receiving and/or transmitting signals. For example, the processor 2010 is used to control the transceiver 2030 to receive and/or transmit signals.
作为一种方案,通信装置2000用于实现上文方法实施例中由网络设备110或通信设备执行的操作。 As a solution, the communication device 2000 is used to implement the operations performed by the network device 110 or the communication device in the above method embodiment.
例如,处理器2010用于实现上文方法实施例中由网络设备110或通信设备执行的处理相关的操作,收发器2030用于实现上文方法实施例中由网络设备110或通信设备执行的收发相关的操作。通信装置2000包括处理器2010,处理器2010与存储器2020耦合,存储器2020用于存储计算机程序或指令或者和/或数据,处理器2010用于执行存储器2020存储的计算机程序或指令和/或者数据,使得上文方法实施例中的方法被执行。For example, the processor 2010 is used to implement processing-related operations performed by the network device 110 or the communication device in the above method embodiment, and the transceiver 2030 is used to implement the transceiver performed by the network device 110 or the communication device in the above method embodiment. related operations. The communication device 2000 includes a processor 2010. The processor 2010 is coupled to a memory 2020. The memory 2020 is used to store computer programs or instructions and/or data. The processor 2010 is used to execute the computer programs or instructions and/or data stored in the memory 2020. The method in the above method embodiment is caused to be executed.
一种可能的实现方式,通信装置2000包括处理器2010,该处理器2010用于实现上文方法400由网络设备110内部执行的操作。In one possible implementation manner, the communication device 2000 includes a processor 2010, which is configured to implement the operations of the above method 400 performed internally by the network device 110.
可选地,通信装置2000包括的处理器2010为一个或多个。Optionally, the communication device 2000 includes one or more processors 2010 .
可选地,通信装置2000还可以包括存储器2020。Optionally, the communication device 2000 may further include a memory 2020.
可选地,通信装置2000包括的存储器2020可以为一个或多个。Optionally, the communication device 2000 may include one or more memories 2020 .
可选地,存储器2020可以与处理器2010集成在一起,或者分离设置。Alternatively, the memory 2020 may be integrated with the processor 2010 or provided separately.
可选地,通信装置2000还可以包括一个或多个收发器2030和/或通信接口,收发器2030和/或通信接口用于信号的接收和/或发送。例如,处理器2010用于控制收发器2030和/或通信接口进行信号的接收和/或发送。Optionally, the communication device 2000 may also include one or more transceivers 2030 and/or communication interfaces, which are used for receiving and/or transmitting signals. For example, the processor 2010 is used to control the transceiver 2030 and/or the communication interface to receive and/or send signals.
可选地,可以将收发器2030中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收模块,将收发器2030中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送模块,即收发器2030包括接收器和发送器。收发器有时也可以称为收发机、收发模块、或收发电路等。接收器有时也可以称为接收机、接收模块、或接收电路等。发送器有时也可以称为发射机、发射器、发射模块或者发射电路等。Alternatively, the devices used to implement the receiving function in the transceiver 2030 can be regarded as receiving modules, and the devices used to implement the transmitting function in the transceiver 2030 can be regarded as sending modules, that is, the transceiver 2030 includes a receiver and a transmitter. A transceiver may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver module, or a transceiver circuit. The receiver may also be called a receiver, receiving module, or receiving circuit. A transmitter can sometimes be called a transmitter, transmitter, transmit module or transmit circuit.
可选地,通信装置2000还可以包括一个或多个信号放大器,如果有多个信号放大器,则不同信号放大器对应不同的极化方向或者中继无线射频通道。在上行通信中,信号放大器用于将接收到的来自终端设备的信号放大,在下行通信中,信号放大器用于将接收到的来自网络设备的信号放大。Optionally, the communication device 2000 may also include one or more signal amplifiers. If there are multiple signal amplifiers, different signal amplifiers correspond to different polarization directions or relay wireless radio frequency channels. In uplink communication, the signal amplifier is used to amplify the signal received from the terminal device. In downlink communication, the signal amplifier is used to amplify the signal received from the network device.
作为一种方案,通信装置2000用于实现上文方法实施例中由网络设备110执行的操作。例如,处理器2010用于实现上文方法实施例中由网络设备110内部执行的操作,收发器2030用于实现上文方法实施例中由网络设备110执行的接收或发送的操作。As a solution, the communication device 2000 is used to implement the operations performed by the network device 110 in the above method embodiment. For example, the processor 2010 is used to implement the operations performed internally by the network device 110 in the above method embodiment, and the transceiver 2030 is used to implement the receiving or transmitting operations performed by the network device 110 in the above method embodiment.
图21是本申请实施例中的通信装置2100的结构示意图。通信装置2100包括逻辑电路2110以及输入/输出接口(input/output interface)2120。Figure 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 2100 in an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 2100 includes a logic circuit 2110 and an input/output interface 2120.
其中,逻辑电路2110可以为处理电路。逻辑电路2110可以耦合连接存储单元,调用存储单元中的指令,使得该通信装置可以实现本申请各实施例的方法和功能。输入/输出接口2120,可以为输入输出电路,将通信装置处理好的信息输出,或将待处理的数据或信令信息输入通信装置进行处理。Among them, the logic circuit 2110 may be a processing circuit. The logic circuit 2110 can be coupled to the storage unit and call instructions in the storage unit, so that the communication device can implement the methods and functions of various embodiments of the present application. The input/output interface 2120 may be an input/output circuit, which outputs information processed by the communication device, or inputs data or signaling information to be processed into the communication device for processing.
作为一种方案,通信装置2100用于实现上文各个方法实施例中由网络设备110执行的操作。As a solution, the communication device 2100 is used to implement the operations performed by the network device 110 in each of the above method embodiments.
例如,逻辑电路2110用于实现上文方法实施例中由网络设备110执行的处理相关的操作,如,图3所示实施例中的网络设备110执行的处理相关的操作,输入/输出接口2120用于实现上文方法实施例中由网络设备110执行的发送和/或接收相关的操作,如,图3所示实施例中的网络设备110执行的发送和/或接收相关的操作。For example, the logic circuit 2110 is used to implement the processing-related operations performed by the network device 110 in the above method embodiment, such as the processing-related operations performed by the network device 110 in the embodiment shown in Figure 3. The input/output interface 2120 It is used to implement the sending and/or receiving related operations performed by the network device 110 in the above method embodiment, such as the sending and/or receiving related operations performed by the network device 110 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 .
作为另一种方案,通信装置2100用于实现上文各个方法实施例中由中继设备130执行的操作。As another solution, the communication device 2100 is used to implement the operations performed by the relay device 130 in each of the above method embodiments.
例如,逻辑电路2110用于实现上文方法实施例中由中继设备130执行的处理相关的操作,如,图3所示实施例中的中继设备130执行的处理相关的操作,输入/输出接口2120用于实现上文方法实施例中由中继设备130执行的发送和/或接收相关的操作,如,图3所示实施例中的中继设备130执行的发送和/或接收相关的操作。For example, the logic circuit 2110 is used to implement the processing-related operations performed by the relay device 130 in the above method embodiment, such as the processing-related operations performed by the relay device 130 in the embodiment shown in Figure 3, input/output The interface 2120 is used to implement the sending and/or receiving related operations performed by the relay device 130 in the above method embodiment, such as the sending and/or receiving related operations performed by the relay device 130 in the embodiment shown in Figure 3. operate.
图22是本申请实施例的通信装置2200的示意框图。通信装置2200可以是网络设备110,也可以是芯片。该通信装置2200可以用于执行上述图3所示的方法实施例中由网络设110所执行的操作。Figure 22 is a schematic block diagram of the communication device 2200 according to the embodiment of the present application. The communication device 2200 may be the network device 110 or a chip. The communication device 2200 may be used to perform operations performed by the network device 110 in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 3 .
当通信装置2200是网络设备110时,例如为基站。图22示出了一种简化的基站结构示意图。基站包括2210部分、2220部分以及2230部分。2210部分主要用于基带处理,对基站进行控制等;2210部分通常是基站的控制中心,通常可以称为处理器,用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中网络设备侧的处理操作。2220部分主要用于存储计算机程序代码和数据。2230部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换;2230部分通常可以称为收发模块、收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等。 2230部分的收发模块,也可以称为收发机或收发器等,其包括天线2233和射频电路(图中未示出),其中射频电路主要用于进行射频处理。When the communication device 2200 is the network device 110, it is, for example, a base station. Figure 22 shows a simplified schematic structural diagram of a base station. The base station includes part 2210, part 2220 and part 2230. Part 2210 is mainly used for baseband processing, controlling the base station, etc. Part 2210 is usually the control center of the base station, which can usually be called a processor, and is used to control the base station to perform processing operations on the network device side in the above method embodiments. Part 2220 is mainly used to store computer program code and data. The 2230 part is mainly used for the transmission and reception of radio frequency signals and the conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals; the 2230 part can usually be called a transceiver module, a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc. The transceiver module of part 2230 can also be called a transceiver or a transceiver, etc., which includes an antenna 2233 and a radio frequency circuit (not shown in the figure), where the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for radio frequency processing.
可选地,可以将2230部分中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收机,将用于实现发送功能的器件视为发射机,即2230部分包括接收机2232和发射机2131。接收机也可以称为接收模块、接收器、或接收电路等,发送机可以称为发射模块、发射器或者发射电路等。Alternatively, the device used to implement the receiving function in part 2230 can be regarded as a receiver, and the device used to implement the transmitting function can be regarded as a transmitter, that is, part 2230 includes a receiver 2232 and a transmitter 2131. The receiver can also be called a receiving module, receiver, or receiving circuit, etc., and the transmitter can be called a transmitting module, transmitter, or transmitting circuit, etc.
2210部分与2220部分可以包括一个或多个单板,每个单板可以包括一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。处理器用于读取和执行存储器中的程序以实现基带处理功能以及对基站的控制。若存在多个单板,各个单板之间可以互联以增强处理能力。作为一种可选的实施方式,也可以是多个单板共用一个或多个处理器,或者是多个单板共用一个或多个存储器,或者是多个单板同时共用一个或多个处理器。Parts 2210 and 2220 may include one or more single boards, and each single board may include one or more processors and one or more memories. The processor is used to read and execute programs in the memory to implement baseband processing functions and control the base station. If there are multiple boards, each board can be interconnected to enhance processing capabilities. As an optional implementation, multiple single boards may share one or more processors, or multiple single boards may share one or more memories, or multiple single boards may share one or more processors at the same time. device.
例如,在一种实现方式中,2230部分的收发模块用于执行图3所示实施例中由网络设备110执行的收发相关的过程。2210部分的处理器用于执行图3所示实施例中由网络设备110执行的处理相关的过程。For example, in one implementation, the transceiver module of part 2230 is used to perform transceiver-related processes performed by the network device 110 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 . The processor of part 2210 is used to perform processing-related processes performed by the network device 110 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 .
另一种实现方式中,2210部分的处理器用于执行图3所示实施例中由通信设备执行的处理相关的过程。In another implementation, the processor of part 2210 is used to perform processing-related processes performed by the communication device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 .
另一种实现方式中,2230部分的收发模块用于执行图3所示实施例中由通信设备执行的收发相关的过程。In another implementation, the transceiver module of part 2230 is used to perform transceiver-related processes performed by the communication device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 .
应理解,图22仅为示例而非限定,上述所包括的处理器、存储器以及收发器的网络设备可以不依赖于图16至图21所示的结构。It should be understood that FIG. 22 is only an example and not a limitation, and the network equipment including the processor, memory and transceiver mentioned above may not rely on the structure shown in FIGS. 16 to 21 .
当通信装置2200为芯片时,该芯片包括收发器、存储器和处理器。收发器可以是输入输出电路、通信接口;处理器为该芯片上集成的处理器、或者微处理器、或者集成电路。上述方法实施例中网络设备110的发送操作可以理解为芯片的输出,上述方法实施例中网络设备110的接收操作可以理解为芯片的输入。When the communication device 2200 is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver, a memory, and a processor. The transceiver may be an input-output circuit or a communication interface; the processor may be a processor, a microprocessor, or an integrated circuit integrated on the chip. The sending operation of the network device 110 in the above method embodiment can be understood as the output of the chip, and the receiving operation of the network device 110 in the above method embodiment can be understood as the input of the chip.
应理解,上述的通信装置可以是一个或多个芯片。例如,该通信装置可以是现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA),可以是专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC),还可以是系统芯片(system on chip,SoC),还可以是中央处理器(central processor unit,CPU),还可以是网络处理器(network processor,NP),还可以是数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor,DSP),还可以是微控制器(micro controller unit,MCU),还可以是可编程控制器(programmable logic device,PLD)或其他集成芯片。It should be understood that the above-mentioned communication device may be one or more chips. For example, the communication device can be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a system on chip (SoC), or It can be a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), a digital signal processing circuit (DSP), or a microcontroller unit , MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chip.
在实现过程中,上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。为避免重复,这里不再详细描述。During the implementation process, each step of the above method can be completed by instructions in the form of hardware integrated logic circuits or software in the processor. The steps of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application can be directly implemented by a hardware processor for execution, or can be executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor. The software module can be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other mature storage media in this field. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
本申请实施例中的处理器可以是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、DSP、ASIC、FPGA或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。The processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities. During the implementation process, each step of the above method embodiment can be completed through an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor or instructions in the form of software. The above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, DSP, ASIC, FPGA or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic device, or discrete hardware component. Each method, step and logical block diagram disclosed in the embodiment of this application can be implemented or executed. A general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor, etc.
结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。The steps of the method disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application can be directly implemented by a hardware decoding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor. The software module can be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other mature storage media in this field. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
可以理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取 存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。应注意,本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It can be understood that the memory in the embodiment of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memories. Among them, the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable ROM (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), electrically removable memory. Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. Volatile memory can be random access Memory (random access memory, RAM), which is used as an external cache. By way of illustration, but not limitation, many forms of RAM are available, such as static random access memory (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous link dynamic random access memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) ) and direct memory bus random access memory (direct rambus RAM, DR RAM). It should be noted that the memory of the systems and methods described herein is intended to include, without limitation, these and any other suitable types of memory.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机可读介质,该计算机可读介质存储有程序代码,当该程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图3或图11所示实施例的方法。例如,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,使得该计算机可以实现上述方法实施例中由网络设备执行的方法,或由中继设备执行的方法。According to the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the present application also provides a computer-readable medium. The computer-readable medium stores program code. When the program code is run on a computer, it causes the computer to execute the steps shown in Figure 3 or Figure 11. Example methods. For example, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method executed by the network device in the above method embodiment, or the method executed by the relay device.
本申请实施例还提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,该指令被计算机执行时使得该计算机实现上述方法实施例中由网络设备执行的方法,或由中继设备执行的方法。Embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product containing instructions. When the instructions are executed by a computer, the computer implements the method executed by the network device or the method executed by the relay device in the above method embodiment.
本申请实施例还提供一种通信系统,该通信系统包括网络设备和中继设备,该网络设备用于实现上述方法实施例中由网络设备执行的方法,该中继设备用于实现上述方法实施例中由中继设备执行的方法。Embodiments of the present application also provide a communication system. The communication system includes a network device and a relay device. The network device is used to implement the method performed by the network device in the above method embodiment. The relay device is used to implement the above method. Method performed by the relay device in the example.
上述提供的任一种通信装置中相关内容的解释及有益效果均可参考上文提供的对应的方法实施例,此处不再赘述。For explanations of relevant content and beneficial effects in any of the communication devices provided above, please refer to the corresponding method embodiments provided above, and will not be described again here.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站的站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站的站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,高密度数字视频光盘(digital video disc,DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如,固态硬盘(solid state disc,SSD))等。In the above embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. The computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another, e.g., the computer instructions may be transferred from a website, computer, server or data The center transmits to another website's site, computer, server or data center through wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means. The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. that contains one or more available media integrated. The usable media may be magnetic media (e.g., floppy disks, hard disks, tapes), optical media (e.g., high-density digital video discs (DVD)), or semiconductor media (e.g., solid state disks, SSD)) etc.
上述各个装置实施例中的网络设备,中继设备与方法实施例中的网络设备,中继设备对应,由相应的模块或单元执行相应的步骤,例如通信单元(收发器)执行方法实施例中接收或发送的步骤,除发送、接收外的其它步骤可以由处理单元(处理器)执行。具体单元的功能可以参考相应的方法实施例。其中,处理器可以为一个或多个。The network equipment and relay equipment in each of the above apparatus embodiments correspond to the network equipment and relay equipment in the method embodiments, and the corresponding steps are performed by corresponding modules or units. For example, the communication unit (transceiver) performs the corresponding steps in the method embodiments. The step of receiving or sending, other steps except sending and receiving may be executed by the processing unit (processor). For the functions of specific units, please refer to the corresponding method embodiments. There can be one or more processors.
在本说明书中使用的术语“部件”、“模块”、“系统”等用于表示计算机相关的实体、硬件、固件、硬件和软件的组合、软件、或执行中的软件。例如,部件可以是但不限于,在处理器上运行的进程、处理器、对象、可执行文件、执行线程、程序和/或计算机。通过图示,在计算设备上运行的应用和计算设备都可以是部件。一个或多个部件可驻留在进程和/或执行线程中,部件可位于一个计算机上和/或分布在两个或更多个计算机之间。此外,这些部件可从在上面存储有各种数据结构的各种计算机可读介质执行。部件可例如根据具有一个或多个数据分组(例如来自与本地系统、分布式系统和/或网络间的另一部件交互的二个部件的数据,例如通过信号与其它系统交互的互联网)的信号通过本地和/或远程进程来通信。The terms "component", "module", "system", etc. used in this specification are used to refer to computer-related entities, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution. For example, a component may be, but is not limited to, a process, a processor, an object, an executable file, a thread of execution, a program and/or a computer running on a processor. Through the illustrations, both applications running on the computing device and the computing device may be components. One or more components can reside in a process and/or thread of execution and a component can be localized on one computer and/or distributed between two or more computers. Additionally, these components can execute from various computer-readable media having various data structures stored thereon. A component may, for example, be based on a signal having one or more data packets (eg, data from two components interacting with another component, a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet, which interacts with other systems via signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the units and algorithm steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented with electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each specific application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。 Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that for the convenience and simplicity of description, the specific working processes of the systems, devices and units described above can be referred to the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments, and will not be described again here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple units or components may be combined or can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented. On the other hand, the coupling or direct coupling or communication connection between each other shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of the devices or units may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application can be integrated into one processing unit, each unit can exist physically alone, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有的方案做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the functions are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application is essentially or contributes to the existing solution or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, It includes several instructions to cause a computer device (which can be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of this application. The aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code. .
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。 The above are only specific embodiments of the present application, but the protection scope of the present application is not limited thereto. Any person familiar with the technical field can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in the present application. should be covered by the protection scope of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of this application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (46)

  1. 一种波束管理的方法,其特征在于,包括:A beam management method, characterized by including:
    网络设备接收中继设备发送的第一波束信息;The network device receives the first beam information sent by the relay device;
    所述网络设备根据所述第一波束信息与第二波束信息确定第一波束集合,所述第一波束集合中的波束用于所述中继设备转发所述网络设备或者终端设备发送的参考信号,所述第二波束信息是所述中继设备上报的或者预配置的;The network device determines a first beam set based on the first beam information and the second beam information. The beams in the first beam set are used by the relay device to forward the reference signal sent by the network device or terminal device. , the second beam information is reported by the relay device or preconfigured;
    所述网络设备向所述中继设备发送第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于配置所述第一波束集合。The network device sends first configuration information to the relay device, where the first configuration information is used to configure the first beam set.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 1, further comprising:
    所述网络设备确定所述第一波束集合的测量信息;The network device determines measurement information of the first beam set;
    所述网络设备向所述中继设备发送第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息用于配置第二波束集合,所述第二波束集合是所述网络设备根据所述测量信息确定的。The network device sends second configuration information to the relay device, where the second configuration information is used to configure a second beam set, and the second beam set is determined by the network device based on the measurement information.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备确定所述第一波束集合的测量信息,包括:The method according to claim 2, characterized in that the network device determines the measurement information of the first beam set, including:
    所述网络设备通过所述中继设备的所述第一波束集合向终端设备发送至少一个参考信号;The network device sends at least one reference signal to the terminal device through the first beam set of the relay device;
    所述网络设备接收所述中继设备转发的测量信息,所述测量信息是所述终端设备根据所述中继设备转发的所述至少一个参考信号确定的;或者,The network device receives the measurement information forwarded by the relay device, and the measurement information is determined by the terminal device based on the at least one reference signal forwarded by the relay device; or,
    所述网络设备接收通过所述中继设备的所述第一波束集合转发的至少一个参考信号,所述至少一个参考信号是终端设备向所述网络设备发送的;The network device receives at least one reference signal forwarded through the first beam set of the relay device, and the at least one reference signal is sent by a terminal device to the network device;
    所述网络设备根据所述至少一个参考信号确定所述测量信息。The network device determines the measurement information based on the at least one reference signal.
  4. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一波束信息是所述中继设备的控制模块确定的,所述第二波束信息是所述中继设备的转发模块的信息。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, characterized in that the first beam information is determined by the control module of the relay device, and the second beam information is determined by the control module of the relay device. Forward module information.
  5. 根据权利要求1至4中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, characterized in that,
    所述第一波束信息包括所述中继设备与所述网络设备之间的波束方向信息;The first beam information includes beam direction information between the relay device and the network device;
    所述第二波束信息包括以下至少一项:The second beam information includes at least one of the following:
    波束的数量信息,波束的准共址信息,波束的覆盖范围信息,波束之间的相对关系,波束集合的数量信息,波束集合的准共址信息,波束集合的覆盖范围信息,波束集合之间的相对关系,波束索引与权值之间的对应关系,波束索引与波束之间的对应关系,天线阵列信息,权值生成信息,或者,天线信息。Quantity information of beams, quasi-co-location information of beams, coverage information of beams, relative relationship between beams, quantity information of beam sets, quasi-co-location information of beam sets, coverage information of beam sets, between beam sets The relative relationship, the corresponding relationship between the beam index and the weight, the corresponding relationship between the beam index and the beam, the antenna array information, the weight generation information, or the antenna information.
  6. 根据权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息包括至少一个第一权值,所述至少一个第一权值中的每个第一权值包括第一分量,所述第一分量用于指示所述中继设备的回传链路波束。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, characterized in that the first configuration information includes at least one first weight, and each first weight in the at least one first weight includes The first component is used to indicate the backhaul link beam of the relay device.
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述每个第一权值还包括第二分量,所述第二分量用于指示所述中继设备的接入链路波束。The method of claim 6, wherein each first weight further includes a second component, and the second component is used to indicate an access link beam of the relay device.
  8. 根据权利要求2至7中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二配置信息包括至少一个第二权值,所述至少一个第二权值中的每个第二权值包括第三分量,所述第三分量用于指示所述中继设备的回传链路波束。The method according to any one of claims 2 to 7, characterized in that the second configuration information includes at least one second weight, and each second weight in the at least one second weight includes The third component is used to indicate the backhaul link beam of the relay device.
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述每个第二权值包括第四分量,所述第四分量用于指示所述中继设备的接入链路波束。The method according to claim 8, characterized in that each of the second weights includes a fourth component, and the fourth component is used to indicate an access link beam of the relay device.
  10. 根据权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一波束信息对应于所述中继设备的第一天线,所述第二波束信息对应于所述中继设备的第二天线。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 9, characterized in that the first beam information corresponds to the first antenna of the relay device, and the second beam information corresponds to the relay device the second antenna.
  11. 一种波束管理的方法,其特征在于,包括:A beam management method, characterized by including:
    中继设备向网络设备发送第一波束信息;The relay device sends the first beam information to the network device;
    所述中继设备接收所述网络设备发送的第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于配置第一波束集合,所述第一波束集合中的波束用于所述中继设备转发所述网络设备或者终端设备发送的参考信号,The relay device receives the first configuration information sent by the network device, the first configuration information is used to configure a first beam set, and the beams in the first beam set are used by the relay device to forward the Reference signals sent by network equipment or terminal equipment,
    所述第一波束集合是所述网络设备根据所述第一波束信息与第二波束信息确定的; The first beam set is determined by the network device based on the first beam information and the second beam information;
    其中,所述第二波束信息是所述中继设备上报的或者预配置的。Wherein, the second beam information is reported by the relay device or preconfigured.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 11, characterized in that, the method further includes:
    所述中继设备通过所述第一波束集合向终端设备转发所述网络设备发送的至少一个参考信号;The relay device forwards at least one reference signal sent by the network device to the terminal device through the first beam set;
    所述中继设备向所述网络设备发送所述第一波束集合的测量信息,所述测量信息是所述终端设备根据所述至少一个参考信号确定的。The relay device sends measurement information of the first beam set to the network device, where the measurement information is determined by the terminal device based on the at least one reference signal.
  13. 根据权利要求11或12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 11 or 12, characterized in that, the method further includes:
    所述中继设备通过所述第一波束集合向所述网络设备转发终端设备发送的至少一个参考信号,所述参考信号用于测量。The relay device forwards at least one reference signal sent by the terminal device to the network device through the first beam set, and the reference signal is used for measurement.
  14. 根据权利要求11至13中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 11 to 13, characterized in that the method further includes:
    所述中继设备接收所述网络设备发送的第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息用于配置第二波束集合,所述第二波束集合是所述网络设备根据所述第一波束集合的测量信息确定的。The relay device receives the second configuration information sent by the network device. The second configuration information is used to configure a second beam set. The second beam set is the configuration of the network device according to the first beam set. determined by measurement information.
  15. 根据权利要求11至14中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一波束信息对应于所述中继设备的第一天线,所述第二波束信息对应于所述中继设备的第二天线。The method according to any one of claims 11 to 14, characterized in that the first beam information corresponds to the first antenna of the relay device, and the second beam information corresponds to the relay device the second antenna.
  16. 根据权利要求11至15中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一波束信息包括所述中继设备与所述网络设备之间的波束方向信息;The method according to any one of claims 11 to 15, wherein the first beam information includes beam direction information between the relay device and the network device;
    所述第二波束信息包括以下至少一项:The second beam information includes at least one of the following:
    波束的数量信息,Information about the number of beams,
    波束的准共址信息,quasi-co-location information for beams,
    波束的覆盖范围信息,Beam coverage information,
    波束之间的相对关系,relative relationship between beams,
    波束集合的数量信息,Information about the number of beam sets,
    波束集合的准共址信息,Quasi-co-location information for beam sets,
    波束集合的覆盖范围信息,coverage information of the beam set,
    波束集合之间的相对关系,The relative relationship between beam sets,
    波束索引与权值之间的对应关系,The correspondence between beam index and weight,
    波束索引与波束之间的对应关系,The correspondence between beam index and beam,
    天线阵列信息,antenna array information,
    权值生成信息,或者,weight generation information, or,
    天线信息。Antenna information.
  17. 根据权利要求11至16中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息包括至少一个第一权值,所述至少一个第一权值中的每个第一权值包括第一分量,所述第一分量用于指示所述中继设备的回传链路波束。The method according to any one of claims 11 to 16, characterized in that the first configuration information includes at least one first weight, and each first weight in the at least one first weight includes The first component is used to indicate the backhaul link beam of the relay device.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述每个第一权值还包括第二分量,所述第二分量用于指示所述中继设备的接入链路波束。The method according to claim 17, characterized in that each of the first weights further includes a second component, and the second component is used to indicate an access link beam of the relay device.
  19. 根据权利要求11至18中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二配置信息包括至少一个第二权值,所述至少一个第二权值中的每个第二权值包括第三分量,所述第三分量用于指示所述中继设备的回传链路波束。The method according to any one of claims 11 to 18, characterized in that the second configuration information includes at least one second weight, and each second weight in the at least one second weight includes The third component is used to indicate the backhaul link beam of the relay device.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,所述每个第二权值包括第四分量,所述第四分量用于指示所述中继设备的接入链路波束。The method according to claim 19, characterized in that each of the second weights includes a fourth component, and the fourth component is used to indicate an access link beam of the relay device.
  21. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized by including:
    收发单元,用于接收中继设备发送的第一波束信息;A transceiver unit, configured to receive the first beam information sent by the relay device;
    处理单元,用于根据所述第一波束信息与第二波束信息确定第一波束集合,所述第一波束集合中的波束用于所述中继设备转发所述通信装置或者终端设备发送的参考信号,所述第二波束信息是所述中继设备上报的或者预配置的;A processing unit configured to determine a first beam set according to the first beam information and the second beam information. The beams in the first beam set are used by the relay device to forward the reference sent by the communication device or terminal device. signal, the second beam information is reported or preconfigured by the relay device;
    所述收发单元,还用于向所述中继设备发送第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于配置所述第一波束集合。The transceiver unit is further configured to send first configuration information to the relay device, where the first configuration information is used to configure the first beam set.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的装置,其特征在于, The device according to claim 21, characterized in that:
    所述处理单元,还用于确定所述第一波束集合的测量信息;The processing unit is also used to determine the measurement information of the first beam set;
    所述收发单元,还用于向所述中继设备发送第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息用于配置第二波束集合,所述第二波束集合是所述通信装置根据所述测量信息确定的。The transceiver unit is also configured to send second configuration information to the relay device. The second configuration information is used to configure a second beam set. The second beam set is the communication device's configuration according to the measurement information. definite.
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to claim 22, characterized in that:
    所述收发单元,还用于通过所述中继设备的所述第一波束集合向终端设备发送至少一个参考信号;The transceiver unit is further configured to send at least one reference signal to the terminal device through the first beam set of the relay device;
    所述收发单元,还用于接收所述中继设备转发的测量信息,所述测量信息是所述终端设备根据所述中继设备转发的所述至少一个参考信号确定的;或者,The transceiver unit is also configured to receive measurement information forwarded by the relay device, where the measurement information is determined by the terminal device based on the at least one reference signal forwarded by the relay device; or,
    所述收发单元,还用于接收通过所述中继设备的所述第一波束集合转发的至少一个参考信号,所述至少一个参考信号是终端设备向所述通信装置发送的;The transceiver unit is also configured to receive at least one reference signal forwarded through the first beam set of the relay device, where the at least one reference signal is sent by the terminal device to the communication device;
    所述处理单元,还用于根据所述至少一个参考信号确定所述测量信息。The processing unit is also configured to determine the measurement information according to the at least one reference signal.
  24. 根据权利要求21至23中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一波束信息是所述中继设备的控制模块确定的,所述第二波束信息是所述中继设备的转发模块的信息。The device according to any one of claims 21 to 23, characterized in that the first beam information is determined by the control module of the relay device, and the second beam information is determined by the control module of the relay device. Forward module information.
  25. 根据权利要求21至24中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to any one of claims 21 to 24, characterized in that:
    所述第一波束信息包括所述中继设备与所述通信装置之间的波束方向信息;The first beam information includes beam direction information between the relay device and the communication device;
    所述第二波束信息包括以下至少一项:The second beam information includes at least one of the following:
    波束的数量信息,波束的准共址信息,波束的覆盖范围信息,波束之间的相对关系,波束集合的数量信息,波束集合的准共址信息,波束集合的覆盖范围信息,波束集合之间的相对关系,波束索引与权值之间的对应关系,波束索引与波束之间的对应关系,天线阵列信息,权值生成信息,或者,天线信息。Quantity information of beams, quasi-co-location information of beams, coverage information of beams, relative relationship between beams, quantity information of beam sets, quasi-co-location information of beam sets, coverage information of beam sets, between beam sets The relative relationship, the corresponding relationship between the beam index and the weight, the corresponding relationship between the beam index and the beam, the antenna array information, the weight generation information, or the antenna information.
  26. 根据权利要求21至25中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息包括至少一个第一权值,所述至少一个第一权值中的每个第一权值包括第一分量,所述第一分量用于指示所述中继设备的回传链路波束。The device according to any one of claims 21 to 25, wherein the first configuration information includes at least one first weight, and each first weight in the at least one first weight includes The first component is used to indicate the backhaul link beam of the relay device.
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的装置,其特征在于,所述每个第一权值还包括第二分量,所述第二分量用于指示所述中继设备的接入链路波束。The apparatus according to claim 26, wherein each first weight further includes a second component, and the second component is used to indicate an access link beam of the relay device.
  28. 根据权利要求22至27中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二配置信息包括至少一个第二权值,所述至少一个第二权值中的每个第二权值包括第三分量,所述第三分量用于指示所述中继设备的回传链路波束。The device according to any one of claims 22 to 27, wherein the second configuration information includes at least one second weight, and each of the at least one second weight includes The third component is used to indicate the backhaul link beam of the relay device.
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的装置,其特征在于,所述每个第二权值包括第四分量,所述第四分量用于指示所述中继设备的接入链路波束。The apparatus according to claim 28, wherein each second weight value includes a fourth component, and the fourth component is used to indicate an access link beam of the relay device.
  30. 根据权利要求21至29中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一波束信息对应于所述中继设备的第一天线,所述第二波束信息对应于所述中继设备的第二天线。The apparatus according to any one of claims 21 to 29, wherein the first beam information corresponds to the first antenna of the relay device, and the second beam information corresponds to the relay device. the second antenna.
  31. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized by including:
    收发单元,用于向网络设备发送第一波束信息;A transceiver unit, used to send the first beam information to the network device;
    所述收发单元,还用于接收所述网络设备发送的第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于配置第一波束集合,所述第一波束集合中的波束用于所述通信装置转发所述网络设备或者终端设备发送的参考信号,The transceiver unit is also configured to receive first configuration information sent by the network device. The first configuration information is used to configure a first beam set, and the beams in the first beam set are used for forwarding by the communication device. The reference signal sent by the network device or terminal device,
    所述第一波束集合是所述网络设备根据所述第一波束信息与第二波束信息确定的;The first beam set is determined by the network device based on the first beam information and the second beam information;
    其中,所述第二波束信息是所述通信装置上报的或者预配置的。Wherein, the second beam information is reported or preconfigured by the communication device.
  32. 根据权利要求31所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to claim 31, characterized in that:
    所述收发单元,还用于通过所述第一波束集合向终端设备转发所述网络设备发送的至少一个参考信号;The transceiver unit is further configured to forward at least one reference signal sent by the network device to the terminal device through the first beam set;
    所述收发单元,还用于向所述网络设备发送所述第一波束集合的测量信息,所述测量信息是所述终端设备根据所述至少一个参考信号确定的。The transceiver unit is further configured to send measurement information of the first beam set to the network device, where the measurement information is determined by the terminal device based on the at least one reference signal.
  33. 根据权利要求31或32所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to claim 31 or 32, characterized in that:
    所述收发单元,还用于通过所述第一波束集合向所述网络设备转发终端设备发送的至少一个参考信号,所述参考信号用于测量。The transceiver unit is further configured to forward at least one reference signal sent by the terminal device to the network device through the first beam set, where the reference signal is used for measurement.
  34. 根据权利要求31至33中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于, The device according to any one of claims 31 to 33, characterized in that:
    所述收发单元,还用于接收所述网络设备发送的第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息用于配置第二波束集合,所述第二波束集合是所述网络设备根据所述第一波束集合的测量信息确定的。The transceiver unit is also configured to receive second configuration information sent by the network device. The second configuration information is used to configure a second beam set. The second beam set is the network device according to the first beam set. Determined by the measurement information of the beam set.
  35. 根据权利要求31至34中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一波束信息对应于所述通信装置的第一天线,所述第二波束信息对应于所述通信装置的第二天线。The device according to any one of claims 31 to 34, wherein the first beam information corresponds to a first antenna of the communication device, and the second beam information corresponds to a third antenna of the communication device. Two antennas.
  36. 根据权利要求31至35中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一波束信息包括所述通信装置与所述网络设备之间的波束方向信息;The device according to any one of claims 31 to 35, wherein the first beam information includes beam direction information between the communication device and the network device;
    所述第二波束信息包括以下至少一项:The second beam information includes at least one of the following:
    波束的数量信息,Information about the number of beams,
    波束的准共址信息,quasi-co-location information for beams,
    波束的覆盖范围信息,Beam coverage information,
    波束之间的相对关系,relative relationship between beams,
    波束集合的数量信息,Information about the number of beam sets,
    波束集合的准共址信息,Quasi-co-location information for beam sets,
    波束集合的覆盖范围信息,coverage information of the beam set,
    波束集合之间的相对关系,The relative relationship between beam sets,
    波束索引与权值之间的对应关系,The correspondence between beam index and weight,
    波束索引与波束之间的对应关系,The correspondence between beam index and beam,
    天线阵列信息,antenna array information,
    权值生成信息,或者,weight generation information, or,
    天线信息。Antenna information.
  37. 根据权利要求31至36中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息包括至少一个第一权值,所述至少一个第一权值中的每个第一权值包括第一分量,所述第一分量用于指示所述中继设备的回传链路波束。The device according to any one of claims 31 to 36, wherein the first configuration information includes at least one first weight, and each first weight in the at least one first weight includes The first component is used to indicate the backhaul link beam of the relay device.
  38. 根据权利要求37所述的装置,其特征在于,所述每个第一权值还包括第二分量,所述第二分量用于指示所述通信装置的接入链路波束。The apparatus of claim 37, wherein each of the first weights further includes a second component, the second component being used to indicate an access link beam of the communication apparatus.
  39. 根据权利要求31至38中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二配置信息包括至少一个第二权值,所述至少一个第二权值中的每个第二权值包括第三分量,所述第三分量用于指示所述通信装置的回传链路波束。The device according to any one of claims 31 to 38, wherein the second configuration information includes at least one second weight, and each of the at least one second weight includes The third component is used to indicate the backhaul link beam of the communication device.
  40. 根据权利要求39所述的装置,其特征在于,所述每个第二权值包括第四分量,所述第四分量用于指示所述通信装置的接入链路波束。The apparatus of claim 39, wherein each of the second weights includes a fourth component, the fourth component being used to indicate an access link beam of the communication apparatus.
  41. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器和存储器,所述处理器与所述存储器耦合,所述存储器存储有指令,所述指令被所述处理器运行时,A communication device, characterized in that it includes a processor and a memory, the processor is coupled to the memory, the memory stores instructions, and when the instructions are run by the processor,
    使得所述处理器执行权利要求1-10中任意一项所述的方法;或者,使得所述处理器执行权利要求11-20中任意一项所述的方法。The processor is caused to perform the method described in any one of claims 1-10; or, the processor is caused to perform the method described in any one of claims 11-20.
  42. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器,所述处理器用于执行权利要求1-10中任意一项所述的方法;或者,所述处理器用于执行权利要求11-20中任意一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized by comprising a processor, the processor being used to perform the method according to any one of claims 1-10; or, the processor being used to perform any one of claims 11-20 the method described.
  43. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括逻辑电路和输入输出接口,所述逻辑电路用于与输入/输出接口耦合,通过所述输入/输出接口传输数据,A communication device, characterized by comprising a logic circuit and an input/output interface, the logic circuit being used to couple with the input/output interface and transmit data through the input/output interface,
    以执行权利要求1-10中任一项所述的方法;或者,以执行权利要求11-20中任一项所述的方法。To perform the method described in any one of claims 1-10; or, to perform the method described in any one of claims 11-20.
  44. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包含收发单元与处理单元,所述收发单元与所述处理单元,用于执行权利要求1-10中任一项所述的方法;或者,用于执行权利要求11-20中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized in that it includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit, and the transceiver unit and the processing unit are used to perform the method described in any one of claims 1-10; or, used to perform the claim The method described in any one of 11-20.
  45. 一种通信系统,其特征在于,所述通信系统包括网络设备与中继设备,A communication system, characterized in that the communication system includes network equipment and relay equipment,
    所述网络设备用于执行权利要求1-10中任一项所述的方法;The network device is used to perform the method described in any one of claims 1-10;
    所述中继设备用于执行权利要求11-20中任一项所述的方法。The relay device is used to perform the method described in any one of claims 11-20.
  46. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或所述指令在计算机上运行时,使得权利要求1-10中任意一项所述的方法被执行;或者,使得权利要求11-20中任意一项所述的方法被执行。 A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that it includes a computer program or instructions that, when the computer program or instructions are run on a computer, cause the method described in any one of claims 1-10 to be executed; Or, the method described in any one of claims 11-20 is performed.
PCT/CN2023/104391 2022-08-25 2023-06-30 Beam management method, communication apparatus, and communication system WO2024041196A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202211025883.2 2022-08-25
CN202211025883.2A CN117715211A (en) 2022-08-25 2022-08-25 Method for beam management, communication device and communication system

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024041196A1 true WO2024041196A1 (en) 2024-02-29

Family

ID=90012418

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/104391 WO2024041196A1 (en) 2022-08-25 2023-06-30 Beam management method, communication apparatus, and communication system

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN117715211A (en)
WO (1) WO2024041196A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111373667A (en) * 2017-11-21 2020-07-03 高通股份有限公司 Dynamic beam management for wireless communications
US20210058140A1 (en) * 2019-08-21 2021-02-25 Commscope Technologies Llc Coverage enhancement for distributed antenna systems and repeaters by time-division beamforming
WO2022082774A1 (en) * 2020-10-23 2022-04-28 华为技术有限公司 Beam management method and communication device
US20220174509A1 (en) * 2020-12-02 2022-06-02 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Method and apparatus for signal transmission and reception in wireless communication system

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111373667A (en) * 2017-11-21 2020-07-03 高通股份有限公司 Dynamic beam management for wireless communications
US20210058140A1 (en) * 2019-08-21 2021-02-25 Commscope Technologies Llc Coverage enhancement for distributed antenna systems and repeaters by time-division beamforming
WO2022082774A1 (en) * 2020-10-23 2022-04-28 华为技术有限公司 Beam management method and communication device
US20220174509A1 (en) * 2020-12-02 2022-06-02 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Method and apparatus for signal transmission and reception in wireless communication system

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
CATT: "Remaining issues on beam management enhancements in Rel.16", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1910350, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. Chongqing, China; 20191013 - 20191020, 5 October 2019 (2019-10-05), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051789154 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN117715211A (en) 2024-03-15

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
Mumtaz et al. MmWave massive MIMO: a paradigm for 5G
US10171149B2 (en) Apparatus, system and method of wireless backhaul and access communication via a common antenna array
CN217956133U (en) Antenna module and base station operating with a multiple-input multiple-output, MIMO, antenna scheme
US20140334564A1 (en) Method and system for providing low-complexity hybrid precoding in wireless communication systems
WO2018095305A1 (en) Beam training method and apparatus
CN107332597B (en) Wireless transmission method and device based on 3D MIMO
JP2022539974A (en) Beam construction method and apparatus
CN108463952B (en) Method, system and device
WO2024041196A1 (en) Beam management method, communication apparatus, and communication system
WO2023175411A1 (en) Channel state information reporting using mixed reference signal types
US10638479B2 (en) System and method for multi-source channel estimation
US20240027574A1 (en) Collaborative Sensing Method, Electronic Device, and Readable Storage Medium
Grass et al. Communication systems operating in the 60 GHz ISM band: Overview
US9800384B2 (en) System and method for multi-source channel estimation
WO2023143153A1 (en) Beam management method and apparatus
WO2023082941A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus based on time reversal
US20230396296A1 (en) Phase correction method and communication apparatus
WO2023165585A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2024032514A1 (en) Signal forwarding method and related apparatus
WO2024032795A1 (en) Relay communication method, relay communication system, and relay communication apparatus
WO2023202478A1 (en) Beam management method, communication apparatus, and communication system
US20240039166A1 (en) Low-profile high-efficiency wide-scanning antenna array
WO2024027387A1 (en) Information transmission method and apparatus
WO2023207969A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication device
WO2024067426A1 (en) Signal forwarding method and related apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23856286

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1